JP2015003103A - System for game and device for game - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To reduce a processing load on a host device when determining game information generated from a game machine in an operation state on the basis of preset setting to determine whether the numeric value of the game information is appropriate.SOLUTION: A host server transmits a threshold for determining whether a base value of a Pachinko machine under operation is appropriate, to a card unit and the card unit stores the threshold. The card unit receives information on the number of hit game balls and information on the number of acquired game balls from the Pachinko machine under operation (S801 to S804), calculates a base value (S806), and compares the base value with the threshold to determine whether the base value is appropriate (S807 to S810).

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a game is played by a player, and a valuable value owned by the player that is communicatively connected to the gaming machine and that is specified by recording information received on the recording medium and recorded on the recording medium. The present invention relates to a gaming system including a gaming device that enables a game on the gaming machine using the game machine, a gaming management device that is communicably connected to the gaming device, and the gaming device.

  Conventionally, a management computer connected so as to be able to communicate with a plurality of gaming machines monitors the difference balls during the big hit of each gaming machine and determines whether or not the difference balls are abnormal based on a preset threshold. There was what to judge (patent document 1).

JP 2005-192990 A

  In general, in the case of a gaming machine, the number of balls that can be acquired during the big hit is different for each model, and the difference ball during the big hit is also different. And in the thing of patent document 1, according to the number of balls which can be acquired, a different threshold is set up for every model, the management computer which is a high-order apparatus makes all judgments, and the difference ball in a big hit is abnormal. In order to determine whether or not there is a problem, there has been a drawback that the processing load on the management computer is remarkably increased.

  In other words, the game information such as the big hit difference ball generated from the operating game machine is different for each model, and the management computer which is the host device judges all the game information different for each model and is abnormal. Since it is determined whether or not there is a disadvantage, the control burden on the host device increases.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to determine game information generated from an operating gaming machine based on a preset setting, and the value of the game information is appropriate. It is to reduce the processing load of the host device when determining whether or not.

(1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), and a recording medium (Card) is received, and the player can use the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium to enable a game on the gaming machine. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) and a gaming management device (the host server 801 or the hall management computer 1) connected to the gaming device in a communicable manner,
The game management device includes:
Settings for performing control to transmit settings (setting information including a threshold value of security related information) used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate to the gaming device Transmission control means (S707),
The gaming machine transmits game information generated in the operating state (information such as game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information for calculating the base) to the gaming device (response in FIG. 18),
The gaming device is:
A setting storage unit (S755, security-related information storage unit in CU3) that stores settings transmitted by the control of the setting transmission control unit;
Appropriateness determination means (S801 to S810) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device stores the setting transmitted from the gaming management device, and determines whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate. Therefore, the game management device is less burdened than the game management device determines by itself whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate.

(2) In the gaming system of (1), the gaming management device includes:
An input setting storage means (security related information storage section in the upper server 801) for receiving and storing a setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate; ,
Setting determination means for determining whether or not the setting stored in the setting storage means is appropriate by collating the setting stored in the setting storage means with the setting stored in the input setting storage means (S706),
Setting update processing means (S707 to S713) for performing processing for updating the setting determined to be inappropriate to an appropriate setting when the setting determination means determines that the setting is inappropriate.

  According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the setting stored in the setting storage unit of the gaming device is appropriate by comparing with the setting stored in the input setting setting storage unit of the gaming management device. When it is determined that the setting is determined to be inappropriate, a process for updating the setting determined to be inappropriate is performed to an appropriate setting. Can be avoided.

  (3) In the gaming system of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining means (Y in S810), it is determined to be inappropriate. It further includes error transmission means (S812) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information to the game management device.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming management device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(4) Another aspect of the present invention is communicable with a game management device (card unit 3) and a game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S), and accepts a recording medium (card) to the recording medium. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game on the gaming machine using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded. There,
A setting receiving means (external communication unit 324, S754) for receiving, from the gaming management device, a setting used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state;
A setting storage unit (S755, security-related information storage unit in CU3) that stores the setting received by the setting reception unit;
Suitability determination means (S801 to S810) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device stores the setting transmitted from the gaming management device, and determines whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate. Therefore, the game management device is less burdened than the game management device determines by itself whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate.

  (5) In the gaming device of (4) above, when it is determined by the suitability determining means that the game device is inappropriate (Y in S810), the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate is set. Error transmitting means (S812) for transmitting error specifying information to be specified to the game management device is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming management device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a rear view for demonstrating the circulation mechanism of a game ball. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the glass door and front frame of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side. It is a figure which shows the content of the information for the control circuit of the main control part and CU communication control part, and memorize | stored. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process at the time of detecting abnormality as a result of mutual authentication. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response performed between a main control part and a CU communication control part. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the recovery response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a communication start request. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an operation instruction. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of an operation response. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various ball numbers, and a fixed point. It is a figure which shows the meaning of various ball numbers, and a fixed point. (A) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 1, (b) is a figure which shows the detail of each bit of the game machine state 2. (C) is a diagram showing details of each bit in the gaming machine error state 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of a communication status response. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an apparatus information response. It is a figure which shows the aspect of transmission / reception of the command and response between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a communication disconnection is detected by the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process at the time of detecting a communication disconnection by the pachinko machine side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. (A) (b) is a figure which shows an example of a processing of the subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29, (a) is an authentication sequence at the time of CU power supply starting, (b) is at the time of game machine power supply starting. This is an authentication sequence. It is a figure which shows an example of a subroutine program process of the CU communication control part authentication sequence shown by Fig.30 (a). FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating an example of processing of a subroutine program of a chip ID authentication sequence illustrated in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of a BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of a CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of a device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of an authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. 31. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the memory | storage setting to the EEPROM of an authentication key. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of normality, (b) is a figure which shows an example of the process of the business message sequence at the time of abnormality. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when a card unit and a pachinko machine are reconnected. It is a figure which shows an example of the process in the time of the standby which is not performing operation of a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program for processing at the time of insertion shown in FIG. 41. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when consuming the balance of a prepaid card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of a replay. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in the case of subtracting the number of game balls according to an instruction on the card unit side. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine in a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the number of game balls in a pachinko machine runs out during a game. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when returning a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a game is interrupted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the lock | rock of the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the modification of the process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the glass door in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when unlocking | releasing and releasing the cell (front frame) of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine is not connected when a power supply is started in the state where a card unit is holding a card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation | movement instruction (no request | requirement operation | movement) from a card unit does not reach | attain a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the operation response from a pachinko machine (response with respect to no request | requirement operation | movement) does not arrive at a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction from a card unit (response to an addition request) does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to an addition request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from a card unit does not reach the pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when the operation response from a pachinko machine (response to a subtraction request) does not reach the card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of addition refusal with respect to the addition request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the subtraction rejection response with respect to the subtraction request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a rejection of a clear with respect to the clear instruction request of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of permission rejection with respect to the game permission request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of prohibition refusal with respect to the game prohibition request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of glass door opening rejection with respect to the glass door opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a pachinko machine returns the response of a cell (front frame) opening rejection with respect to the cell (front frame) opening request | requirement of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when the power failure in the card unit after reaching the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure has occurred in the card unit before the operation instruction is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in a card unit before the operation response regarding addition / subtraction data is reached. FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off illustrated in FIG. 67 occurs. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control process in a case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power interruption occurs illustrated in FIG. 68. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the addition request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the addition request. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 74 occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before the subtraction request is reached. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the subtraction request. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 77 occurs. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption shown in FIG. 78. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the recovery process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a power failure occurs in the card unit before reaching an operation response to the clear request. It is a figure which shows an example of the control processing in the case of communication partner mismatch in the recovery at the time of the CU side power supply interruption shown in FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a control process in the case of communication partner mismatch in recovery at the time of occurrence of a CU-side power interruption shown in FIG. 82. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the operation state displayed in conjunction with processing of a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the card was inserted. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball sharing process which carries out divided transfer (share ball sharing) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the visitor card was inserted. It is a figure which shows the other example of the process of a card unit and a pachinko machine in case the ball share process which carries out divided transfer (shareball share) of a game ball is performed during the game in which the member card was inserted. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of a display device when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a ball sharing process is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a transition screen figure in FIG. It is a screen figure of the indicator when a wagon service is performed. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during membership card insertion. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is a screen figure of the indicator during card return. It is explanatory drawing explaining the monitoring function of the error based on the detection signal of various detection switches accompanying the circulation of an enclosure ball. It is explanatory drawing explaining the counting function of the number of game balls by a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows control of the ball | bowl conveyance process performed by the payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows control of the ball removal process performed by the payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows control of the launch error process performed by the payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows control of the game end detection error 1 process performed by the payout control part. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure which shows various errors and an unauthorized state. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a card unit and the payment control part. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure explaining the detailed example of the communication command between a payout control part and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the transition (transition) relationship of an operation mode in a table form. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between a card unit and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between a card unit and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the representative example of the communication sequence between a payout control part and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between LSI and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between LSI and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between LSI and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the typical example of the communication sequence between LSI and the display effect control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a display. It is a flowchart which shows the process regarding the security relevant information in a high-order server and CU. It is a flowchart which shows the base monitoring process performed by CU. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which shows another example. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine which shows another example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the control command output process of launching and lifting, (b) is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a figure which shows the whole system for delivering the information for authentication which consists of the authentication key for security ensuring, and unique ID (it is also mentioned SID). It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S machine and CU. It is a front view which shows the card unit and the pachinko machine in another example. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control aspect which memorize | stores game history data in each of the CU side and the P stand side in a modification. It is a figure which shows the memory | storage control of the game history data in S stand and CU in a modification. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program in a modification of the insertion time process shown in FIG. 41.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As a concept of terms used in the present embodiment, “gaming equipment” includes gaming machines (pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.), card units, Z counters, card issuing devices, clearing devices, hall management devices, prize exchanges. It is a concept that includes all devices installed in a game hall such as a device, and the “game device” is a concept that excludes only gaming machines from the “game device”.

  First, referring to FIG. 1, an enclosed circulating pachinko machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine” or “P”) 2, which is an example of a gaming machine, is attached to each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. A card unit (which may be abbreviated as CU hereinafter) 3 as an example of a gaming device is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2. Yes. This card unit 3 is issued to a visitor card having a prepaid function which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall. A pachinko machine that accepts membership cards, which are recorded game recording media, and uses the game value (for example, card balance, number of balls, number of balls, etc.) possessed by the player specified by the record information of the cards. 2 has a function for allowing the ball to be fired and playing. The visitor card and membership card are composed of IC cards.

  This pachinko machine 2 encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting ball launch motor 18 (see FIG. 2) is driven to It is configured so that a game can be played one by one in the game area 27 on the front of the game board 26.

  The pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 1 is a so-called first-type pachinko machine, which is not shown, but has a start port (1) and a start where a pachinko ball driven into the game area 27 can win a prize. And a variable display device that variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each of the start ports, and the display result of the variable display device is predetermined. A variable winning ball apparatus (also referred to as a big prize opening) or the like that is opened by a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance) is provided. The start port (2) is composed of an electric tulip that can be changed to a first state (for example, an open state) advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) unfavorable to the player.

  When the variable winning ball apparatus is opened, a big hit state is achieved. In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated. There are two large winning openings, a large winning opening (1) and a large winning opening (2). For example, when a big win is generated based on a winning at the starting port (1), the big winning port (1) is in the first state, and when a big hit is generated based on a winning at the starting port (2), the big winning port (2) is the first state. Furthermore, the game area 2 is provided with four normal winning holes (1) to (4).

  The pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 145 (see FIG. 2) without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 145 are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the pachinko machine 2. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27.

  On the front side of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305 formed to project forward from the front side of the device, and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card or a visitor card 309 etc. are provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309 is received by the card reader / writer 327 (see FIG. 1), and the information recorded on the card is read. In the protrusion 305 described above, the display 312 and the member card ID recorded on the member card and the number of stored balls specified by the member ID are used for the surface facing the player when the member card is received. IR light receiving unit 315 (in FIG. 1) that receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319 for performing a replay game and a remote control (not shown) possessed by a game hall staff, converts the infrared signal into an electronic signal, and outputs it. (Not shown) is provided.

  Furthermore, a lending button 321, a return button 322, and a call button 798 are provided between the display 312 and the replay button 319. The lending button 321 is a button operated to withdraw the prepaid balance specified by the inserted card and use it in the game. The return button 322 is a button operated when returning the card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309. The call button 798 is a button operated by the player when calling a staff member of the game hall.

  The display 312 displays a prepaid balance (also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information described later. In addition to being capable of being displayed, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312 with a finger.

  When the replay button 319 is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, it is possible to play with a pachinko machine by deducting from the number of possessed balls. If the card is a membership card, the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the hall management computer 1 or the like, the game can be played by the pachinko machine 2 as it is withdrawn from the stored ball.

  The “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by the hall management computer 1 or other management computer installed in the game hall. On the other hand, “the number of possession balls” is the number of game balls owned by a player as a result of a player playing a game with a gaming machine on a card, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of retained balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in the upper server such as the hall management computer 1 in association with the member card number, and the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. Has been. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the upper server in association with the card number.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken in by the currency discriminator 344, and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A display 54, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57 are provided below the game area 27 in the pachinko machine 2. The display 54 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and displays a display screen as will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 or FIGS. 89 to 106 to the player. The jog dial 57 selects and designates various display items (icons) and the like on the display screen displayed on the display unit 54 when the player rotates. Then, when the player rotates the jog dial 57, various display items on the display screen displayed on the display 54 are sequentially moved and displayed, and the jog dial 57 is operated by rotating the jog dial 57. When the player presses the chance button 56 after designating the display item that the player wants to select, the selected display item is designated and the player's selection is confirmed.

  2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, FIG. 3 is a front view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls, and FIG. 4 is a rear view for explaining the circulation mechanism of the game balls. With reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 4, the circulation path of the enclosed circulation type pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball apparatus, etc. are detected by a winning ball detection switch (not shown) and collected by a winning ball collecting cover member 144 and collected. Guided to the ball passing path 901. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 145 also flows down the out ball flow path 702. The out ball flow path 702 is provided with an out ball detection switch 701, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls flow down the foul ball return path 151 and flow down from the foul ball return port 150 through the foul ball return path 902 and the recovery ball passage path 901. In the middle of the foul ball return path 151, a foul ball detection switch 33 for detecting a foul ball flowing down is provided.

  The out ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 enters the recovery ball passage path 901, flows down together with the winning ball and the foul ball, and enters the ball collection path 189. A firing ball detection switch 903 is provided in the middle of the recovery ball passage route, and all balls in which the winning ball, the out ball and the foul ball merge are detected.

  Further, a 50 replenishment detection switch (also referred to as a game ball shortage detection switch) 904 is provided at an intermediate position on the downstream side of the shot ball detection switch 903. The 50 replenishment detection switch 904 is for detecting whether or not the number of pachinko balls built in the pachinko machine 2 has reached a predetermined number (50). On the other hand, the above-mentioned shot ball detection switch 903 collects and detects all the pachinko balls that have been shot into the game area 27, and the number of shot balls that have been shot into the game area 27 and the number of shot balls that have been shot. When the number of pachinko balls detected by the detection switch 903 becomes equal, it is detected that all the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 have been collected.

  The fired ball detection switch 903 having such a role is also used for detecting that the number of encapsulated balls built in the pachinko machine 2 exceeds a predetermined number (50). That is, when a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are enclosed in the pachinko machine 2, the last 50th pachinko balls of the enclosed balls that are stopped in a non-operating state in which no game is being performed are displayed. The position is configured to be located between the 50 replenishment detection switch 904 and the firing ball detection switch 903. As a result, when more than a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are encapsulated in the gaming machine 2, the pachinko balls that are parked in a state where no game is played will exceed the detection position of the firing ball detection switch 903. The fired ball detection switch 903 is always in a ball detection state, thereby making it possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too large. On the other hand, if the number of encapsulated balls is less than the predetermined number (50), the pachinko balls that are parked in the non-game state are located downstream of the detection position of the 50 replenishment detection switch 904, and the replenishment 50 The individual detection switch 904 enters a non-detection state where no ball is detected. As a result, it is possible to detect that the number of encapsulated balls is too smaller than the predetermined number (50).

  The pachinko balls that have flowed down the ball collection path 189 enter a transport device 190 for transporting the pachinko balls upward. The conveyance device 190 includes a conveyance screw 190b that is rotated by the conveyance motor 40, and the pachinko ball is conveyed upward by the rotation of the conveyance screw 190b. The conveying device 190 is further provided with a pair of left and right polishing members 913 that polish the pachinko balls by contacting the pachinko balls in the middle of conveyance, and the surface of the pachinko balls is polished while being conveyed upward. The The polishing member 913 is rotated by the driving force of the polishing motor 193a to polish the pachinko balls.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided in the vicinity of the pachinko ball entrance of the transport device 190, and a pachinko ball entering the transport device 190 is detected. On the other hand, a pachinko ball conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 and discharged from the conveying device 190 is detected by a ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The detected pachinko ball flows down to the rectifier 916. The rectifier 916 is for supplying pachinko balls one by one to the ball launch position. When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25, the hitting motor 18 is driven and the hitting hammer 920 is intermittently swung. One pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position by the rectifier 916 is ejected by the hitting hammer 920 and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The rectifier 916 is provided with a rectifier solenoid 196a and a ball feed member 196b that swings up and down by the driving force of the rectifier solenoid 196a in order to supply pachinko balls one by one to the ball firing position by the hitting hammer 920. Yes. The ball feeding member 196b has a U-shape as shown in FIG. 2, and receives one pachinko ball that has flowed down, and in this state, the rectifier solenoid 196a is excited to feed the ball by its driving force. The member 196b swings downward. Then, only one received pachinko ball is supplied to the hitting ball launch position. When the hitting hammer 920 bounces the supplied pachinko ball, the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27.

  The hitting hammer 920 is biased by a spring in the hitting direction, and the hitting hammer 920 is reverse to the hitting direction (backswing direction) by the action of a cam that is rotated by the driving force of the hitting motor 18. Is swung. Then, when the predetermined amount of rocking is performed, the cam action is released and the hitting hammer 920 is rocked in the driving direction by the biasing force of the spring, so that the pachinko ball is bullet-launched. The spring urging in the hitting direction can be adjusted by rotating the hitting operation handle 25 by the player, whereby the hitting momentum can be adjusted.

  A ball removal portion 915 is provided between the rectifier 916 and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. The ball removal unit 915 is provided with a ball removal motor 195a. When a game attendant operates a ball removal switch 922 provided on the relay board 921, the ball removal motor 195a rotates by a predetermined amount, and the enclosed ball can be extracted out of the path. This beading control will be described in detail later.

  The ball raising switch (upper) 41 a is used for the on / off control of the conveyance motor 40 by the detection signal. In the state where the hitting operation by the hitting operation handle 25 is not performed and the hitting ball is not shot, the rectifier 916 does not perform the ball feeding operation, and therefore, the pachinko balls conveyed upward by the conveying device 190 flow down at the position of the rectifier 916. Is stopped and stopped. When the pachinko ball to be stopped reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, a ball detection signal is constantly output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. When the continuous output state of such a ball detection signal continues for a predetermined time (for example, several milliseconds), the driving of the transport motor 40 is stopped and the transport of the ball upward is stopped.

  On the other hand, when the player rotates the hitting operation handle 25 to fire the hitting ball, the rectifier 916 executes a ball feeding operation. As a result, the ball that has stopped and stopped at the rectifier 916 is stopped. The ball detection signal is not output from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the ball is lifted. Since the number of balls raised per unit time by driving the conveyance motor 40 is controlled to be larger than the number of balls firing per unit time by driving the firing motor 18, the driving of the conveyance motor 40 is started. When a little time has passed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a again outputs a ball detection signal, and the driving of the carry motor 40 is stopped. However, since the hitting of the hit ball continues, the ball detection signal is not output again from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a. Then, the drive of the conveyance motor 40 is started and the ball is lifted. In the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation, the driving and stopping of the transport motor 40 are repeated.

  The firing motor 18 is provided with a firing motor origin sensor 37 (see FIG. 6). The firing motor origin sensor 37 is for stopping the firing motor 18 at a predetermined origin position. The firing motor 18 stops when the player releases his hand from the touch link 35 provided on the hitting operation handle 25. At the time when the firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin of the firing motor, the firing motor is stopped. 18 is controlled to stop. In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 2 is turned on, if the launch motor 18 is deviated from the origin position and the output of the launch motor origin sensor 37 is OFF, the launch motor 18 is rotated forward depending on the current position of the launch motor 18. Alternatively, control is performed to reverse the position and move the stop position of the firing motor to the origin without firing the pachinko ball. The current stop position of the firing motor is compared with the position of the origin to determine whether the firing motor 18 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction in the direction of rotation close to the origin position. You may make it move a stop position to an origin by carrying out rotation control.

  Similarly, a ball removal motor origin sensor 195b (see FIG. 6) is provided in the ball removal motor 195a, and the ball removal motor 195a is controlled to stop at the origin position.

  The above-described winning ball detection switch, gaming ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, and out ball detection switch 701 are electrostatic capacitances due to the passage of balls. It consists of proximity switches that detect changes in On the other hand, only the shot ball detection switch 903 is configured by a photosensor of a light projecting / receiving type. In amusement halls, there are cases where fraudulent acts using radio waves are performed in which fraudulent radio waves are transmitted to misdetect the ball detection switch. When such an improper radio wave is transmitted, the proximity switch may be erroneously detected, but the photosensor has no risk of erroneous detection. As a result, when a fraudulent act of transmitting an improper radio wave occurs, the winning ball detection switch, the foul ball detection switch 33, and the out ball detection switch 701, which are configured by proximity switches, output detection signals associated with erroneous detection. However, since there is no risk of erroneous detection of the fired ball detection switch 903 formed of a photosensor, the total number of detected balls and the fired ball of the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the winning ball detection switch. A wrinkle occurs between the number of balls detected by the detection switch 903. As a result, fraudulent acts caused by radio waves can be monitored. The above-described winning ball detection switch, game ball shortage detection switch 904, ball raising switch (upper) 41a, ball raising switch (lower) 41b, foul ball detection switch 33, out ball detection switch 701, and shot ball detection switch 903 are provided. , All may be composed of the same type of switch.

  Next, referring to FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a front frame (also referred to as a cell) 5 and a glass door 6 with respect to the frame-shaped outer frame 4 so that the left and right edges can be opened and closed. It has been.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front frame 5 opposite to the center of swinging. The engaging protrusions 6a and 6b are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b are provided at positions facing the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b of the outer frame 4. When the front frame 5 in the open state is pressed against the outer frame 4, the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b get over the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b, and the engagement protrusions 6a and 6b are moved downward by the urging force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front frame opening solenoid 11 is provided on the rear surface side of the front frame 5. When the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited, a pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6a and 6b against the biasing force of the spring. Is pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6a and 6b are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7a and 7b to be unlocked, and the front frame 5 is released.

  Further, the front frame 5 is also provided with an engagement projection 8 for the glass door 6, and an engagement hole 9 is provided in the glass door 6 portion facing the engagement projection 8. The engagement protrusion 8 is pressed downward by a spring (not shown), and the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed up by the lower edge portion of the engagement hole 9 by pressing the opened glass door 6 against the front frame 5. By getting over, the engagement protrusion 8 is pushed down by the urging force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are engaged with each other to be locked. In this state, by energizing the glass door opening solenoid 10 provided on the back surface of the front frame 5, the engagement protrusion 8 is pulled up against the biasing force of the spring, and the engagement protrusion 8 and the engagement hole 9 are pulled up. Is released and the glass door 6 is opened.

  A front frame closing detector 13 is provided at a position in contact with the front frame 5 in the upper part of the outer frame 4, and it is detected that the front frame 5 is pressed against the outer frame 4 and is locked. Further, a glass door closing detector 12 is provided in a contact portion with the glass door 6 in an upper portion of the front frame 5, and this glass door is that the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 to be in a locked state. Detected by the closure detector 12.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and a CU communication control unit 80 for communicating with the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2. Is provided. The card unit 3 is provided with a connection part 330 to the pachinko machine 2 side, and the pachinko machine 2 is provided with a connection part 20 to the card unit 3 side. These connection parts 330 and 20 are comprised by the connector etc., for example. The CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 20 and connection wiring. The CPU 805 (see FIG. 9) of the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 for display when detecting an unconnected error such as disconnection between the external communication unit 324 and the hall management computer 1. The controller 312 displays an error and controls to turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, when the main control unit 323 detects an unconnected error such as a disconnection between the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81, the main control unit 323 transmits an error display command to the display control unit 797 to cause an error to the display 312. Control is performed so that an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked, and a notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1.

  The above-described money discriminator 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the discrimination result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card. The CPU 805 of the main control unit 323 determines the suitability of the card based on the read information from the card reader / writer 327. When the CPU 805 determines that the card is an improper card (forged card or the like), an error display command is displayed to the display control unit 797. To display the error on the display 312 and turn on or blink an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) and transmit a notification signal to the hall management computer 1 that an error has occurred. .

  A display control unit 797 is connected to the main control unit 323, and display data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the main control unit 323 to the display control unit 797. The display control unit 797 receives the output display data and controls the display 312 to display the display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323 via the display control unit 797.

  When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the call button 798, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a main control board 16 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 2, a payout control section 17, a launch control board 31, a game ball control section 34, a launch section 39, and an effect section 50. Is provided.

  A CU communication control unit 80 is further connected to the main control unit 323, and the CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 provided in the pachinko machine 2 are connected via the connector 330 and the connector 20. Electrically connected. The P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 are configured by a one-chip LSI 799. Then, as will be described later, various commands such as an addition request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the P unit communication control unit 81. Various commands are transmitted from the P-unit communication control unit 81 to the payout control unit 17.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit communication control unit 81, various kinds of game balls, addition balls, subtraction balls, start opening winning information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, error information A response is sent.

  A game control microcomputer is mounted on the main control board 16. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 17 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. Note that the game control microcomputer mounted on the main control board 16 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 may be integrated into one chip.

  Further, the out ball detection switch 701, the foul ball detection switch 33, the glass door opening solenoid 10, the front frame opening solenoid 11, the glass door closing detector 12, and the front frame closing detector 13 are electrically connected to the payout control unit 17. Are provided in a connected state.

  The main control board 16 transmits a connection confirmation signal, a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, and manufacturer-specific jackpot information to the payout control unit 17.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16 and the payout controller 17 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16 to the payout controller 17. The payout control unit 17 controls the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 17 receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control unit 17 performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls. This will be described in detail later.

  The start opening prize information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize at either the start opening 1 or the start opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control unit 17 when an error occurs while the main control board 16 is performing game control. Specific examples of the error include, for example, a timing sensor error that causes the game area 27 to bring a magnet close to the game area and guides the game ball to the prize opening, a radio wave sensor error that illegally turns on the winning ball detection switch by transmitting an illegal radio wave, and a variable prize There is an illegal winning error or the like in which a detection signal is output from a 10 count switch that detects a winning ball of the variable winning ball device when the ball device (attacker) is closed (see FIG. 19). When the CPU of the main control board 16 detects such an error or non-connection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain plate and the I / O port of the main control board 16 An abnormality notification signal for notifying that the abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1 is output from the not shown.

  The symbol fixed number of times is information on the symbol determined as a display result of the variable display device with respect to winning at the start port 1 or the start port 2. The information of the symbol determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning at the start port 1 is called the symbol determination frequency 1. The symbol information determined as the display result of the variable display device for the winning at the start port 2 is referred to as symbol determination frequency 2.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a winning ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the main control board 16. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16 is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701 to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 to which the out ball detection signal has been inputted subtracts and updates the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27) as will be described later. In the payout control unit 17 to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated.

  When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the glass door opening solenoid 10, the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG. When the dispensing control unit 17 controls the excitation of the front frame opening solenoid 11, the front frame 5 is unlocked and opened as described with reference to FIG.

  As described with reference to FIG. 5, when the glass door 6 is pressed against the front frame 5 and closed, a glass door closing detection signal is output from the glass door closing detector 12 and input to the dispensing control unit 17. As described with reference to FIG. 5, the front frame 5 is pressed against the outer frame 4 and closed to output a front frame closing detection signal from the front frame closing detector 13 and input to the dispensing control unit 17.

  The CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3 and the P unit control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2 are electrically connected, and the addition is performed from the CU communication control unit 80 to the payout control unit 17 via the P unit control unit 81. Various commands such as a request, a subtraction request, a game permission / prohibition request, an addition request ball number, and a subtraction request ball number are transmitted.

  As will be described later, the addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a game ball is rented or replayed from the prepaid balance, and the payout control unit 17 adds the number of game balls in response thereto. Update. As will be described later, the subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when a split ball transfer (ball sharing process) or a wagon service is performed, and the payout control unit 17 receiving the command receives the number of game balls. Update the subtraction.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 17 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The addition request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be added to the game ball number by the above-described addition request command. The subtraction request ball number is a command for designating the number of balls to be subtracted from the game ball number by the above-described subtraction request command.

  From the payout control unit 17 to the CU communication control unit 80 via the P-unit control unit 81, various responses of the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, start opening winning information, the number of symbols determined, jackpot information, and error information Sent. The number of game balls is calculated by the payout control unit 17 based on various signals such as a winning detection signal, start opening winning information, out ball detection signal, and foul ball detection signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. This is the total number of game balls currently played. The number of balls to be added is the number of balls to be added to the number of game balls based on the winning detection signal, the start opening winning information, and the foul ball detection signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. It is. The number of subtracted balls is the number of subtracted balls subtracted from the number of game balls based on a firing detection signal transmitted from a game ball control unit 34 to be described later to the payout control unit 17. Each response of the start opening prize information, the number of symbol determinations, the jackpot information, and the error information is a response that designates the information transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 described above.

  The launch unit 38 of the game ball control unit is provided with a launch motor 18, a touch ring 35, a single launch switch 36, and a launch motor origin sensor 37. The touch ring 35 is for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25 and outputting the signal (touch ring input signal). The firing control board 31 emits a firing motor excitation output when the touch ring input signal is input, and drives the firing motor 18. The single shot switch 36 is used for a player to perform an operation (single shot operation) for driving a pachinko ball into the game area 27 one by one. When the single shot operation is performed, the single shot switch 36 is used. A single fire switch signal is output. The firing motor origin sensor 37 detects the origin position of the firing motor 18 and outputs a detection signal thereof. Each time the firing motor 18 makes one revolution, the origin is detected and a signal is output.

  A touch ring signal and a single shot switch detection signal are input from the launch unit 38 to the launch control board 31. Further, a launch detection signal indicating that the pachinko ball has been launched and a detection signal of the launch motor origin sensor are input from the launch unit 38 to the payout control unit 17. Upon receiving the firing detection signal, the payout control unit 17 updates the number of subtracted balls and the number of in-game balls by 1 and updates the number of game balls by 1 with respect to the detection of one fired ball.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the firing control board 31. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 outputs a signal for exciting the launch motor 18. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state where it is bullet-launched into the game area 27.

  The ball removal unit 39 is provided with a ball removal motor 195a, a ball removal motor origin sensor 195b, and a ball removal switch 922 described with reference to FIGS. A game attendant operates the ball removal switch 922 to input a detection signal to the payout control unit 17. Further, the origin detection signal of the ball removal motor origin sensor 195 b is input to the dispensing control unit 17. On the other hand, a ball removal motor drive control signal is output from the payout control unit 17 to the ball removal motor 195a.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the transport unit 45 provided in the game ball control unit 34 includes a transport motor 40, a game ball shortage detection switch 904, a ball lift switch (lower) 41 b, and a ball lift. A switch (upper) 41a and a fired ball detection switch 903 are provided. A conveyance motor excitation output signal for exciting the conveyance motor 40 is transmitted from the dispensing control unit 17 to the conveyance unit 45. On the other hand, 50 replenishment detection signals as detection signals of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 are input from the transport unit 45 to the payout control unit 17, and detection by the ball raising switch (lower) 41b and the ball raising switch (upper) 41a A conveyance detection (pass / full) signal is input as a signal. Further, a detection signal of a shot ball (joint ball) is input as a detection signal of the shot ball detection switch 903. Based on this detection signal, the payout controller 17 subtracts and updates the number of balls in game (the number of balls floating in the game area 27).

  The counting unit 46 provided in the game ball control unit 34 is provided with a foul ball detection switch 33 and an out ball detection switch 701 in addition to the above-described ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the fired ball detection switch 903. ing. A detection signal of the foul ball detection switch 33 is input to the payout control unit 17. Based on this foul ball detection signal, the payout control unit 17 adds and updates the number of added balls and the number of game balls, and subtracts and updates the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls).

  A polishing motor excitation signal is output from the dispensing control unit 17 to the above-described polishing motor 193a provided in the polishing unit 47.

  The effect section 50 includes a display effect control board 53, a display power supply board 51, a display power supply relay board 52, a display 54, a display ROM board 55, a chance button 56, and a jog dial 57. Is provided. The display effect control board 53 includes a CPU, a RAM, and a VDP. Control is performed to read image data by inputting a data read signal to the ROM mounted on the ROM board 55 for the display device, to transmit the display data to the display device 54, and to display the display screen on the display device 54. To do. The button input signal of the chance button 56 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 57 are input to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 sends the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the display 54. A display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 57 and the operation of the chance button 56 is displayed on the display 54.

  Electric power of a predetermined voltage from the display power supply board 51 is supplied to the display effect control board 53 via the display power supply relay board 52.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit operation command, and a test command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating a gaming state by the pachinko machine 2 such as the number of jackpot occurrences and the probability variation number, and the card unit operation command is a command when the player operates the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect unit 50. Details of this display control command will be described later with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127.

  As the command from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the next command is transmitted every 300 ms after the transmission of the previous command. Then, the display effect control board 53 detects a line disconnection and performs a time-over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command has not been transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by 1, and when the error count is counted 10 times continuously, The effect control board 53 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the display 54 to display the lighting of the calling lamp and the error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, main data among various data stored on each of the CU side and the P base side and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the current number of game balls is managed by calculating the fluctuation of the number of game balls on the P side on the CU side. The P game side also calculates and stores the current number of game balls, but the number of game balls is controlled so that when the number of game balls reaches 0 on the P table side, the P game player quickly stops hitting the ball. It is a secondary item used only for performing Since the main management of the number of game balls is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of game balls on the P table side, and the cost of the P game can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In particular, compared with the CU, the P units have a short replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. For that reason, the running cost of the game hall where the enclosed game machine is introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with a main management function related to the number of game balls on the P platform side to reduce the cost on the P platform side. There is an advantage.

  FIG. 7 shows RAM storage data provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and RAM storage data mounted on the payout control unit 17 on the P platform side. First, when the power is turned on with the P units (pachinko machine 2) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 17 on the P unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 16, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 17 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data of the time when the CU side and the P base side are connected and the communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the P base side, and the P connection side stores the transmitted connection time. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the P base side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P units as in the previous time are connected. The connection time data includes new connection time data transmitted from the CU side to the P base side when communication between the CU side and the P base side is started each time the power is turned on. Is stored on the P platform side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the P base side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by "1" and the sequence number is stored on the CU side and the P base side. The The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the P platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and P platform in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the P units in response to the operation instruction. When the SQN is received from the P unit, the CU rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the P units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the P unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and the next time the operation response is transmitted from the P unit to the CU, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated on the P platform.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 67 to 82 described later, when a communication interruption occurs during communication, the SQN is backed up until the communication is reconnected. Since the operation response is always transmitted regardless of the occurrence time of the error (see FIGS. 60 and 67 to 82), the SQN stored in the backup until the communication is reconnected is always the last SQN transmitted. It has become. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction is transmitted or an operation instruction is received according to the timing of occurrence of communication disconnection (see FIGS. 60 and 67 to 82), the process until the communication is reconnected. The SQN stored during the backup is either the last transmitted or the last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the P platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the P platform side. Then, when the operation response is returned from the P platform side to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. Then, the sequence number of n + 2 is sent to the P platform side.

  Next, the current ball related information (the ball related information being counted) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. This current ball related information is stored in the current ball related information storage area of the RAM. Specifically, when a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 wins and the additional ball number information is transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17, the additional ball counter is used to calculate the additional ball number. Counting is performed, and the value of the added ball counter (the number of added balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side. If a pachinko ball is fired into the game area 27 and the fired ball is detected by the fired ball detection switch, a subtraction ball counter counts the number of fired balls as a subtraction ball number based on the detection signal, and the subtraction. The value of the number of balls counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side.

  Further, the pachinko ball has won the start opening (1) or the start opening (2), and the start opening (1) winning signal or the starting opening (2) winning signal has been transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control section 17. In this case, the payout control unit 17 counts the winning numbers on the P platform side using the starting port 1 winning number counter or the starting port 2 winning number counter, and transmits the count value from the P platform side to the CU side. Further, the payout control unit 17 counts the number of game balls at the present time with the game ball number counter based on the number of added balls and the number of subtraction balls, and the count value of the game ball number counter is changed from the P side to the CU side. Send to.

  On the P side, every time the value of the addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter, starting port 2 winning counter, and game ball counter is transmitted to the CU side, After storing (rewriting) as backup data in the previous ball related information storage area, the values of the additional ball counter, subtracted ball counter, starting port 1 winning counter and starting port 2 winning counter as current ball related information are set to 0. clear. In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous ball related information (current ball related information transmitted immediately before), the current ball related information transmitted to the CU side immediately before, the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of winnings at the start opening 1 And the data of the number of start-up 2 winnings is stored as backup data. When the current ball related information is not transmitted from the P platform side to the CU side, this backup data includes not only the current counter value but also the previous counter value that was not transmitted at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), the starting port (1) the total number of winning prizes (starting port (1) The total number of times), the start opening (2) the total number of winnings (start opening (2) total number of times), and the number of game balls are stored.

  The total number of added balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (number of added balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Also, the total number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls are updated based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P platform side. Further, the starting port (1) total winning number is updated based on the value of the starting port 1 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit, and the value of the starting port 2 winning number counter transmitted from the P unit side is updated. Based on the starting opening (2), the total number of winnings is updated. In this way, the CU can manage the latest number of game balls by updating the number of game balls according to the current ball related information transmitted one by one from the P cars. Similarly, the CU updates the total number of added balls, the total number of subtracted balls, the starting port (1), (2) the total number of winnings by updating the current ball related information transmitted from the P unit one by one. Information can be managed.

  As will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 and 18, the breakdown of the “number of added balls” is game ball acquired number information and back ball added information. The back ball is a foul ball. The “subtracted ball count” is also referred to as game ball shot count information.

  The CU receives the count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball count or game ball total count information) in addition to the value of the addition ball counter and the subtraction ball counter from the P side. The number of game balls stored by itself is updated based on the values of the added ball number counter and the subtracted ball number counter, and the count value of the game ball counter sent from the P platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of game balls sent from the P side does not match the number of game balls managed on the CU side, the number of game balls on the CU side is sent from the P side. It is never updated with the number of balls.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side with the current number of game balls updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control to shift to the error state, the CU performs recovery processing, transmits a communication start request command to the P units, and uses the data correction request Bit1 data included in the command to determine the number of P game balls ( Processing to correct the game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed. As the correction process, correction is made to the number of game balls managed on the CU side. Instead, the number of game balls managed on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side are stored. You may correct | amend to the average value with the number of balls.

  Further, instead of such correction processing, for example, an error notification is given by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, hall management). An error notification by the computer 1 may be performed), or a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member may be performed.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of the various counters transmitted from the P platform side, and calculates and manages the current number of game balls based on the value of the addition / subtraction ball number counter in particular. Has a main management function. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the P platform. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P side for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the number of game balls reaches zero. However, a game ball counter for storing the number of game balls on the P platform side may not be provided.

  The CU performs a game ball number matching determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated number of game balls at the present time with the value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side. And a function of performing control to shift to an error state when there is no match (error control at the time of mismatch).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the P platform side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side does not match the number of game balls managed and stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, although the determination function is provided on the CU side, for example, the number of game balls stored on the CU side and the game stored on the P stand side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. The number of balls may be received and it may be determined whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a holding ball (a stored ball) and a storage area for storing a card balance of a received (inserted) card. The main control unit 323 (see FIG. 6) of the CU receives an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of a replay button (also referred to as a replay button) 319 (see FIG. 6) provided on the CU)). In response, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 6) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own game value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the amount of the deducted ball The addition request ball number for adding the number to the game ball counter is transmitted from the CU side to the P stand side. On the P side, in response to this, the game ball number counter is added and updated.

  On the other hand, when an operation for performing a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like is executed, the number of balls requested to be subtracted from the player-owned game value is To the P platform side. On the P platform side, the game ball counter is decremented and updated.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control mode in which game history data is stored on each of the CU side and the P platform side. Note that the game history data is data indicating a history of a game state generated when a player plays a game with the P table 2. For example, the start history (variable) is a variable display count of a variable display device. Display device variation start count), number of occurrences of jackpot, number of starts from previous jackpot to current jackpot, base value, and the like. Here, the base is the ratio of the acquired number of game balls acquired by the player by being added to the game balls in accordance with a prize with respect to the number of fired balls. ”(%). Such game history data includes game history data throughout the day on the P machines and game history data aggregated for each player on the P machines. As will be described in detail later, the former game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit provided on both the P machine side and the CU side, and the latter game history data is stored on the P machine side and the CU side. Are stored in the current player game history data storage unit provided in both of them or in the backup storage unit provided only on the P platform side. In other words, the game history data throughout the day on the P machine and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P machine are stored in both the CU 3 and the P machine 2.

  Referring to FIG. 8, when a player plays a game with P stand 2, various game data such as big hits and start (variable display device fluctuation start) are generated, and the game data is input to game history data management unit 291. Is done. The normal game data generated as a result of the player playing the game on the P units is totaled, for example, by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17, and the totaled game history The data is input to the display effect control unit 292 provided on the display effect control board 53, and the game history data is accumulated and stored in the P game history data storage unit. The present P game history data storage unit can store game history data for 10 days including today's game history data. When the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 described above to select and display the game history data on the day to be displayed, the game history data on the selected day is displayed on the display 54. The communication between the display effect control unit 292 and the game history data management unit 291 is a one-way communication from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292.

  On the other hand, the above-described game data input to the game history data management unit 291 is also transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 provided in the main control unit 323, for example, via the CU communication control unit 80 of the CU3. The game data is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. The totaled game history data is stored in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. This P stand game history data storage unit on the CU3 side is configured to store only the game history data of the day. If the player touches the display 312 configured with a touch panel to display the P game history data, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the game history data is displayed. Under the control of the management unit 391, the game history data of the day stored in the current P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, the CU 3 is configured so that the game history data of the other P units 2 installed in the game hall can be displayed on the display 312. Specifically, when the player touches an operation button icon of the other P device information display displayed on the display 312, the operation signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and the other P device information is displayed. The other P machine game history data request notification is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the hall management computer 1 by the operation of the processing unit. The hall management computer 1 receives the game history data of the other P machines 2 via the other CU 3, and returns the received other P machine game history data to the game history data management unit 391. The game history data management unit 391 processes the returned other P game history data by the other P information processing unit, and processes the processed other P game history data in the data storage unit 392. Store in the history data storage unit. The stored other P game history data is displayed on the display 312.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to aggregate game history data for each player who played a game on the P platform 2 and display the game history data for each player on the display units 54 and 312. In order to tabulate the game history data for each player, it is necessary to distinguish the players who are playing the game on the P unit 2. C-ID (card ID) stored in a member card possessed by a player who is a member is used as player identification information for distinguishing the player. The C-ID is an ID that is stored in a card and identifies the cards. The member card is issued to a player who becomes a member in the game hall, and the member and the member card have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card can identify not only the member card but also a member player. Therefore, the C-ID stored in the member card functions as player identification information for identifying the player.

  As will be described in detail later, when a player who is a member inserts a member card into the CU 3, the C-ID stored in the inserted member card is read, and the C-ID is stored in the data storage unit 392. It is stored in the player game history data storage unit. On the other hand, the read C-ID is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P stand 2, and the P stand 2 transmits the received C-ID from the game history data management unit 291 to the display effect control unit 292, thereby displaying the display effect. The current player game history data storage unit of the control unit 292 is stored.

  In this state, when the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game history data from when the C-ID is stored in the current player game history data storage unit is the current player of the display effect control unit 292. Cumulatively stored in the game history data storage unit. If the player operates the jog dial 57 and the chance button 56 to display his / her own game history data, the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display. 54. In addition, the game history data management unit 391 also counts the game history data by the normal mode processing unit based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2, and stores the C in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. -The game history data accumulated by the normal mode processing unit from the stage where A is stored as an ID is accumulated and stored in the current player game history data storage unit. When the player touches the display 312 including a touch panel and performs an operation for displaying his / her game history data, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391 and the game history data management unit 391. Controls the display 312 to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392.

  As described above, the game history data throughout the day on the P platform and the game history data aggregated for each player on the P platform are displayed on both the P platform side and the CU side by the display switching operation. One game history data and the other game history data are switched and displayed.

  When a player playing a game on the P stand 2 pushes the return button 322 to return the member card inserted, the member card is discharged from the CU 3. Then, the game history data management unit 391 erases the C-ID and game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. As a result, even if the display 312 is operated to display the game history a stored in the current player game history data storage unit, the game history a is not displayed on the display 312.

  On the other hand, when the membership card is discharged from CU3, a card return notification is transmitted from CU to P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that receives the card return notification returns the card to the display effect control unit 292. Send a notification. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores A as the C-ID stored in the current player game history data storage unit and the game history data a in the backup data storage unit, so that the current player game The C-ID and game history data in the history data storage unit are deleted. As a result, even if an operation for displaying the game history data a on the display 54 is performed, the game history data a is not displayed on the display 54.

  The return button 322 is normally operated when the game by the P table 2 is ended. However, the player temporarily stops the game, returns to the P table 2 where the game has been played again, and plays the game again. May resume. In such a case, usually after performing a game interruption operation described later, the card is ejected, the card is brought to the player, the player completes a small use, and the player returns to the same P stand 2 to return the card to the CU3. Although it is inserted, the player may press the return button 322 and remove the card from the P stand 2 without performing such a game interruption operation.

  In such a case, when the same player who has left the P table 2 without playing another player returns to the P table 2 and inserts the membership card into the CU 3 again, he leaves. It is desirable to take over the previous game history data of the player and add and update the game history data after the game has been resumed to the game history data for cumulative storage. In order to realize this, the C-ID and game history data are backed up and stored in the backup data storage unit provided in the display effect control unit 292 described above. When the player who has returned to the P table 2 inserts the member card into the CU 3, the card information of the member card is read, and the inserted card information including the C-ID of the member card is transferred from the CU 3 to the P table 2. Sent. In the P table 2, the game history data management unit 291 receives the C-ID included in the inserted card information, and transmits the received C-ID to the display effect control unit 292. The display effect control unit 292 compares the transmitted C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit and determines whether or not they match. If they match, it is determined that the same player as the player who has left the seat has resumed the game, and A as the C-ID and a as the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit are stored in the current game. It returns to the player game history data storage unit and stores it in the current player game history data storage unit. Then, the stored data in the backup data storage unit is deleted. Game history data generated after the player played a game with the P unit 2 in a state where the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is stored in the current player game history data storage unit and taken over Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the comparison result between the C-ID included in the inserted card information transmitted from the CU 3 and the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit does not match, the backup data A as C-ID and a as game history data stored in the storage unit are deleted.

  As a modification, the following control may be performed after the communication between the game history data management unit 291 and the display effect control unit 292 is bidirectional communication.

  A comparison result between the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit by the display effect control unit 292 and the C-ID transmitted from the CU 3, and a determination result as to whether or not they match is the display effect control unit. 292, and transmitted to the game history data management unit 391 of CU3 via the game history data management unit 291. In the game history data management unit 391, if the transmitted C-ID determination result matches, the game history data management unit 391 uses the C-ID determined to match as the current player game history of the data storage unit 392. Store in the data storage unit. In the case of the determination result that the C-ID determination results match, the game history data a is included in the C-ID determination result. The game history data management unit 391 that has received the game history data a stores the game history data a in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, if the player plays a game with the P stand 2, the game data is transmitted to the game history data management unit 391, and is aggregated by the normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391. Is added and updated to the game history data a stored in the current player game history data storage unit and accumulated. In this state, if the player performs an operation of touching the display 312 to display his / her own game history data, the game history data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is displayed as described above. Displayed by the instrument 312.

  Note that the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 may be controlled so as to erase the backup data stored when a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, a test hit mode (test mode) processing function is provided. This test hit mode is a mode in which a game machine manufacturer performs a shipment inspection at the time of game machine manufacture, an operation check at the time of game machine installation at a game hall, a display of the number of balls such as safe / out, a base check at the time of nail adjustment, etc. . When a game attendant inserts a test card for test hit mode into the CU 3, the card information of the test card is read and the test hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391 performs processing for shifting to the test hit mode. . Specifically, the test hit mode notification is transmitted to the P stand 2, and the game history data management unit 291 that has received the test hit mode notification transmits the test hit mode notification to the display effect control unit 292 by the operation of the test hit mode processing unit. . In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 stores game history data based on game data generated thereafter in the trial hit game history data storage unit. The trial hit game history data storage unit is configured by a storage area different from the P-unit game history data storage unit, the current player game history data storage unit, and the backup data storage unit described above. The game history data in the trial hit mode is stored in the part.

  The game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  Also in CU3, game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 is totaled by the operation of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391, and the totaled game history data is displayed in the trial hit mode. Is displayed on the display 312 as game history data.

  In the display 312, operation button icons such as a recount button are also displayed, and after the nail master who has viewed the game history data in the test hit mode displayed in the total display adjusts the nail based on the game history data, the game in the test hit mode is performed again. There is a case where it is desired to check the result of the nail adjustment by collecting the history data and displaying it. In such a case, the recount button icon is touch-operated. Then, the operation detection signal is input to the game history data management unit 391, and a recounting notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P 2. Receiving it, the game history data management unit 291 transmits a recount command to the display effect control unit 292. In response to this, the display effect control unit 292 once erases the game history data stored in the test hit game history data storage unit, and then replays game data based on the game data generated thereafter, and stores the test hit game history data. Control to be stored in the unit is performed. Then, the game data of the trial hit game history data storage unit that has been newly counted is displayed on the display 54. On the other hand, on the CU 3 side, the trial hit mode processing unit uses the game history data based on the game data transmitted from the P unit 2 after the detection signal of the touch operation of the recount button icon is input to the game data management unit 391. And the trial hit mode game history data that has been added up again is displayed on the display 312.

  Then, when the return button 322 is pressed and the test card accepted by the CU 3 is ejected, a card return notice is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 to the P table 2 and the card return notice is received. The game history data management unit 291 transmits a card return notification to the display effect control unit 292, and the display effect control unit 292 that receives the card return notification erases the game history data stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit.

  When there are no more game balls in the trial hit mode, a game ball addition command is sent from the CU side to the P units to allow game balls to be added. When there are no more game balls in the test hit mode, the game machine may automatically add game balls without sending a game ball addition command from the CU side to the P units, thereby enabling a game. Furthermore, instead of automatically adding game balls on the gaming machine side, it may be controlled so that the game can continue even if the game balls become zero.

  Similarly, in the case of a slot machine 2S, which will be described later, when there are no more points in the trial hit mode, a score addition command is sent from the CU side to the S units to allow the game to be added.

  The P table 2 is provided with a RAM clear switch 293. The RAM clear switch 293 is used to clear the stored data of the RAM by outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 described above when operated. If the RAM clear output signal is input to the game history data management unit 291, the RAM clear signal is input to the display effect control unit 292, and the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 is stored. At the same time, the oldest stored data of 10 days of stored data in the P game history data storage unit is deleted, and the remaining 9 days of stored data are shifted one by one to the old day storage area. Remembered. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area). In response to the output of the RAM clear signal, the game history data of the newest day (game history data before shifting to the old day) in the P game history data storage unit is displayed on the display effect control unit 292, game history. The data may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1 via the data management unit 291 and the game history data management unit 391 so that the data is backed up and stored in the hall management computer 1.

  In addition, the game history data management unit 291 that has received the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear processing unit 293 transmits a clear notification to the CU 3, and the game history data management unit 391 that has received the clear notification receives the P of the data storage unit 392. Control is performed to erase the game history data stored in the table game history data storage unit. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared).

  Note that while the card is held in the CU3, even if a RAM clear signal is output from the RAM clear switch 293, the game history data is not cleared.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the control circuit of the main control unit and the CU communication control unit and the contents of the stored authentication information. Referring to FIG. 9, the main control unit 323 functions as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 805 serving as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 804 storing a control program and data, and a work area for the CPU 805. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 806, an I / O port 807, and an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable PROM) 808 are provided.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 is also provided with a CPU 810 as a control center, a ROM 809 that stores control programs and data, a RAM 811 that functions as a work area for the CPU 810, an I / O port 812, and an EEPROM 813. .

  The main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 communicate with each other through the I / O ports 807 and 812. Although not shown in FIG. 9, the I / O port 807 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the upper server 801. The I / O port 812 is also communicably connected to the I / O port of the P-unit communication control unit 81.

  In the chip manufacturing stage of the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID (unique ID) of the CU communication control unit is stored. The SID of this CU communication control unit is also referred to as an IC serial ID. There are two types of mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80: authentication using this SID and authentication using an authentication key (common key) described later. As will be described in detail later, the authentication using the SID is performed by storing each other's own SID and the other party's SID and determining whether or not the other party stores the correct SID by a challenge response method described later. Is. As described later, this SID authentication includes BB serial ID authentication and CU communication control unit serial ID authentication, which are collectively referred to as serial ID authentication. As will be described later, authentication using an authentication key stores authentication keys composed of a common key and authenticates whether or not the stored authentication keys match each other. This is called authentication.

  As described above, the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 stores the SID of the CU communication control unit at the chip manufacturing stage. Therefore, the main control unit 323 also needs to store both its own SID and the other party, that is, the CU communication control unit SID stored in the CU communication control unit 80.

  In the manufacturing stage of CU3, the SID and authentication key (common key) of the main control unit are written in the EEPROM 813 by the ROM writer or the like, and the SID of the main control unit is written in the EEPROM 808. The SID of this main control unit is also referred to as a BB serial ID.

  In the case of mutual authentication by SID, it is necessary to store the SID of the other party and one's own, and also in the case of mutual authentication using an authentication key consisting of a common key, It is necessary to keep. However, at the stage where the CU is manufactured, the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are not stored in the main control unit 323. The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808.

  FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 10, when an abnormality occurs in main control unit 323, CU communication control unit 80, P-unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17, or main control board 16, it is indicated by an arrow in FIG. Notification is made. The abnormality mentioned here is that the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80, the P-unit communication control unit 81, the payout control unit 17, or the main control board 16 is replaced with another illegally manufactured one, noise, etc. This includes a case where a malfunction occurs or a failure occurs due to the above, or an offline state due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800 shown in FIG. 10 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. The key management server 803 is a key management server that can communicate with the main control board 16.

  First, when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80 of the card unit 3, the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 described above. Detect. In this mutual authentication, in addition to the above-described serial ID authentication and device authentication, device authentication using a session key described later (see FIG. 30) is also included. When the main control unit 323 detects an abnormality in the CU communication control unit 80, the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 to that effect and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 797 of the card unit 3. Then, the display control unit 797 is controlled to display that the display 312 indicates that an abnormality has occurred, and an abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked to notify the abnormality. Further, the main control unit 323 transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit 324 to the hall management computer 1.

  Further, the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is also detected by the P-unit communication control unit 81. When the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of an abnormality, it notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 further notifies the main control board 16 to that effect. In response to the abnormality occurrence signal, the main control board 16 outputs a signal for turning on or blinking an abnormality notification lamp provided on the film plate or the like, and a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1. Send.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, the CU communication control unit 80 detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and sends a signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that to the P unit communication control unit. 81 is notified. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the payout control unit 17 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the payout control unit 17 notifies the main control board 16 that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, the main control board 16 performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer 1.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the fact, and the main control unit 323 notifies the host server 801 of the fact.

  As described above, when the CU communication control unit 80 detects an abnormality in the main control unit 323, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the P unit communication control unit 81 to that effect. To the main control unit 323, and the notification destination of the occurrence of abnormality by the CU communication control unit 80 is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the CU communication control unit 80 has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The P-unit communication control unit 81 that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the payout control unit 17 to that effect, and the payout control unit 17 notifies that the abnormality has occurred. To notify. Upon receiving the notification, the main control board 16 performs the same control for abnormality notification as described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the fact is detected by the CU communication control unit 80, and the main control unit 323 is notified that the abnormality has occurred, and the main control unit 323 notifies the abnormality notification described above. In addition to performing control, the host server 801 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the P-unit communication control unit 81 and no abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 17, the fact that the payout control unit 17 has detected an abnormality is detected and the fact that the abnormality has occurred is mainly described. Notify the control board 16. In response to the notification, the main control board 16 performs the above-described abnormality notification control.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout controller 17, the main control board 16 detects the abnormality and performs the above-described abnormality occurrence control. If an abnormality has occurred in the payout control unit 17 and no abnormality has occurred in the P-unit communication control unit 81, the P-unit communication control unit 81 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and indicates that the abnormality has occurred. Notify the controller 80. Upon receiving the notification, the CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. In response to the notification, the main control unit 323 performs the above-described control for abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  When an abnormality occurs in both the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, the main control board 16 detects the occurrence of the abnormality and the CU communication control unit 80 also detects the occurrence of the abnormality.

  When an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 detects the abnormality and notifies the P-unit communication control unit 81 that the abnormality has occurred. In response to this, the P-unit communication control unit 81 notifies the CU communication control unit 80 that an abnormality has occurred, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives the notification and notifies the main control unit 323 that an abnormality has occurred. . In response to this, the main control unit 323 controls the above-described abnormality notification and notifies the host server 801 that an abnormality has occurred.

  As described above, the LSI 799 detects and notifies the main control board 16 when an abnormality occurs in the CU communication control unit 80, and detects the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the main control board 16. The CU communication control unit 80 is notified that an abnormality has occurred. Similarly to the above-described CU communication control unit 80, this LSI 799 also does not perform control for abnormality notification even if notification is given to the control unit in which the abnormality has occurred when it is detected that abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The CU communication control unit 80 and the LSIs 799 and 999 are not connected to abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Not.

  In the control of FIGS. 8 to 10 described above, the pachinko machine 2 is shown as an example of the gaming machine, but a slot machine 2S described later may be used as an example of the gaming machine.

  Next, an outline of commands and responses performed between the card unit and the pachinko machine will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 shows a transmission direction, names of transmission information, and an outline thereof. Data with a transmission direction of CU to P units is a command, and data with a transmission direction of P units to CU is a response.

  A recovery request command is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This recovery request command is for requesting transmission of recovery information to the P units.

  A response of the recovery response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information held by the P units to the CU.

  A communication start request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication start request is a request for clearing recovery information and backing up the connection ID (communication start time) to the P units.

  A communication start response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication start response notifies the CU that the recovery information has been cleared and the connection ID (communication start time) has been backed up.

  An operation instruction is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This operation instruction instructs a game operation to the P units and requests transmission of game table information such as game balls.

  An operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This operation response notifies the CU of the execution result of the game operation instruction and also notifies game table information such as game balls.

  A communication disconnection request is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This communication disconnection request is a request for disconnecting the communication connection to the P units.

  A communication disconnection response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication disconnection response notifies the CU that a communication disconnection request command has been received.

  A communication test request is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This communication test request notifies communication data to the P units.

  A communication test response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. This communication test response is a response of communication data to the CU.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 and FIG. 13, an outline of commands and responses performed between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit will be described. 12 and 13 show the transmission direction, the name of the transmission information, and the outline thereof. The transmission direction is a command from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit, and the transmission direction is data from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A BB serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This BB serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The BB serial ID is the SID of the main control unit 323 described above. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A second BB serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second BB serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Next, an IC serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting authentication of the IC serial ID is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This IC serial ID authentication request will be described in detail later. The IC serial ID is the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 described above.

  An IC serial ID authentication response 1 for notifying IC serial ID authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  The second IC serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A second IC serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request 1) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response 1) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command (device authentication request 2) for requesting second device authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (device authentication response 2) for notifying the second device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  Device authentication requests 1 and 2 and device authentication responses 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  Counter information notification for notifying counter information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A counter information notification response for notifying the counter information notification result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The counter information notification and the counter information notification response will be described with reference to FIG.

  A writer management information request for requesting writer management information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A writer management information response notifying the writer management information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The writer management information request and the writer management information response will be described with reference to FIG. The data included in the writer management information response includes a command code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, and the like.

  The main control unit requests the CU communication control unit to update the authentication key, but transmits an authentication key update request.

  Data included in the authentication key update request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and a MAC. include.

  An authentication key update response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (time notification) for notifying the current time is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A response (time response) that is a notification that a time notification command has been received is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (P unit communication control unit authentication request) for requesting authentication with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit authentication response) for notifying an authentication result with the P unit communication control unit is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one. The CU communication control unit 80 obtains information such as the chip ID of the main control board 16 and the LSI 799 and then returns an authentication result to the main control unit 323.

  A device information request for requesting device information is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit.

  A device information response notifying device information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  A command (communication state request) for requesting a communication (transmission) state to the CU communication control unit is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This communication (transmission) state is a command for requesting whether or not the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is normal. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (communication state response) for notifying the communication (transmission) state is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. This is a response in which the CU communication control unit determines whether the communication state between the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is appropriate, and returns the determination result to the main control unit. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command requesting re-authentication with the P-unit communication control unit (P-unit communication control unit re-authentication request) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. Mutual authentication is performed between the CU communication control unit and the P-unit communication control unit. The main control unit requests the authentication result of the P-unit communication control unit by the CU communication control unit as a result of the mutual authentication. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (P unit communication control unit re-authentication response) for notifying the response of the P unit communication control unit re-authentication request message is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The CU communication control unit re-executes authentication between the P unit communication control units, and the main control unit acquires the authentication result by receiving the P unit communication control unit re-authentication response. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A BB serial ID authentication request A for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The BB serial ID authentication request A will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response A for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will also be described later.

  A BB serial ID authentication request B for requesting BB serial ID authentication is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is exceptional.

  A BB serial ID authentication response B for notifying authentication information of the BB serial ID is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit.

  The BB serial ID authentication requests A and B and the BB serial ID authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG. Device authentication requests A and B and device authentication responses A and B will be described later with reference to FIG.

  A command requesting device authentication (device authentication request A) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response A) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A command for requesting device authentication (device authentication request B) is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. This device authentication is for authenticating whether or not the authentication key (common key) stored in the main control unit and the CU communication control unit is the same key, and will be described in detail later. This command is not transmitted up to P units, but is an exceptional one.

  A response (device authentication response B) for notifying the device authentication result is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Details of the contents of this response will be described later. This response is not transmitted from the P units, but is an exceptional one.

  An authentication key setting request for requesting an authentication key update is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The authentication key setting request is a response for notifying the main control unit of the authentication key setting information, and the authentication key information written in from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer) (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 in FIG. 10). ) From the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. Information included in the authentication key setting request includes a command code, a command size, a shipping manufacturer code, a writer ID (ROM writer ID), an authentication key version, an authentication key, a MAC key as an H-MAC key, and an encryption key. Padding character (random number), MAC. Except for the command code, the code information is encrypted and transmitted using the BB serial ID as an encryption key using the ECB block encryption mode.

  An authentication key setting response notifying the authentication key update result is transmitted from the main control unit to the CU communication control unit. The authentication key setting response is a command for notifying the CU communication control unit of the authentication key information setting result. Information included in the authentication key setting response includes a command code, a command size, an update result, an encryption padding character (random number), and a MAC. Other than the command code, the ECB block cipher mode is used for encryption and transmission using the BB serial ID as an encryption key.

  Next, among the commands / responses shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the contents of the recovery response, the communication start request, the operation instruction, and the operation response will be described in detail based on FIGS. 12 to 19.

  Referring to FIG. 14, a response of the recovery response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of this recovery response is to transmit the recovery information (also referred to as recovery data) held by the P units to the CU. This “recovery information” refers to the data stored in the backup storage so that when the CU sends a recovery request command to the P units as the recovery process is executed, the P units send a recovery response to the CU. That is. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the recovery information transmitted from the P platform to the CU includes connection time, final sequence number, C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information.

  The column of “encryption” shown in FIG. 14 and after is a column indicating whether or not the data to be transmitted is encrypted. The symbol “X” indicates that the data is not encrypted and the symbol “◯” indicates that it is encrypted. The key used for this encryption uses a session key (also called a telegram key), which will be described later.

  The connection time is a connection time (connection time data received from the CU at the start of communication) backed up by the P units. The final sequence number is the sequence number that was backed up by P units. The C-ID is a C-ID that has been backed up by P units. The last ball related information is the ball related information notified last time. Specifically, the previously notified game ball acquisition number information, the previously notified back ball addition information, the previously notified game ball firing number information, the previously notified symbol determination count 1, the previously notified symbol determination count 2, the previous notification The number of times of the starting port, the number of times of the starting port notified twice last time, the number of times of the first prize winning port notified last time, the number of times of the second time winning big winning port, and the number of times of winning ports 1 to 4 notified last time. As described above, the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are divided by bits, but may be divided and transmitted by bytes.

  “Game ball acquired number information” is information on the number of balls to be added to a game ball by winning. The “back ball addition information” is addition information for adding the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 (see FIG. 2) to the game ball. The “game ball firing number information” is information on the number of pachinko balls launched by the launching unit 38 (see FIG. 6). “Out ball passing information” is information indicating that an out ball has been detected by passing through the out ball detection switch 701.

  In the flowcharts of FIGS. 7 and 26 to 88, “game ball acquisition number information” and “back ball addition information” are collectively referred to as “addition ball number”. Further, “game ball firing number information” is expressed as “subtraction ball number”.

  The “symbol determined number of times 1” is the number of times the symbol is determined by the variable display device 1. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is the number of times the symbol has been determined by the variable display device 2.

  “Starting port number 1” is the number of pachinko ball winnings to the starting port 1. “Starting port number 2” refers to the number of times a pachinko ball is awarded to the starting port 2.

“The number of times of the grand prize opening 1” is the number of times the grand prize opening 1 is opened (number of rounds).
“The number of times of winning the prize winning opening 2” is the number of times of opening the winning opening 2 (number of rounds).

  “The number of winning holes 1 to 4” is the number of times that a pachinko ball is awarded to each of the winning holes 1 to 4.

  Further, as information on the recovery response transmitted from the P platform to the CU, there is current ball related information as the latest ball related information. Specifically, the current ball related information is information on the total number of game balls currently held by P units (also referred to as the number of game balls), information on the number of acquired game balls currently held by P units, and currently P units. Back ball addition information that is held, information on the number of game balls that are currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, symbol determination number of times currently held on P units, current 1 start opening held by P stand, 2 start openings currently held by P stand, 1 big winning opening currently held by P stand, 1 prize opening currently held by P stand 2 times, the number of winning openings 1 to 4 currently held on the P platform.

  Note that the information marked with * in FIG. 14 is data to be backed up by P units, and ALL0 is set at the time of factory shipment and when the backup data is indefinite.

  The meanings and determination points of various balls in (Note 1) shown in FIG. 14 are shown in FIGS. The meanings of the various balls and the contents of the confirmation points are as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game ball total number information is the number of game balls held by P units. Note that the CU checks whether the number of game balls of the P units matches the number of game balls after the correction of the CU. If they do not match, the CU sends a communication disconnection request command to the P units. The communication is disconnected and P games are stopped (see FIG. 60, etc.). Then, the CU executes a recovery process, and transmits a communication start request to the P machines (see FIG. 39), thereby changing the game ball correction request to the P machines in accordance with the data correction request included in the communication start request command. The P game balls are corrected to the number of game balls after being corrected on the CU side.

  The symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are symbol determination information for winning a pachinko ball in the starting port 1 and the starting port 2, respectively. Is used.

  The number of start ports 1 and the number of start ports 2 are the number of times that the pachinko balls have won the P start ports 1 and 2 and the CU uses this data for checking the operating state of the game machine.

  The number of times of winning 1 and winning 2 is the number (number) of pachinko balls that have been won in P's 1 and 2 and the CU is operating a game machine (P). Use this data for status checks.

  The number of winning openings 1 to 4 is the number of times that the pachinko ball has been awarded to the P normal winning openings 1 to 4, and the CU uses this data to check the operating status of the game machine. To do.

  Referring to FIG. 16, the communication start request command transmitted from the CU to the P machine requests the P machine to correct the game ball and the sequence number and to back up the new communication ID (communication start time). .

  Specific data of this communication start request includes connection time, data correction request, sequence number, and game ball data, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The connection time is the time when communication between the CU and the P unit is started, and is held by the CU and transmitted from the CU to the P unit. This connection time is used as a communication connection ID.

  The data correction request is a request from the CU to correct data to the P units, and is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7. Bit 0 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a clear request. When it is “0”, there is no clear request, and when it is “1”, clear request is designated. When there is a clear request, a request for clearing the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls”, etc. to the P units is made.

  Bit 1 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a sequence number correction request. When it is “0”, there is no sequence number correction request, and when it is “1”, the sequence number correction request is specified.

  Bit 2 is a bit for designating whether or not there is a game ball correction request. When it is “0”, it indicates that there is a game ball correction request, and when it is “1”, it indicates that there is no game ball correction request.

  In the flowcharts of FIG. 26 and subsequent figures, when the bit specifying the presence / absence of a request is “0”, the request is not present, and when the bit is “1”, the request is present. For example, when Bit 0 of the data correction request is “1”, it is expressed as “clear request present”, and when “0”, “clear request not present”. In addition, as shown in parentheses in the data correction request column, “clear request” is “recovery clear”, “sequence number correction request” is “SQN correction”, and “game ball correction request” is “game ball correction”. ".

  The sequence number (also referred to as SQN) is a sequence number stored in the CU. The game balls are the number of game balls stored in the CU.

  The CU backs up the connection time and backs up the “main chip ID” and the “payout chip ID” when transmitting the communication start request command.

The P units perform the following processing when receiving this communication start request.
When the clear request is ON, the backup data held on the P side such as “game ball”, “sequence number”, “number of added balls”, “number of subtracted balls” is cleared to zero.

  When the sequence number correction request is ON, the notified sequence number is overwritten with the sequence number held by the P units.

  When the game ball correction request is ON, the notified game balls are overwritten with the game balls held by the P units.

Back up the connection time.
Each process performed on the P units is executed in order from the top.

  The operation instruction commands transmitted from the CU to the P units shown in FIG. 17 are “addition of game balls”, “subtraction of game balls”, “game permission / prohibition”, “game balls and sequence numbers”. "Clear" operation is instructed, and transmission of various game machine information is requested. The CU uses this command to periodically check the status of P units.

  As an operation request, 8-bit data of Bit0 to Bit7 is transmitted from the CU to the P units. With respect to Bit 0, a game ball number addition request is instructed when “1”, and a game ball number addition non-request is instructed when “0”. For Bit1, “1” indicates that there is a game ball number subtraction request, and “0” indicates that there is no game ball subtraction request. As for Bit2, “1” indicates that a game permission is requested, and “0” indicates that no game permission is requested.

  For Bit 3, “1” indicates that there is a game prohibition request, and “0” indicates that there is no game prohibition request. With regard to Bit 4, when the number is "1", the presence of a clear request for the number of game balls and sequence number is instructed.

  Bit 5 is used for a glass door opening request, and Bit 6 is used for a cell (front frame) opening request. Bit 7 is provided as a spare.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 17, “game ball number addition request” is also simply referred to as “addition”, “game ball number subtraction request” is also simply referred to as “subtraction”, and “game prohibition request” is It is also simply referred to as “prohibition request”, “game ball number and sequence number clear request” is also simply referred to as “clear request”, and “glass door open request” is also simply referred to as “glass open request”.

  When a plurality of bits of Bit0 to Bit7 are “1”, the P units execute in order from Bit0.

  The state of the CU corresponding to each bit base of the operation request is that the card is being held when Bit 0 is “1”, the card insertion process is being performed when Bit 1 is “1”, and Bit 2 is “1”. In some cases, addition display is in progress, subtraction display is in progress when Bit 3 is “1”, clear display is in progress when Bit 4 is “1”, and trial hit mode is in progress when Bit 5 is “1”.

  This CU state is composed of 6 bits of Bit0 to Bit5, but it may be composed of 16 bits of Bit0 to Bit15 so that the following information can be transmitted by each bit.

Bit0: 1 = Card insertion processing Bit1: 1 = Cash insertion processing Bit2: 1 = General card (visitor card) holding Bit3: 1 = Member card holding Bit4: 1 = Test card holding Bit7-5: Reserve Bit8 : 1 = Prepaid loan display in progress Bit9: 1 = Replay lending display in progress Bit10: 1 = Mochitama split display in progress
Bit 11: 1 = Wagon service is displayed Bit 12: 1 = Clear is displayed Bit 13: 1 = Breaking Bit 15-14: Preliminary Data for the number of balls requested to be added that is valid only when Bit 0 of the operation request is “1”. It is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. This data on the number of balls requested for addition indicates a value to be added to the number of game balls.

  Data of the number of balls required for subtraction that is valid only when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1” is transmitted from the CU to the P units. This subtraction request ball number data indicates a value to be subtracted from the game ball number.

  Further, card balance data indicating the balance of the card inserted in the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. The C-ID transmitted from the CU to the P platform is set with the following data depending on the state. When the card is not inserted, “ALL00h” is set. While the card is held, the C-ID of the card is set. “ALLFFh” is set during the test hit mode.

  It should be noted that during the holding of the card, the data may be such that the card inserted into the CU can be distinguished depending on whether the card is a membership card or a visitor card. For example, “holding card” is composed of 2 bits, and the first bit is set to “1” while the membership card is held, and the second bit is set to “1” while the visitor card is held. Furthermore, in the case of a visitor card, the card is basically kept in the CU at all times, so in the case of a visitor card, the card is held only when there is a balance in the visitor card. It may be controlled so that the C-ID is transmitted as (when Bit is 1). Further, the C-ID may not be stored in the visitor card, but the C-ID may be stored only in the member card.

  Further, the error code being displayed on the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Note that “ALL00h” is transmitted as the data of the CU error code in which no error has occurred.

  Referring to FIG. 18, the response of the operation response is transmitted from the P platform to the CU. The response of the operation response is to notify the CU of the execution result of the instruction operation and the game table information such as the number of game balls.

  As an execution result, it is transmitted from P units to the CU as 7-bit data of Bit0 to Bit6. For Bit0, when “1”, an execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the addition of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. Regarding Bit1, when “1”, the execution result of the rejection of the number of game balls is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the subtraction of the number of game balls is not rejected is indicated. As for Bit2, when “1”, the execution result of the game permission rejection is shown, and when “0”, the execution result that the game permission is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 3, when “1”, the execution result of the game prohibition rejection is indicated, and when “0”, the execution result indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 4, when “1”, the number of game balls and sequence number clear rejection result are shown, and when “0”, the execution result that game ball number and sequence number clear is not rejected is shown.

  For Bit 5, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is rejected is indicated, and when “0”, an execution result indicating that the opening of the glass door is not rejected is indicated.

  For Bit 6, when “1”, an execution result indicating that the cell release has been rejected is indicated, and when “6”, an execution result indicating that the cell release is not rejected is indicated.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 18, “game ball number addition refusal” is also simply referred to as “addition refusal”, “game ball number subtraction refusal” is also simply referred to as “subtraction refusal”, and “game permission refusal” ”Is simply referred to as“ permission denied ”,“ game ban refusal ”is also simply referred to as“ prohibition refusal ”,“ game ball number and sequence number clear refusal ”is also simply referred to as“ clear refusal ”, and“ glass door refusal ” Is simply referred to as “refusal to open glass”.

  The “game ball total number information” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls obtained as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). The “game ball acquisition number information” is the number of acquired game balls, and is the total number information when there are a plurality of winnings at the time of transmission. The CU 3 adds the data of the game ball acquisition number information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card.

  “Back ball addition information” refers to the number of back balls (foul balls) when fired by the launching unit 38 (see FIG. 6). Information. The CU 3 adds the data of the back ball addition information to the number of game balls currently held, but does not add the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding the card. The “game ball firing number information” is the number of balls fired by the launching unit 38 (see FIG. 6), and is information on the total number when there are a plurality of balls fired at the time of transmission. The CU 3 subtracts the data of the game ball firing number information from the number of game balls currently held, but does not subtract the number of game balls when receiving this data without holding a card. CU3 does not subtract the number of game balls when the number of game balls held by CU3 is zero. “Out ball passing information” is the number of out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701, and is the total number when there are a plurality of out balls at the time of transmission. The “symbol determination number of times 1” is symbol determination information for winning of the start port 1, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped. The “symbol determination number of times 2” is symbol determination information for winning at the start port 2, and “1” is added when the symbol variation is stopped.

  The CU performs a game ball correction process using “game ball acquisition number information”, “back ball addition information”, and “game ball firing number information”. Specifically, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back ball addition information−game ball firing number information is calculated, and the calculation result is corrected to a new number of game balls (total number of game balls). Then, it is checked whether or not the total number of game balls transmitted from the P units matches the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information). If they do not match, recovery processing is performed. A communication start request command is transmitted to the P units, and the data correction request data (Bit2 is “1” data) included in the command and the number of game balls stored in the CU are stored in the P units. Processing for correcting the number of game balls (game ball total number information) to the corrected number of game balls (game ball total number information) on the CU side is performed.

  Bits 0 to 3 are prepared as gaming machine error status 2, but this is provided as a reserve, and is used to deal with manufacturer-specific error information that is not used to specify the actual error status. Is.

  The details of each bit in the gaming machine state 1 in (Note 2) shown in FIG. 19 are shown in FIG. Supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The game permission state / game prohibition state in Bit 0 of the game table state 1 indicates whether or not the game is permitted or prohibited by the CU, and the P device that has received an instruction by the command from the CU is instructed. Transition to the state. Further, when a communication abnormality occurs, the P cars transition to the game prohibition state.

  During standby / game in Bit1, it is data indicating whether or not the fan (player) is playing (launching a ball), and the state where the fan (player) is not firing a ball is waiting The state in which a fan (player) is firing a ball is playing. The completion of the game of Bit 3 indicates whether or not the launch of the ball is stopped in the P platform, and then all the pachinko balls that have been thrown into the game area 27 are collected and the whereabouts of all the launched balls is confirmed It is. The state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are unconfirmed is the game incomplete (Bit3 = 0), and the state in which the whereabouts of all the balls are confirmed is the completion of the game (Bit3 = 1). In addition, if the P platform has not confirmed the ball firing for 15 seconds or more, it times out and the game is completed.

  If the completion of the game has not been confirmed for 15 seconds or more and the game has been completed, and the ball clogging that has occurred in the game area has been resolved and the ball has won, etc. A display prompting reinsertion may be displayed on the display 312 or the display 54, and control may be performed so that other cards are not accepted until the previous card is reinserted. Then, after the previous card is reinserted, the number of game balls is manually corrected (manual correction) by a game clerk or the like.

  The gaming machine reset in Bit 4 indicates an initial reset signal of the gaming machine (P machines), and is set to “1” for 30 seconds after the P machines are activated. The presence of game table history information in Bit 5 is data indicating whether or not the P table has game table history information such as “start count” and “big hit count”, and when it is “0”, there is no game table history information. In the case of “1”, the presence of game table history information is indicated. If the game machine history information is cleared by clearing RAM, the P machine turns this data OFF. Further, after the RAM is cleared, this data is turned ON at a timing when data such as “start count” and “big hit count” is added. In order to match the game machine history data with the P machine, the CU 3 also clears the game machine history data held in the CU 3 when detecting this data OFF.

  Details of each bit in the gaming machine state 2 shown in (Note 3) of FIG. 19 are shown in FIG. A supplementary explanation will be given below.

  The big hit 1 of Bit 0 is set to “1” during the big hit and during the small hit. The big hit 2 of Bit 1 is set to “1” during the big hit, during the small hit and during the high base. For the big hit 3 of Bit 2, “1” is set during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base).

  The big hit 4 of Bit 3 is set to “1” during the big hit (only the big hit that becomes the high base) and during the high base. The high base of Bit4 is set to “1” during the high base.

  The gaming table error state 1 is composed of 8 bits of Bit0 to Bit7, and details of each bit are shown in Note 4 of FIG. 23 (c). Bit0 is a bit indicating whether or not the frame body (front frame 5), that is, the cell is being opened, and is set to “1” when the cell is being opened. Bit 1 is a bit indicating whether or not the glass plate, that is, the glass door 6 is being opened. “1” is set when the glass plate (glass door) is being opened. Bit2 is set to “1” when a magnetic sensor error is detected when the magnetic sensor detects an illegal occurrence of bringing a magnet close to a game area or the like. After “1” is set, Bit 2 is set to “0” by turning on / off power of the P units.

  Bit3 is set to “1” when an illegal winning of a pachinko ball is detected. Then, the power is restored by turning on / off the power of P units, and Bit4 becomes “0”.

  The gaming machine error state 2 indicates manufacturer-specific error information, and 4 bits of Bit0 to Bit3 indicate that a gaming machine error 1 is occurring, a gaming machine error 2 is occurring, a gaming machine error 3 is occurring, a gaming machine error 4 occurrences are indicated.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a response (communication state response) transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The response of this communication status response is indicated by a hexadecimal string, and 0x00 indicates that the communication status is OK (appropriate). In other cases, that is, in the case of 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, and 0x10, it is indicated that the abnormality is shown in FIG. In FIG. 24, CRC-NG means that the result of parity check is NG, that is, abnormal. MAC-NG is NG of Message Authentication Code. Decryption NG means that the data transmitted after being encrypted is decrypted and becomes abnormal as a result of not being proper data. The data length NG means that the length of the received data is not normal. The disconnection detection means an abnormality in which occurrence of disconnection between the P platform and the CU is detected.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a response of a device information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the main control unit. The device information notified from the CU communication control unit to the CU includes a command code, a command size, an acquisition result, a main control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a format code, and a MAC. It is.

  Referring to FIG. 25, a device information response is transmitted from the CU communication control unit to the CU. The response of the device information response is to transmit information on the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID to the CU. The command code identifies the command code. The data size of the command is specified by the code size. One of OK (with collected information), NG (without collected information), and uncollected is specified by the acquisition result. The main control chip ID is the chip ID recorded on the P main control boards 16, and the payout control chip ID is the P payout chip IDs stored in the payout control unit 17. It is.

  Next, a process executed by the CPU in the main control unit 323 of the CU and a process executed by the CPU mounted on the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26, the mode of transmission and reception of commands and responses between the CU and the P platform will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P unit, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. After receiving the response, the CU transmits the next command to the P units, and the P unit returns a response to the CU in response to the command. As shown in FIG. 26, the period from the transmission of the first command to the P units from the CU to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of a response from the P platform to the CU until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted between the CU and the P platform at an interval of 200 ms. On the other hand, in the P platform, by operating the hitting operation handle 25, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, the response of the motion response for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls is sequentially transmitted from the P platform to the CU at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P units can finely notify the CU of the amount of change in the number of game balls. On the other hand, the CU can manage the points by finely reflecting the changes in the points on the P platform side.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be set as the P emission time intervals. It is also possible to match.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the CU side will be described. If the response is not received within one second after the CU sends a command to the P machine, the same command is sent to the P machine again. If no response is received within one second, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to P devices. If no response is received from the P units within one second after the second retransmission, the CU determines that there is a communication abnormality at this stage. This communication abnormality may be caused by the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20 shown in FIG. 6 or the disconnection of the connection wiring or the power supply of the P units.

  The CU transmits a device information request command to the P devices in order to start the connection sequence again after 5 seconds after determining the communication abnormality. The specific contents of the processing for transmitting the device information request command to the P devices and starting the connection sequence will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a process when a communication disconnection is detected on the P platform side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU to the P machine, and the P machine sends a response to the CU in response to the command. Next, when the state in which the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units continues for 4 seconds, the P unit determines that the communication is interrupted and stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 to prohibit the game. At the same time, the state transits to an unconnected state. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the connector 330 or 20, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU, as described with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the process of the connection sequence at the time of power activation will be described. The process of the connection sequence in FIG. 29 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P unit is normally completed. Specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power supply of the CU is turned off while the card is not inserted (see FIG. 40). A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off after one day of business at the amusement hall is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, at the time of power-on, communication is started after stopping the hitting motor 18 to stop the game in the P platform. In the CU, an authentication sequence process is first executed. The specific control contents of the authentication sequence process are shown in the flowcharts of the subroutine programs shown in FIGS. By this authentication sequence processing, a device information request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response, the P device returns a response of a device information response. The response of this device information response includes a main chip ID and a payout chip ID.

  The CU that has received the device information response stores the information included in the device information response, and requests authentication for the P devices that have responded (P devices identified by the received main chip ID and payout chip ID). Is sent to P units.

The P devices that have received the authentication request return an authentication response to the CU.
Next, specific control contents of the processing of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  30A and 30B are flowcharts showing a subroutine program of the authentication sequence shown in FIG. There are two types of authentication sequences shown in FIG. 29: an authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated and an authentication sequence when the power supply of the P units (game machines) is activated. The authentication sequence when the power supply of the CU is activated is shown in FIG. Referring to FIG. 30A, the main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801 (see FIG. 143). The CU communication control unit 80 performs authentication with the P-unit communication control unit 81. Thereafter, communication is started. Then, a CU communication control unit authentication sequence is first executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and then a chip ID authentication sequence is executed.

  FIG. 30 (b) shows an authentication sequence when the power source of P units (game machines) is activated. Referring to FIG. 30 (b), after communication disconnection with P units is detected in main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 recovers P after communication with P units is restored. Authentication with the stand. Thereafter, a chip ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Thereafter, communication with P units is possible.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence shown in FIG. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the upper server 801. Then, a BB serial ID authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. By this BB serial ID authentication sequence, the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 is authenticated. Next, the main control unit 323 executes the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence only when the serial ID of the CU communication control unit is acquired from the upper server 801. The CU communication control unit serial ID is authenticated by the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence.

  Next, a writer management information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. The writer management information is information related to the ROM writer used when writing the authentication information to the EEPROMs 813 and 808 described with reference to FIG. For example, data such as ROM writer ID, ROM writer manufacturer code, and key version stored in the ROM writer.

  Whether the main control unit 323 collates the writer management information included in the writer management information response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 with the writer management information stored in the main control unit 323, so that they match. Check whether or not. As a result of the collation check by the writer management information, a certain level of security is ensured and the security is improved even if the authentication keys of the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 coincide.

  Next, a device authentication sequence using an authentication key is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. Next, a counter information notification command for requesting transmission of counter information is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. In response, the CU communication control unit transmits a response of a counter information notification response to the main control unit 323 to notify the initial vector of the CTR mode. When using the ECB mode, which is a simple block cipher usage mode, if the same plaintext is encrypted with a certain key, it becomes the same ciphertext. There is an inconvenience that it can be determined by comparing the ciphertexts whether or not it is the same as the portion. The encryption mode is set by notification of the counter information. This encryption mode setting is reset every time the power is turned on every day at the game hall, so that security is improved. The ciphertext of communication after the setting of the counter information is further scrambled. For example, if this scramble processing is not performed, the same encrypted data is exchanged every day even if the encryption is performed, and the encryption is easily broken. Such inconvenience can be solved by scrambling.

  Next, the authentication key update sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 only when the main control unit 323 obtains update information from the upper server 801. By this authentication key update sequence, the authentication key can be changed to a new one.

  Next, the main control unit 323 transmits the current time to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 receives the time information, generates a session key (telegram key) from the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 and the received time information, and transmits it to the main control unit 323 as a time response. To do. The session key (message key) can be generated by any method. For example, the received time information and the authentication key are synthesized according to a predetermined algorithm (for example, exclusive OR). The time information generated or received may be encrypted with an authentication key, and the encryption result may be used as a session key (message key). The session key is cleared when the power is turned off and is generated again when the power is turned on next time.

  Next, an authentication sequence similar to the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. 35 is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using a session key. Then, when the authentication result is appropriate, encryption communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is performed after encryption and decryption using the session key.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the chip ID authentication sequence shown in FIGS. The main control unit 323 starts communication after completing authentication with the CU communication control unit 80. Then, a payout control authentication result request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This payout control authentication result request command requests the authentication result of the CU communication control unit 80 authenticating the P unit communication control unit 81 provided in the LSI 799 of the P unit 2. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response of a payout control authentication result response for notifying the authentication result with the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the payout control chip (LSI) to the main control unit 323.

  Next, a device information request command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. This device information request command requests the chip ID of the CU communication control unit. The CU communication control unit 80 transmits the chip ID of the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323 as a device information response. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 makes an inquiry to the upper server 801 to check the device information (chip ID), and stops communication after NG (inappropriate). If it is not NG, a business message can be transmitted to the P machines thereafter. Then, transmission / reception of a recovery request, a recovery response, an operation instruction, and an operation response command response is performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 31, and challenge-response authentication is performed. Challenge-response authentication is generally an authentication method that prevents eavesdropping of IDs and the like during communication by applying special processing to character strings. For example, the authenticating side performs authentication. A random number sequence (called "challenge code") is sent to the recipient, and the recipient of the challenge code synthesizes the ID etc. and the received challenge code according to a predetermined algorithm, and a response code Generate and reply. On the side that received the response code, generate a response code in the same way from the transmitted challenge code and pre-stored ID, etc., and compare the sent response code with the generated response code to see if they match Authentication is performed to determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, first, a command of BB serial ID request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits a response requesting a challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication response 1. Upon receipt of the request, the main control unit 323 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10, and uses the challenge code as a BB serial ID authentication request. It transmits to the communication control part 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response 2. To the main control unit 323. In response to this, the main control unit 323 checks the response code to determine whether it is appropriate. When it is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  Any algorithm for generating the challenge code and generating the response code may be used. An example of the algorithm is described below. As a challenge code generation, a random number (binary number) having the same data length is generated for the code data (binary number) of the BB serial ID, and an exclusive OR (exclusive OR) of the BB serial ID and the random number is generated. The calculation result is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 as a challenge code. On the other hand, as a response code generation in the CU communication control unit 80, an exclusive OR of a BB serial ID (binary number) is calculated for the received challenge code. If the BB serial ID on the main control unit 323 side matches the BB serial ID on the CU communication control unit 80 side, it means that the exclusive OR of the same BB serial ID is calculated twice for the random number, The result is the original random number. Then, the original random number is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as a response code. The main control unit 323 determines whether or not the generated random number matches the random number sent as a response code. If they match, the main control unit 323 determines that the random number is appropriate, while if not, the main control unit 323 determines that the generated random number is incorrect (NG). judge.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. First, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 shown in FIG. The CU communication control unit transmits the serial ID authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the response code A using the CU communication control unit serial ID, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2 is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 checks the response code A to determine whether it is appropriate. Then, the CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 2 including the determination result (check result) and the challenge code B request is transmitted to the main control unit 323. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 performs control so that subsequent communication is not performed when the check result is inappropriate (NG).

  The algorithm of challenge code generation and response code generation shown in FIG. 34 may be any type, but for example, the algorithm using exclusive OR described in FIG. 33 can be used. .

The challenge-response authentication algorithm is not limited to the above, and may be as follows. For example, the random number R1 is generated in the CU communication control unit 80, and the challenge code A is generated by encrypting the random number R1 using the SID (referred to as SIDM) of the CU communication control unit stored in the CU communication control unit 80 as a key. In terms of the equation, the challenge code A = E _SIDM (R1). This is transmitted to the main control unit 323. The main control unit 323 generates a response code A by decoding with the stored SIDM. In terms of an expression, response code A = D _SIDM (challenge code A) = D _SIDM (E _SIDM (R1)) = R1. This is returned to the communication control unit 80, and it is checked whether or not the random number R1 previously generated in the communication control unit 80 matches the returned response code A (= R1). It is determined that the authentication is successful.

Further, the main control unit 323 generates a random number R2 and encrypts the random number R2 using the SID (referred to as SIDT) of the main control unit stored in the main control unit 323 as a key to generate a challenge code B. In terms of the equation, challenge code B = E _SIDT (R2). This is transmitted to the communication control unit 80, and decrypted with the SIDT stored in the communication control unit 80 to generate the response code B. _{Expressed by the} equation, response code B = D _SIDT (challenge code B) = D _SIDT (E _SIDT (R2)) = R2. This is returned to the main control unit 323, and the random number R2 previously generated in the main control unit 323 is compared with the returned response code B (= R2) to check whether they match. It is determined that the authentication is successful.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. This device authentication sequence is an encryption / decryption authentication sequence using an encryption key (authentication key), and an ECB mode is used as a block encryption mode. First, the main control unit 323 transmits a device authentication request 1 to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 generates a random number A and encrypts the random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Also create a MAC. This MAC is a Message Authentication Code. For example, a value obtained by calculating the generated random number A using a predetermined hash function is defined as MAC. That is, the message digest of the generated random number A becomes the MAC. Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the encrypted random number A and MAC as the device authentication response 1 to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates the original plaintext random number A by decrypting the received encrypted random number A with the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. The MAC is calculated using the hash function. Then, it is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the MAC transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG).

  Next, the main control unit 323 generates a random number B, and encrypts the random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. Further, the random number B is calculated using a predetermined hash function to create a MAC. Then, the encrypted random number B and MAC are further transmitted as an apparatus authentication request 2 to the CU communication control unit 80 as an authentication result based on the apparatus authentication response 1. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 decrypts the received encrypted random number B using the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Then, the MAC is calculated by calculating the random number B using a predetermined hash function. It is checked whether or not the calculated MAC matches the received MAC. If they match, it is determined to be appropriate, and if they do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NG). Then, the determination result is transmitted as a device authentication response 2 to the main control unit 323. When the determination result is inappropriate (NG), control is performed so that subsequent communication is not performed.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program of the authentication key update sequence shown in FIG. When there is an authentication key update request from the upper server 801, the main control unit 323 transmits the authentication key update request to the CU communication control unit 80. The update request from the higher-level server 801 includes new authentication key data. The main control unit 323 updates the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 to a new authentication key transmitted from the upper server 801, and sends an authentication key update request transmitted from the upper server 801. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Upon receiving this, the CU communication control unit 80 performs processing for updating the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10 to the new authentication key that has been transmitted, and uses the result as an authentication key update response. To H.323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit executes a device authentication sequence with the communication control unit 80 using the newly updated authentication key. This device authentication sequence is the same authentication sequence as the control shown in FIG. If the authentication result is appropriate, communication is performed using the authentication key thereafter.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the storage setting of the authentication key in the EEPROM 808. The authentication key is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the authentication key is stored in the EEPROM 808 of the main control unit 323. .

  Referring to FIG. 37, this authentication key setting sequence is an authentication key writing sequence at the time of card unit (CU) manufacture. First, the main control unit 323 waits for transmission of authentication key information from the CU communication control unit 80 on condition that an authentication key with the CU communication control unit 80 is not written. The CU communication control unit 80 starts communication in response to a request from a dedicated IC writer (ROM writer). Then, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the BB serial ID, that is, the SID authentication request A of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 to the main control unit 323. Receiving it, the main control unit 323 transmits a BB serial ID authentication response A for requesting a challenge code to the CU communication control unit 80 to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the communication control unit 80 generates a challenge code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. 10, and uses the challenge code as the BB serial ID authentication request B. Transmit to the main control unit 323.

  Receiving this, the main control unit 323 generates a response code using the BB serial ID, that is, the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10, and uses the response code as the BB serial ID authentication response B. Transmit to the CU communication control unit 80. Receiving it, the CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the response code is appropriate, and transmits the authentication key information shown below only when it is appropriate (OK). The same algorithm (for example, exclusive OR) as the challenge response authentication shown in FIG. 33 or FIG. 34 can also be used for the challenge response authentication shown in FIG.

  When the CU communication control unit 80 determines that the authentication result is appropriate, the authentication key information written from the dedicated IC writer (ROM writer), that is, the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 shown in FIG. Information is transmitted to the main control unit 323 as an authentication key setting request. Receiving this, the main control unit 323 stores the transmitted authentication key in the EEPROM 808 shown in FIG. 10 and transmits an authentication key setting response indicating that the authentication key has been stored to the CU communication control unit 80.

  As a result, a common authentication key (common key) is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 then performs device authentication using the common authentication key. This device authentication is the same as the device authentication sequence shown in FIG. If it is determined that the device authentication is appropriate, the subsequent communication is not performed, and a reset wait state is entered.

  Next, returning to FIG. 29, the CU that has received the authentication response next transmits a recovery request to the P units. In response to this, the P machine returns the recovery data backed up inside the P machine (specifically, the payout control unit 17) to the CU as a response. This recovery data includes connection time, last SQN (sequence number), C-ID, previous ball related information, and current ball related information. To be precise, it is the various data shown in FIG. 14, and “recovery data” in the following flowcharts is exactly the various data shown in FIG. 14. In the present embodiment, the “final SQN” included in the recovery data is the SQN transmitted last by the P devices as described above.

  The CU that has received this recovery response starts recovery processing from that point. This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU and the P platform, and is not only executed when the power is turned on, but also recovered as a result of trouble as described later. Sometimes even executed.

  The CU counts up this SQN (sequence number) each time an “operation instruction” is transmitted. However, it is not counted up when the operation instruction is retransmitted. The CU backs up the SQN and its request contents when transmitting an “operation request”. The P platform stores the SQN received by the “operation instruction” and sends it back to the CU as it is by “operation response”. When the P unit receives an operation instruction of the same SQN as the previously received SQN, the P unit determines that the re-transmission text is that the communication failure has occurred and the CU retransmits the operation instruction.

  After the recovery process is completed, the CU updates the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time to the values received from the P units, updates the SQN to “0”, and sends a communication start request (recovery clear ON). As commands, a command of SQN correction ON, game ball correction ON, SQN = 0, game ball = 0 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the “P” matches the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P table with the information of the CU (SQN = 0, game ball = 0). Also, the notified “connection time” is backed up. And the P platform returns a communication start response to the CU. Thereafter, an operation instruction command and an operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform.

  As described above, the CU counts up the sequence number (SQN) by one each time this operation instruction is transmitted. First, in the first operation instruction, an operation instruction command of no game permission request, SQN = 0, C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. In the case of the P unit, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) Back up the data of = 0. Further, the P platform clears the values of the counters of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2), which are current ball related information, to zero. Then, as for the P platform, as operation response, SQN = 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0 and the game prohibition (game stop state) is transmitted to the CU.

  The CU that has received the operation response backs up SQN = 1 on the basis of the operation response, calculates the current number of game balls by calculating the current number of game balls 0 + the received number of added balls 0−the received number of subtraction balls 0. In addition to backing up 0, the cumulative number of added balls = 0, the cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, the cumulative number of start ports (1) = 0, and the total number of start ports (2) = 0 are backed up.

  Next, at the stage where the start-up process is completed on the CU side, the CU sends a game permission request presence, SQN = n, C-ID = 00h operation instruction to the P units, As follows: Game refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start port (2) times = 0, and a game permission response is returned to the CU.

  When a proper authentication result is obtained as a result of the authentication sequence using the session key of FIG. 31, the business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 is executed. FIG. 38A shows the case where the business message sequence is normal, and FIG. 38B shows the case where the business message sequence is abnormal.

  First, referring to FIG. 38 (a), after an operation instruction command is transmitted from the main control unit 323 to the CU communication control unit 80, a request for confirming the communication state of the operation instruction message (communication state request). Is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80. The CU communication control unit 80 notifies the main control unit 323 of the reception status of the operation instruction message (MAC abnormality, CRC abnormality, decoding abnormality, data length abnormality, disconnection detection) as a communication state response (see FIG. 24).

  The main control unit 323 confirms the communication state based on the received communication state response, and determines that it is normal when normal.

  On the other hand, the CU communication control unit 80 transmits the operation instruction command to the P units (specifically, the P unit communication control unit 81) based on the reception of the operation instruction command. In response to this, the P platform returns an operation response to the CU communication control unit 80, and the CU communication control unit 80 receives it and transmits a response to the operation response to the main control unit 323.

  On the other hand, FIG. 38B shows a case where the business message sequence is abnormal. The difference from FIG. 38 (a) is that the main control unit 323 that has received the communication status response transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 checks the communication status based on the communication status response and determines that it is abnormal. It is a point to do. This is determined to be abnormal when the transmitted response of the communication status response is numerical data other than 0x00 shown in FIG. If the main control unit 323 determines that there is an abnormality, the main control unit 323 executes a retry of checking the communication state. Specifically, after an operation instruction command is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, a communication state request is transmitted to the CU communication control unit 80 again, and based on the communication state response returned from the CU communication control unit 80. To determine whether a communication status error has occurred. If the main control unit 323 determines that the communication state is still abnormal as a result of executing the retry, the communication state abnormality notification control is performed. As the communication state abnormality notification control, for example, an abnormality notification command is transmitted to the display control unit 797 to notify the communication state abnormality by the display 312 or the abnormality notification lamp (not shown) is turned on or blinked. Or a signal indicating that a communication state abnormality has occurred may be transmitted to the hall management computer 1. The number of retry executions is one in FIG. 38B, but may be executed two or more times.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the processing of the connection sequence when the CU and the P stand are reconnected will be described. Here, “at the time of reconnection” refers to the time when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU and the P platform has ended abnormally. This “abnormal termination” is described later, when the power supply is activated while holding the card in FIG. 53, or when the P units in FIG. This is a case where power is cut off. As will be described later, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, a. The connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 40), b. It is determined whether the connection sequence is restarted later (see FIG. 60), or whether the SQN backed up by c.CU is inconsistent with the SQN transmitted from the P unit, When it is determined that any one of c, it is determined that the normal communication is not completed (abnormal termination), and the connection sequence at the time of reconnection shown in FIG. 39 is executed instead of FIG.

  The connection sequence at the time of reconnection is similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation described with reference to FIG. 29, and the differences will be mainly described here.

  First, the time when P devices prohibit the game and start communication is immediately after receiving the device information request command from the CU. This is because the P unit can recognize that the P unit has been reconnected only after receiving a device information request from the CU.

  Next, since the connection sequence of FIG. 29 is when the power is turned on, a recovery clear ON communication start request command is transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the recovery data is cleared in response to the P unit. At the same time, the sequence number (SQN) is set to 1 according to SQN = 0 sent in the first operation instruction, and all the previous ball related information and current ball related information are cleared to “0”.

  However, in the case of the connection sequence of FIG. 39, since it is at the time of reconnection, there is a case where the recovery information backed up inside the P units does not match the information stored on the CU side. Therefore, in the CU, after starting the recovery process, the game balls and the like are corrected in accordance with the contents of the recovery data (the previous ball related information, the current ball related information, etc.) on the P platform included in the recovery response. Execute the process. Specifically, based on the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, and game ball launch number information included in the recovery data sent from the P unit, the number of game balls + game ball acquisition number information + back Ball addition information—Calculates the number of game balls fired and performs processing to correct the stored number of game balls to the calculated new number of game balls. Recovery data from the corrected number of game balls and P units Is compared with the game ball total number information transmitted as, and it is determined whether or not they match. If they do not match, a command with game ball correction ON, that is, Bit 2 of data correction request set to “1” is transmitted to the P units as a communication start request. Further, the final SQN included in the recovery data sent from the P unit is compared with the final SQN stored in the CU to determine whether or not they match. SQN correction ON, that is, a command for setting Bit 1 of the data correction request to “1” is transmitted to the P units. Also, the correct number of game balls to be corrected = 300 and SQN = 3 are included in the communication start request and transmitted to the P units.

  The P machine receives the communication start request command, and performs a correction process to match the “sequence number” and “game ball” backed up on the P machine with the information of the CU. Specifically, a process of correcting SQN = 3 and game balls = 300 and backing up the notified “connection time” is performed.

  The CU backs up the main chip ID and the payout chip ID transmitted from the P units at the stage where the recovery process is completed, and backs up the connection time that is the time of reconnection. And about the sequence number, when the last SQN transmitted from P units is not abnormal, the sequence number (SQN) is continued.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the recovery process is started, if it is determined that the communication partner P units do not match, or if the SQN is determined to be abnormal, the recovery response transmitted from the P unit The number of the current game balls included in is converted to a one-handed ball. The “mochidama” refers to the number of game balls recorded on a game recording medium (card or the like) owned by the player. Then, after the possession ball is recorded on the recording medium, the replay button 319 is operated to use the possession ball of the recording medium, and the possession ball is converted into a game ball, and then replay is possible. At that time, similar to the connection sequence at the time of power activation shown in FIG. 29, the recovery clear ON is transmitted as a communication start request transmitted from the CU to the P units, and the P unit receives the recovery data in response to the request. clear. In the CU, the sequence number is set to “0”, SQN = 1 is transmitted to the P units in the first operation instruction, and the PQ backs up the SQN = 1. In addition, in the P-unit, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the number of additional balls, subtracted balls Each counter value of the number, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) is cleared to zero.

  Next, processing during standby will be described with reference to FIG. This standby state is a state in which no game is played on the P platform, a card is not inserted in the CU, and the rental button 321 and the replay button 319 are not operated at all.

  First, an operation instruction command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, in the P-unit, as response of the operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of gaming balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, number of start ports (1) = 0 The start port (2) number of times = 0, and data indicating that the game is possible are transmitted. The CU backs up SQN = n + 2 every time an operation instruction command is transmitted. In the next operation instruction command from the CU to the P platform, data of SQN = n + 2 and C-ID = 00h is transmitted. In the P-unit that has received this, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, the number of front start ports (1) = 0 and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 is backed up, and the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), and the number of game balls are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID = 00h, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) The number of times = 0 and a game ready response are transmitted to the CU. In the CU, every time a response of the operation response from the P platform is received, SQN, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, cumulative number of additional balls = 0, total number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) The total = 0 and the starting port (2) total = 0 are backed up.

With reference to FIG. 41, processing of the CU and the P platform when a card is inserted will be described.
In the CU, when a card is inserted, a command signal for taking the card is output to the card reader / writer 327, and the information recorded on the taken card is read by the card reader / writer 327 and the read information is received. For example, the card insertion process is executed.

  In this insertion process, a card insertion request command for reading the C-ID recorded on the inserted card by the CU and transmitting the C-ID to the P units is transmitted to the P unit. In response to this, the P device returns a response of the card insertion response notifying the CU that the reception of the C-ID is completed to the CU. Further, as this insertion processing, control as shown in FIG. 42 described later is executed.

  The CU is in a card balance inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is done by inquiring about the suitability of the inserted card, whether it is a membership card registered at the amusement hall, or inquiring the upper-level server such as the hall management computer 1 etc. This means that it is in the middle of executing the process of displaying on the display 312 and displaying on the P-side display 54. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 85 or the like, the CU displays that the card inserted into the display 312 is being inquired, and provides an operation instruction including ON during card holding, C-ID, and ON during card insertion processing. Send to P units. In the P-unit, upon receiving the operation instruction command, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display device control command including ON during card holding and ON during card insertion processing to the display effect control board 53 to display the display effect. Control is performed to display that the control board 53 is inquiring about the card inserted into the display 54 (see FIG. 85).

  After that, as for P, as operation response, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 0, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtracting balls = 0, number of starting ports = 0, number of starting ports = 2, game A response including OFF, prohibition, special prize, and probability change is transmitted to the CU. Specifically, the special prize and the probability change are OFF in a state in which Bits 0 to 4 in the gaming machine state 2 shown in FIG.

  The CU determines the balance and the ball when the card balance and the ball that has been inserted as a result of the inquiry about the card balance can be confirmed. In the CU, control is performed to display the prepaid balance of the confirmed card on the display 312, and addition display that is in the process of transmitting the confirmed holding ball (5000) as a gaming ball to the gaming machine (P units). The display inside is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 85).

  Then, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +5000 (number of balls required for addition) = 5000 and backed up balls = 0. At this point, the consumption of the ball is finalized.

  Next, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, SQN = n + 4, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 5000 and card balance = 7000 is P Send to the stand. As described with reference to FIG. 17, the operation instructions during the card holding process and the card insertion process are divided into the membership card and the visitor card, and the operation instruction is transmitted for each type of these cards. The operation may be displayed separately for each type of card. In the P unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000, display control including ON during addition display and the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 is performed. The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 5000 balls are being added as game balls (during addition display) (see FIG. 85).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a subroutine program for the insertion time process shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification. The solid arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-pointed arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 42, each step of S1 to S7 is executed by the CU. In addition, S8 to S10 and S12 to S15 are executed by P units. More specifically, the deletion process of S8 to S10, S12, S13, and S15 is executed by the display effect control board 53 provided on the P platform, and the transmission process of S14 and S15 is performed by the display effect control board. 53 transmits to the payout control unit 17, and the payout control unit 17 transmits to the CU.

  First, in step (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1, the CU determines whether or not it is interrupted. Whether or not the game is being interrupted is determined based on whether or not an interrupting operation shown in FIG. If it is suspended, it is determined in S2 whether or not the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the suspended card. If not, the inserted card is inserted in S5. The card is ejected and the process proceeds to standby (see FIG. 40).

  On the other hand, if the C-ID of the inserted card matches the C-ID of the card that has been suspended, it is determined that the suspended player has returned to the gaming machine and started the game. Therefore, the control advances to S4, the suspended state is canceled, and the process of restarting the game is executed in S6.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, a process of transmitting the C-ID of the inserted card to the P cards is performed in S3. The P units receive the C-ID, and compare the received C-ID with the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit shown in FIG. 8) (S8). Then, in S9, it is determined whether or not the comparison results match. If they do not match, it is determined that a player different from the player who has left the seat has started playing, and the subroutine program for this insertion processing ends. .

  In this way, the player identification information storage means (current player game history data storage section) for storing the player identification information (C-ID) and the same determination means (S8, S9) for performing the same determination processing are used. The display control means (display effect control board 53) is not provided with the same determination processing function on the communication means side (payout control unit 17 side), and the gaming machine having the display control means is sufficient. A common communication means can be used with a gaming machine that does not have a display control means, and it becomes possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S15 and S7 as control content of a modification. Through S15, the game history data and the C-ID stored in the backup area (backup data storage unit) are transmitted to the CU and then deleted. The CU receives it and transmits the received data to the upper server 801. The host server 801 stores the received game history data and C-ID as a backup.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that they match in S9, the process proceeds to S12, in which the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage) is returned to the current area (player game history data storage unit shown in FIG. 8), and the game history data is returned. The game history data is newly added and updated.

  In addition, you may perform the process of S10, S13, and S14 as a control content of a modification. If YES in S9, the control proceeds to S10, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has elapsed since the previous card was ejected. If it is determined that the game history data and the C-ID of the backup area (backup data storage unit) are deleted, a process is performed in S13. Further, after S12, in S15, a notification that the players are the same is transmitted to the CU. In addition, as a control content of a modification, you may control to perform all the processes of S10, S13, S14 and the processes of S15, S7.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a process for consuming the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted recording medium (card) will be described. In the process of FIG. 43, the prepaid balance is “1000” and the current game ball is “50”. First, a command with no addition, addition display OFF, SQN = n, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 0, and number of balls required for subtraction = 0 is transmitted as operation instructions from the CU. In response to this, in the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 50, the number of added balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, the start port ( 2) A response indicating that the number of times = 0, the game is possible, the special prize is OFF, and the probability variation OFF is returned.

  On the other hand, the CU lends 500 yen, that is, 125 balls by one lending operation (ball lending operation). When the lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed in the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of game balls = 50 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of ball to be added) = 175 and balance = 500 Back up. In this way, the balance consumption is determined by the CU alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Next, the CU is in the addition display. During this addition display, the display 312 displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the balance and are being added to the game balls.

  Then, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands with addition being present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 125, and subtraction request ball number = 0. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Next, the P platform has SQN = n + 2, C-ID, pre-added ball count = 0, pre-subtracted ball count = 0, front start port (1) number of times = 0, and front start port (2) number of times = 0. After backing up and creating a response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to 0, and the current number of game balls is 50 The number of game balls is updated to a value of 175 to which the number of balls requested for addition 125 is added.

  Then, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 175, balance = 500, number of additional balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) times = 0, start Mouth (2) Number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, probability change OFF response is returned.

  In response to this, the CU calculates and backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 175 (number of game balls before update) +0 (number of balls required for addition) −0 (number of balls for subtraction) = 175 The cumulative number of added balls = 0, the total number of subtracted balls = 0, the starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and the starting port (2) cumulative = 0 are backed up.

  Thus, unlike the determination of the balance consumption, the determination of the number of game balls is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  In addition, in the P machine, when an operation instruction command including the number of balls with and without addition is received, the addition is the same without distinguishing between the consumption of the ball (replay of the stored ball) and the consumption of the prepaid balance. The subsequent processing is executed in the sequence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the process at the time of replay which consumes a stored ball is demonstrated. In FIG. 44, the storage ball specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is “1000”, and the initial game ball is “0”. The replay process in FIG. 44 is similar to the process at the time of balance consumption shown in FIG. On the CU side, when a replay button 319 is pressed in a state where a player's own game recording medium (member card or the like) is inserted and there is a storage ball specified by the card, SQN = n + 2 , C-ID, number of game balls = 0 (number of game balls before update) +125 (number of balls requested to be added) = 125, storage balls = 875 are backed up. Storage ball = 875 becomes 875 at 1000-125 since 125 (the number of addition request balls) was withdrawn from the original storage ball = 1000. This is because the balance in the case of FIG. 43 is data in monetary units, while the holding ball in FIG. 44 is data in terms of the number of balls, so it is sufficient to simply subtract 1000-125.

  Then, the CU sends, as an operation instruction, a command including addition present, ON during addition display, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, number of balls required for addition = 125, number of balls required = 875, number of balls required for subtraction = 0 to P units. To do. Upon receiving the command, the payout control unit 17 transmits to the display effect control board 53 a display control command including ON during addition display and the number of balls required for addition 125 included in the operation instruction command. . In response to this, the display effect control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a screen on which the number of game balls 125 is being added.

  Other processes are the same as those in FIG. As described above, the consumption of the ball is determined by the CU alone when the replay button 319 is pressed without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P platform, and the number of balls stored (the number of game balls is also The same) is determined after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a process of subtracting the number of game balls (wagon service or the like) according to an instruction on the CU side will be described. In the amusement hall, a wagon service is provided in which a game ball owned by the player is consumed and drinks are provided to the player. When the player receives such a wagon service, the player touches the display unit 312 (see FIGS. 96 to 100) and performs the wagon order so that the order content ordered by the player is a card unit. 3 IR photosensitive unit 320 is input as an infrared signal to a remote control possessed by a shop clerk.

  The amusement hall clerk performs a wagon service according to the contents of the order entered on the remote control. FIG. 45 shows a case where a wagon order that consumes “300” used game balls occurs in a state where there are “1000” game balls owned by the player. When a wagon order occurs, the CU performs a process of backing up “300”, which is the number of game balls used in association with the occurrence of the wagon order, as SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 0, and subtraction request ball number. Do. At this stage, the CU does not actually subtract 300 from the game balls, but simply backs up “300” as the number of balls required for subtraction. Then, a command of subtraction present, subtraction display ON, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, addition request ball number = 0, and subtraction request ball number = 300 is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P platform. Then, the CU causes the display 312 to display a display indicating that subtraction is being performed (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The P machines that have received the command determine whether or not the value of the game ball counter stored therein is equal to or greater than the subtraction request number. This determination is performed by the payout control unit 17. In FIG. 45, it is assumed that the value of the game ball counter is equal to or greater than the number of subtraction requests. In the P-unit, when the payout control unit 17 receives an operation instruction command including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, display control including ON during subtraction display and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 The command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect control board 53 displays on the display 54 that 300 balls are being subtracted as a game ball (during subtraction display).

  Next, the P platform backs up SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 0, number of pre-subtracted balls = 0, number of front start ports (1) = 0 and number of front start ports (2) = 0 In addition, the value of each counter of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) is cleared to zero. Then, according to the subtraction request ball number = 300, the game ball number is updated to “700” obtained by subtracting the subtraction ball number 300 from the current game ball number 1000.

  Then, from the P platform to the CU, subtraction refusal OFF, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of current game balls = 700, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtraction balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, start port (2) number of times = 0, game possible, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF response are returned.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 (number of game balls before update) −300 (number of balls required for subtraction) +0 (number of balls added) −0 (number of balls subtracted) = 700 Then, the number of game balls is corrected to “700” and backed up. Thus, the subtraction of the number of game balls is determined only after waiting for the response of the motion response from the P units.

  Further, the CU backs up C-ID, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, starting port (1) cumulative = 0, and starting port (2) cumulative = 0.

  On the other hand, when the P units determine that the value of the game ball counter stored therein is less than the subtraction request number, the P units do not perform subtraction of the game ball number according to the subtraction request number. . In this case, the P platform returns an operation response indicating that the subtraction rejection is ON to the CU as an operation response. As a result, the CU is notified that the game balls have not been subtracted based on the subtraction request because the P cars refused the subtraction request.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 44, the subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction from the CU is determined only after waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units. On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 43, the accumulated (capped ball) consumption based on the instruction from the CU is determined when the CU receives the consumed ball.

  In this way, the reason for determining the different timings for the “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” and the “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction of the CU” is as follows.

  At the stage where the CU has received a subtraction process for the number of game balls such as a wagon order, the subtraction instruction is sent because there is a margin in the number of game balls, but the game balls are used in the game when the P units receive the subtraction instruction. As a result, there are cases where the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction instruction does not remain.

  In such a case, if the subtraction is confirmed based on the number of game balls stored in the CU at the stage when the CU accepts the subtraction process, the number of game balls actually does not remain on the gaming machine side. Nevertheless, the subtraction will be finalized, resulting in a contradiction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “subtraction of the number of game balls based on the instruction of the CU” is determined after waiting for a response of the operation response from the P units.

  On the other hand, for “consumed ball consumption based on the instruction from the CU”, it is an instruction to add the number of game balls, so the P units are stored when the instruction reaches the P units. Even if the number of game balls fluctuates, there is no problem in adding the game balls corresponding to the addition instruction. For this reason, from the viewpoint of speeding up the processing, “save (contained ball) consumption based on CU instruction” is determined when the CU accepts the storage (contained) consumption.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, processing when a big hit occurs during the game will be described. In FIG. 46, the initial number of game balls is 1010, and a probability variation big hit occurs while the operation instruction and the response of the operation are being transmitted and received between the P-unit and the CU in the game. After the completion of the control, the probability change in which the jackpot occurrence probability is improved is shown.

  First, in the CU, SQN = n, C-ID is backed up, and a command of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n, C-ID is transmitted as an operation instruction from the CU to the P units. In the P-unit that received it, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 13, number of front start ports (1) = 1, and number of front start ports (2) = 1 , The number of game balls = 1010 + 3 (the number of added balls) −13 (the number of subtracted balls) = 1000 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1000. Further, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  And as for P platform, as operation response, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000, number of addition balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In this way, the P units transmit not only the number of subtraction balls and the number of addition balls, but also the number of game balls to the CU. As a result, the CU can determine whether or not the number of game balls stored in the P unit matches the number of game balls managed by the CU.

  In addition, in the P platform in the present embodiment, as described above, 100 pachinko balls are shot into the game area 27 per minute, and therefore, one pachinko ball is shot into the game area in 0.6 seconds. Will be included. As described with reference to FIG. 26, since the command / response is transmitted at intervals of 200 ms, the number of subtraction balls between transmission of the previous response and transmission of the current response is 0 or 1. Therefore, the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P platform to the CU is either 0 or 1. However, when the number of subtraction balls is set to such a small value, the number of game balls does not change so much, and the processing flow becomes difficult to understand. Therefore, in the drawing of the processing flow in the present embodiment, for the sake of simplicity, the number of subtraction balls and the change in the number of addition balls as necessary are exaggerated for convenience.

  In the CU that has received the response of the operation response, the number of game balls = 1010 + 3-13 = 1000 is calculated and the 1000 is backed up as the number of game balls, and the cumulative number of added balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 13, the start port (1) Accumulation = 1 and Start port (2) Accumulation = 1 are backed up.

  While repeatedly performing the transmission / reception of such an operation instruction command and an operation response response, a probable big hit occurs in the P units, and the ball related information includes the number of game balls = 1100, the number of additional balls = 120, The number of subtraction balls is changed to 20, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the number of start ports (2) = 2. Then, the probability change starts after the big hit at the P platform. In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, and the number of pre-added balls = 120, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 20, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, and the number of front start ports (2) = 2 is backed up, and the number of game balls = 1000 + 120−20 = 1100 is calculated, and the number of game balls is updated to 1100. Further, after creating the response, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for P platform, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1100, number of added balls = 120, number of subtracted balls = 20, start port (1) number of times = 2, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 2, the game is possible, the special prize ON, and the special prize ON is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 1000 + 120-20 = 1100, and corrects and backs up the number of game balls in the 1100, and the cumulative number of balls = 120, The total number of subtraction balls = 20, the starting port (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are backed up. Further, the CU detects that the “special prize” has started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a process in the case where it is detected that there is no game ball while playing with P cars will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 20, first, the CU backs up SQN = n and C-ID, and sends commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n, C-ID to the P units as operation instructions. . In the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of pre-added balls = 3, number of pre-subtracted balls = 18, front start port (1) times = 1, and front start port (2) times = 1 are backed up. . Then, after the response is created, the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, as for the P platform, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 5, number of added balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 18, start port (1) number of times = 1, start port (2) The response of the number of times = 1, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU. In the CU, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 20 + 3-18 = 5 is calculated and then the number of game balls is corrected and backed up, and the cumulative number of additional balls = 3, the total number of subtracted balls = 18 , Starting port (1) cumulative = 0 and starting port (2) cumulative = 0. After that, since the number of subtracted balls is 5 in P units, the number of game balls = 5-5 = 0 is calculated and the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The starting port (2) number of times fluctuates to zero. At the stage where the number of game balls becomes 0, no balls are detected in the P units, and the payout control unit 17 automatically stops driving the ball striking motor 18 so that the ball cannot be hit into the game area. Control to prohibited state. It should be noted that if the variable display device is already in variable display at that stage, the variable display is continued only by stopping the hitting of the hit ball. If there is a start memory at the start port (1) count or the start port (2) count at the stage where the firing stop control is performed, the variable display control of the variable display device based on the storage is continued.

  In the CU, SQN = n + 2, C-ID is backed up, and commands of no addition, no subtraction, and SQN = n + 2, C-ID are transmitted to the P units as operation instructions.

  In the P unit, SQN = n + 3, C-ID is backed up, the number of pre-added balls = 0, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 5, the number of front start ports (1) = 0, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 Are backed up and a response is created, and then the counter values of the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), and the number of start ports (2) are cleared to zero.

  Then, the P platform has SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 5, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port (2). The response of the number of times = 0, the game possible, the special prize OFF, and the probability variation OFF is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 5 + 0−5 = 0, corrects the number of game balls to 0, and backs up, and also adds the total number of balls = 0, the total number of subtraction balls = 5, the start port (1) Cumulative = 1, and start port (2) Cumulative = 0.

  In this way, the main management of the number of game balls is performed by the CU, but only when the game prohibition control (launching stop control) is performed when the number of game balls reaches 0 in the P platform, It is determined that the number of game balls has become 0, and game prohibition control (launch stop control) is performed. Thereafter, as the operation response, the final ball related information is transmitted to the CU, and the final game ball number “0” is determined on the CU side. The reason for controlling in this way is that it is necessary to perform ball hitting stop control at the moment when the number of game balls becomes zero on the P platform side.

  For example, on the CU side which mainly manages the number of game balls, the response of the motion response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls when the number of game balls sent from the P platform side becomes 0 is received. Wait, when the final number of game balls is calculated on the CU side and becomes 0, a command for operation instruction with a prohibition request for prohibiting the game is transmitted to the P base side, and received When hitting ball stop control is first performed on the P platform side, there is a possibility that a pachinko ball will be shot and fired during the response and command transmission / reception, and a new number of subtraction balls may be generated during that time. On the other hand, although the number of game balls has already become “0”, a new subtraction ball number is generated and eventually the game ball number becomes negative. In order to prevent such an inconvenience, only the ball hitting stop control when the number of game balls becomes 0 is controlled based on the number of game balls on the P platform side.

  As described above, since the game control represented by the hitting ball stop control is performed based on the number of game balls stored in the P player itself, this control is performed based on the number of game balls managed and stored in the CU. Compared with the case where such game control is performed, the game control in accordance with the fluctuation of the number of game balls can be performed in real time.

  Here, although the example in which the payout control unit 17 performs the hitting ball firing stop control is shown, the main control board 16 (see FIG. 6) may be configured to perform the hitting ball shot stop control.

  In this case, for example, the payout control unit 17 transmits a signal indicating that the number of game balls is 0 to the main control board 16 when the number of game balls is determined to be 0. In response to this signal, the main control board 16 prohibits the driving of the ball striking motor 18.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 48, processing when a card return operation is performed will be described. In the state where the number of game balls is initially set to 500, an operation instruction from the CU to the P unit, and in response to an operation response from the P unit to the CU, when the return button 322 is pressed, the CU As a next operation instruction, a command of prohibition for prohibiting a game, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + 2, and a command of C-ID are transmitted to the P units. In the P platform, in accordance with the instruction with the prohibition request included in the command, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped to control the hitting stop state. Thereafter, a waiting time of 15 seconds is provided in consideration of the time until all balls that have already been shot flow down in the game area 27 and flow to the out balls, that is, the floating ball processing waiting time. During the 15 second wait time, polling is continued between the P units and the CU. As an operation response during the wait time, the P platform is prohibited refusal OFF, SQN = n + N, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0 The response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion OFF, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. As an operation instruction during the wait time, the CU transmits no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, and C-ID to the P units.

  Then, as a response after 15 seconds have passed, the P platform is SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, the number of gaming balls = 500, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the number of start ports (1) = 0, The operation response of start port (2) times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. This “game completion ON” has a role as initializeable information indicating that it is possible to accept information for instructing initialization of the number of game balls in the P units. The number of game balls transmitted at this time is the final number of game balls at the end of the game. This sequence example shows a case where the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls are not changed by the floating ball. If a prize is generated by a floating ball, or if a foul ball is generated, the number of payouts or the number of foul balls corresponding to the winning is transmitted to the CU as an “added ball number”.

  The CU that has received the response of the operation response detects the completion of the game, and backs up SQN = n + N + 3 and data with clear request. Furthermore, according to “the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2)” included in the motion response, the stored “number of game balls, total number of added balls, total number of balls” Each data of “the number of subtraction balls, start opening (1) total winning prize, starting opening (2) total winning prize” is updated. As a result, the number of game balls at the end of the game is determined on the CU side. As described above, since the final number of game balls is determined on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a point management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Then, the CU sends a command including clear request, clear display ON, SQN = n + N + 3, and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction. Thereafter, the CU displays on the display unit 312 a display indicating that the CU is being cleared (see FIG. 105 and FIG. 106). This “clear request exists” is data instructing initialization of the number of P game balls.

  In the P platform, the payout control unit 17 transmits a display control command including ON during clear display included in the command transmitted from the CU to the display effect control board 53. In response to this, the display effect production control board 53 causes the display 54 to display a display screen that is being cleared (screen that is being cleared).

  In this example, the CU receives the input of the “signal for requesting the end of game” based on the operation of the return button 322, and determines the number of game balls at the end of the game. However, the “signal for requesting the end of the game” is not limited to a signal based on the operation of the return button 322.

  For example, the CU is provided with a fingerprint authentication unit that authenticates a player's fingerprint. At the start of the gaming machine, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is mandatory, and the fingerprint information specified by the game card inserted into the CU by the player at the start of the game matches the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit. The game is allowed as a condition. Furthermore, authentication by the fingerprint authentication unit is essential at the end of the game, and the game is ended on condition that the fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit matches the fingerprint information detected at the start of the game. In this case, the “signal for requesting game end” is fingerprint information detected by the fingerprint authentication unit.

  In addition, when a game end request signal is input to the CU from a server or the like that manages the entire gaming machine installation island, the game may be ended regardless of whether or not the return button 322 is operated. In this case, the “game end request signal” is constituted by the game end request signal input from the server.

  Returning to the description of FIG. With clear request present, during clear display, the P units that have received the command of SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID shift the game history data and C-ID currently updated and stored in the storage area and store them in the backup area .

  Next, as for the operation P, the clear rejection OFF not to reject the clear request as an operation response, SQN = 0, C-ID, the number of game balls = 0, the number of additional balls = 0, the number of subtracted balls = 0, the start port (1) Number of times = 0, start port (2) Number of times = 0, game prohibition, game completion ON, special prize OFF, and probability variation OFF responses are transmitted to the CU. Then, the CU backs up SQN = 0, game balls = 0, and holding balls = 500. This holding ball = 500 is a value obtained by adding 500, which is the number of game balls received immediately before the clear request, to the holding ball.

  After that, the CU records the holding ball = 500 on the inserted card, discharges it, and returns it to the player. Then, as an operation instruction, a command including no prohibition request, no clear request, clear display OFF, SQN = m, and C-ID = 00h is transmitted to the P units. After that, as for the P platform, as the operation response, SQN = m + 1, C-ID = 00h, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtracted balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, start port ( 2) The response of the number of times = 0, the game prohibition, the game completion ON, the special prize OFF, and the probability change OFF is transmitted to the CU. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card. In this way, both the recording of the card score directly on the card and the storing of the score in association with the card number in the host server are collectively referred to as “associating” the score with the card. To do.

  In FIG. 48, there is shown a weight of 15 seconds for the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side, but in addition, on the P platform side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the winning prize The number of balls = 0 may be determined, or the number of shot balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 may be determined to determine that the processing of the floating balls has ended. It may be determined that the processing of the floating ball has ended when the earlier condition of such a determination and the elapse of 15 seconds is satisfied, and the game completion may be turned ON. Further, when the game completion is turned ON based on the passage of 15 seconds, even if the CU that has received the game completion ON is timed out when, for example, 20 seconds elapses from the card return operation or the like, Good. Also, when the game completion is turned on based on the passage of 15 seconds, or when the card discharge process is executed when 20 seconds have elapsed, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the number of out balls−the number of winning balls ≦ predetermined threshold value Alternatively, it may be executed on condition that the number of shot balls−the number of foul balls−the number of balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 ≦ a predetermined threshold value.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when the game is interrupted.

  48 is similar to the processing of the card unit and the pachinko machine when returning the card in FIG. 48, and the difference is that an interruption operation is performed instead of pressing the return button. This interruption operation is an operation for the player to temporarily suspend the game so that the player can use the game for a small amount. Then, the IR signal output from the remote controller is received by the IR light receiving unit 315, converted into an electronic signal, and input to the main control unit 323. In the case of this game interruption process, even if the CU detects the completion of the game, the clear request is not transmitted to the P machines. As a result, the P machines store and hold data (C-ID, number of game balls, etc.) regarding the interrupted player. Then, when the CU discharges the card, the card with 0 points is discharged and returned to the player. Thereafter, other players' games are prohibited during the interruption (see FIG. 42).

  With reference to FIG. 50, the process when the glass door 6 is unlocked and opened will be described. First, as a first operation instruction, a command including an instruction not to open a glass door and requesting no glass opening is transmitted from the CU to the P platform. Receiving it, the P vehicle returns a normal response including the number of game balls = 500 to the CU as an operation response. At this stage, for example, if a trouble occurs such as a pachinko ball that has been driven into the game area 27 on the P platform, the player calls the attendant at the game hall. An infrared signal for unlocking and opening the glass door 6 by operating the remote controller is transmitted to the IR photosensitive unit 320. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 inputs a glass door opening instruction signal included in the received infrared signal to the main control unit 323. Upon receiving the instruction to open the glass door, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands for prohibiting the game to stop, no glass opening request, and SQN = n + 2 to the P platform. That is, before the glass door 6 is actually opened, first, an operation instruction with a prohibition request and no glass opening request is sent to the P platform in order to perform the hitting stop control at the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. Next, the P platform returns, as an operation response, a response including prohibition rejection OFF indicating that the game prohibition is not rejected and game prohibition data indicating that the game prohibition state is set to the CU.

  On the other hand, in the CU, after the operation instruction command including the above-described prohibition request is transmitted to the P units, the time until all balls fired in the game area 27 in the P units flow out and are collected, that is, floating In consideration of the ball processing waiting time, a 10-second wait is provided. During this time, the CU continues to poll by sending a command including an instruction indicating that the game is prohibited, that is, a prohibition request, to the P units.

  Then, when the wait time of 10 seconds has passed, a command including a glass opening request for releasing the lock of the glass door 6 to be opened and an instruction of SQN = n + N is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  In response to this, the P door energizes the glass door opening solenoid 10 to unlock the glass door 6 to open the glass door 6, and turns on the bit during the development of the glass door. Until it is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted). Then, the P platform returns a response including a response such as glass open refusal OFF, SQN = n + N + 1, C-ID, game prohibition, and glass development students as an operation response to the CU.

  In the CU, if the glass opening request command is not rejected, that is, if a response including a response of glass opening rejection ON is not returned, it is determined that the glass door 6 has been opened. Thereafter, a command including no glass opening request is transmitted to the P units as an operation instruction.

  FIG. 51 shows a modification of the glass door opening process shown in FIG. The difference from the processing of FIG. 50 is that when the glass door opening instruction input is detected in the CU, not only the prohibition request for instructing the prohibition request of the game but also the lock of the glass door 6 is released. A command with a glass opening request instructing an opening request is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving this command, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 and controls the hitting ball shot stop state. At the same time, all the balls shot in the game area 27 flow into the out balls and are collected. Considering the floating ball processing waiting time, a 10 second weight is provided. During the wait time of 10 seconds, the CU and the P platform continue to transmit / receive operation instructions / operation responses. When the wait time of 10 seconds elapses, the glass door opening solenoid 10 is excited to unlock the glass door 6 and the glass door 6 is opened. Then, the bit during the development of the glass door is turned ON, and thereafter, it remains ON until the glass door 6 is closed (until the detection signal from the glass door closing detector 12 is inputted).

  And as for P platform, glass opening refusal OFF which does not refuse opening of a glass door as an operation response, a game prohibition which shows that it is in the state where ball hitting is stopped, and that the lock of the glass door is released and it is being opened A response including data such as that during glass development is shown to the CU.

  The CU determines that the glass door 6 has been opened by receiving an operation response of glass opening refusal OFF.

  As described above, the modification shown in FIG. 51 is characterized in that the 10-second wait process considering the floating ball process waiting time is executed not on the CU side but on the P platform side.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a process for unlocking and releasing the cell (front frame) 5 will be described. The opening process of the cell (front frame) 6 is the same as the opening process of the glass door 6 shown in FIG. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  When an attendant at the game hall operates the remote control to unlock and release the front frame (cell) 5, infrared light including a cell release command signal is output from the remote control to the IR photosensitive unit 320. Is done. In response to this, the IR photosensitive unit 320 outputs a cell opening command signal to the main control unit 323. As a result, it is determined in the CU that a cell opening instruction input for opening the cell has been detected. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including data such as prohibition request existence and cell opening request absence data for prohibiting the game to the P units. In response to this, the P platform stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor and controls the hitting ball firing stop state.

  In the CU, a 10-second wait is provided in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and when the 10-second wait time ends, the cell open request data that is an instruction to unlock and release the cell is received. The command including it is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform releases the front frame 5 by exciting the front frame opening solenoid 11 to unlock the front frame 5. Then, the bit during cell development is turned ON, and thereafter ON is maintained until the cell is closed (until a detection signal is input from the front frame closing detector 13).

  And as for the P platform, as an operation response, cell opening rejection OFF that does not reject the cell opening request, game prohibition indicating that it is in a ball hitting stop state, cell development underway indicating that the cell is being opened, etc. A response including data is transmitted to the CU.

  If the CU is not rejected with respect to the cell opening request, that is, if a response including cell opening rejection OFF is returned, the CU determines that the cell has been opened.

  52 also has a function for providing a weight of 10 seconds in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time on the P platform side, similarly to the modification shown in FIG. When the command input for cell opening is detected, the CU sends a command including instructions for prohibition request and cell opening request to the P units, and the P unit side receives the command and performs the hit ball firing prohibition control. After that, the operation instruction / response is continued between the 10-second wait period CU and the P platform, and when the 10-second wait time has elapsed, the front frame opening solenoid 11 is excited to lock the front frame 5 May be released after being released, and then a response including data indicating that cell open refusal OFF and cell development is in progress may be transmitted to the CU.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, according to the present embodiment, the closed state of the glass door or cell, which is a specific example of the front member of the P platform, is released without affecting the game progress. It becomes possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of processing when the power is activated while the CU is holding the card and an abnormality occurs in which the P units are not connected. Since a communication interruption occurred between the CU and the P unit while the card was inserted and the P unit was playing, the recovery request command was issued from the CU when the CU power was restarted. Sent to. However, since an unconnected abnormality of P units has occurred, a response from P units is not returned to the CU. Then, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the CU retransmits the recovery request command to the P units. Nevertheless, if no response is returned from the P units, the second recovery request is retransmitted to the P units. If no response is returned from the P units for the second retransmission, at this stage, the CU determines that there is a communication error and displays on the display 312 that an error has occurred due to no connection. And a control to turn on or blink the abnormality notification lamp. Note that a device information request command may be transmitted instead of the recovery request.

  In this state, when the store clerk operates the remote controller for the CU and outputs an infrared signal forcibly ejecting the inserted card to the IR photosensitive unit 320, the forced ejection signal is sent to the main control unit 323. Entered. In response to this, the CU adds the “number of game balls” backed up by the CU to the “held ball” of the inserted card and clears the “number of game balls” and “connection time” of the CU to 0. Then, a command to eject the inserted card is output to the card reader / writer 327. Receiving it, the card reader / writer 327 discharges the taken card. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the number of game balls stored in the CU and the card number of the inserted card are transmitted to the upper server and stored in association with the card number received by the upper server. And the score is updated to a value corresponding to the number of game balls stored in the CU. The CU then ejects the card.

  After that, the CU transmits a recovery request command to the P units and performs a resumption process of the connection sequence (see FIG. 39). The CU determines that the connection sequence is resumed in a state in which the card is inserted (a state other than the standby state), and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. To do. The number of balls to be added (for example, j) or subtraction balls between the time when P connection failure occurs and the time when the connection sequence (see FIG. 39) is restarted and the first operation response is transmitted by P units. Processing when a number (for example, r) has occurred is performed in the restart processing of FIG. Referring to FIG. 39, the CU receives the recovery response from the P units, thereby calculating the number of game balls = 0 + j (the number of added balls) + r (the number of subtracted balls), and the number of game balls as the calculation result = J + r is backed up. 39, the SQN correction ON, the game ball correction ON, and a communication start request including the value of SQN and the value of the game ball are transmitted to the P units, and the SQN of the P units and the number of game balls are transmitted. And correct it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the processing when the operation instruction from the CU (no requested operation) has not reached P units will be described.

  As described with reference to FIG. 46 and the like, the P platform receives the operation instruction command from the CU, and obtains the data of the current addition subtraction ball number and the current start port number data stored in the current ball related information storage area. The back-up information is stored in the front ball related information storage area as the number of pre-addition subtraction balls and the number of previous start openings, and the data of the current addition subtraction balls and the current start opening number stored in the current ball related information storage area are cleared to zero. In the case of FIG. 54, the operation instruction from the CU has not reached the P units. Therefore, the above-described backup clear process is not performed on the P units. As a result, each time the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, or a start win occurs, these data are accumulated and stored as current ball related information in the current ball related information storage area.

  First, in a state where the current number of game balls is 520, the CU sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. However, since the command does not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described with reference to FIG. 27, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. If this re-transmission does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU, so the CU performs the second retransmission for the same operation instruction. When this retransmission is repeated, the value of SQN is maintained at n, and the addition update of “1” is not performed.

  When the command reaches P units in the second re-transmission, until the operation instruction arrives, P unit uses the current ball related information as the data of the number of addition subtraction balls and the number of start ports as described above. As a cumulative memory. Then, using the accumulated and stored number of balls = 6 and the number of subtracted balls = 36, the current number of gaming balls = 520 + 6-36 = 490 is calculated, and SQN = n + 1, the number of gaming balls = 490, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of times of starting port (1) = 1, and the number of times of starting port (2) = 1 are transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 6 (the number of added balls) −36 (the number of subtracted balls) = 490, and corrects and stores the number of game balls in 490.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a process when an operation response from the P platform (response to no request operation) has not reached the CU will be described. In the case shown in FIG. 55, since the command from the CU is input to the P units, the above-described backup clear processing is executed, but the value of the SQN of the command transmitted from the next CU to the P unit is executed. Since (= n) is the same as the previous SQN value (= n), the P units determine that the response of the operation response transmitted to the CU is retransmission due to not reaching the CU, and the previous time The current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information are cumulatively added to the data without clearing the data of the previous addition / subtraction ball number and the previous start port number which are the ball related information.

  Specifically, assuming that the current number of game balls is 520, the CU first sends a command of no request and SQN = n to the P units as an operation instruction. Upon receiving this, the P clearing process described above is performed to calculate the current number of game balls = 520−13 + 3 = 510, back up the number of game balls = 510, back up SQN = n + 1, The current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start port count data are backed up and stored in the pre-addition subtraction balls count and the previous start aperture count, and an action response command is created to present the current addition / subtraction balls count and the current start. Clear the mouth count data to zero. Further, the current number of game balls 510 is included in the response data of the motion response. Then, the P units have SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 510, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 13, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 0. Is sent to the CU.

  However, since the response does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction as that of the previous time, that is, no request, SQN = n command to the P units.

  In the P machine that has received it, since the SQN received this time is the value (= n) immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, the response of the transmitted operation response does not reach the CU. The current addition subtraction ball number as the current ball related information and the data of the previous addition subtraction ball number as the previous ball related information and the data of the number of times of the previous start port without clearing the data Back up data by cumulatively adding the data of the current number of starting ports. As a result, the number of pre-added balls = 3 + 3 = 6, the number of pre-subtracted balls = 13 + 8 = 21, the number of front start ports (1) = 1 + 0 = 1, and the number of front start ports (2) = 0 + 1 = 1. After the response of the operation response composed of these data is created, the data of the current number of added and subtracted balls and the current number of starting ports are cleared to zero. And as an operation response, the P platform is SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 505, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 21, the number of start ports (1) = 1, the number of start ports (2) = 1 Send the response to the CU. However, since this response also does not reach the CU, the CU transmits the same operation instruction (no request, SQN = n) command to the P units again.

  In response to this, the P unit determines that the SQN received this time is the value (= n) one before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up, and the response of the operation response has reached the CU. It is detected that there is no retransmission. As a result, the P platform performs cumulative addition storage on the previous ball related information, as described above, creates a response of the operation response, and returns it to the CU. Specifically, the response of SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 485, the number of additional balls = 12, the number of subtraction balls = 47, the number of start ports (1) = 2, the number of times of start port (2) = 2 as operation responses. To the CU.

  Since the response of this operation response has reached the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 12−47 = 485, and performs processing for correcting and storing the data of the game balls in the 485.

  As described above, when the previously transmitted operation response does not reach the CU, the P units do not transmit the next operation response after retransmitting the unachieved operation response, but information that has not been reached. The information after adding up is transmitted as the next operation response. As a result, the gaming apparatus can reliably and efficiently collect information regarding the number of game balls and the number of winning entries. In the example of FIG. 55, the case where the operation response from the P platform has not reached once has been described. However, if the operation response has not reached twice, the operation response transmitted for the third time is changed. , The total value obtained by adding the motion response information transmitted the second time is included.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a process when the operation instruction (addition request) from the CU has not reached P units will be described. The number of game balls at the current time is set to 520, the number of balls to be added when there is an operation for replaying a stored ball or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is set to 125, and first, as an operation instruction, the CU has an addition request, SQN = n, and A command including data of the number of balls to be added = 125 is transmitted to the P units. However, since the command does not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. As a result, as described above, the CU retransmits the command with the same operation instruction. Since the re-send command has not reached the P units, the corresponding response from the P units is not transmitted to the CU. Therefore, as described above, the CU performs the second retransmission for the command with the same operation instruction. This second retransmission command reaches P units. In the period when the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, the P units do not perform the above-described backup clear process, and the addition / subtraction data and the start port are added to the current addition / subtraction ball number and the current start port number as the current ball related information. Accumulated addition of count data is stored.

  Then, P units calculate the current game ball number = 520 + 125 (addition request ball number) +6 (current addition ball number) −36 (current subtraction ball number) = 615, and the current game ball number data is set to 615. Create an action response. Specifically, the P platform has an addition refusal OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 615, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the start as an operation response Mouth (2) Response of number of times = 1 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 6-36 = 615, and corrects and stores the game ball number data in that 615.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, a process when the operation response from the P platform (response to the addition request) has not been reached will be described. An explanation will be given of a case where the initial number of game balls is 520 and an operation for using the game as a replay of stored balls or a withdrawal from a prepaid balance is performed and a request for adding 125 balls is generated. First, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n, and the number of addition request balls = 125 to P units. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 3-13 = 635 is calculated and the number of game balls = 635 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P platform clears the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 635, number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although the transmission is detected, the received command includes the number of balls requested for addition = 125, but the game balls are not added and updated based on the command. That is, the addition update according to the addition request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 635 + 3-8 = 630 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 630 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of game balls = 630, number of addition balls = 6, number of subtraction balls = 21, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, the retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the addition request ball number = 125 is received, but the addition update is not performed, and the addition update according to the addition request is not performed twice. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 610, number of added balls = 12, number of subtraction balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are transmitted to the CU. Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 125 + 12−47 = 610, corrects the number of game balls to 610, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional addition request, the addition update of the game balls is not performed, and the addition update in response to the addition request is performed twice. Absent.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, processing when the operation instruction (subtraction request) from the CU has not reached the P units will be described. A case will be described in which an initial number of game balls = 520 and a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to the occurrence of a wagon order or the like. First, the CU transmits, as operation instructions, commands with a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of subtraction request balls = 300 to P units. However, since the command did not reach the P machines, the response from the P machines is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU transmits the same operation instruction command to the P units again. Since this re-transmission command also did not reach the P units, the response from the P units is not returned to the CU. Therefore, the CU performs a second retransmission of the same operation instruction command. This second retransmission command reaches the P units.

  In the P unit, during the period in which the operation instruction command from the CU has not yet reached, as in the process of FIG. To do. Then, at the stage when the command command for the second operation is input to the P machines, the game ball = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190 is calculated, and the game ball = 190 is stored. Then, as an operation response, the subtraction rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 190, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtraction balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 1, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 Is sent to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU calculates game balls = 520−300 + 6-36 = 190, and corrects and stores the game balls in 190.

  In this way, when subtracting from the game balls, the CU first sends an operation instruction command including data on the number of subtraction requests and the number of subtraction request balls to the P units, and a response as an operation response to the command is received. After waiting for the response to the CU, the subtraction request is subtracted from the game ball. Although the main management function for adding and subtracting game balls and managing the current game balls is on the CU side, the number of balls added and subtracted from the P units on the CU side is different from the game balls that change momentarily as the game progresses on the P units. It is possible to calculate the current game ball by adding / subtracting the game balls only after the response including the motion response is returned, and the game in the CU compared to the P device for the period of waiting for the motion response from the P device. The calculation time of the ball is delayed. Therefore, the current game ball data on the CU side is data with a time delay with respect to the P units, and even if the current game ball on the CU side is the number of subtraction request balls, In reality, however, there may be no game balls left for the number of balls required for subtraction. Therefore, in this embodiment, when subtracting the game balls, the CU waits for a response of the operation response from the P platform, and subtracts the game balls for the subtraction request.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, processing when the operation response from the P platform (response to the subtraction request) has not reached the CU will be described. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520 and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300, first, the CU transmits, to the P units, commands indicating that there is a subtraction request, SQN = n, and the number of balls required for subtraction = 300. In response to this, the P units, as the current ball related information, add ball number = 3, subtract ball number = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0, and SQN = n + 1. Is stored in the previous ball related information storage area, and the number of game balls = 520-300 + 3-13 = 210 is calculated and the number of game balls = 210 is stored.

  Then, after creating the response of the motion response, the P units clear the stored data in the current ball related information storage area to 0, and as the motion response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, the number of game balls = 210, the number of added balls = 3, number of subtraction balls = 13, start port (1) number of times = 1, and start port (2) number of times = 0 responses are transmitted to the CU.

  However, since the response did not reach the CU, the CU retransmits the same operation instruction command to the P units. At the time of the retransmission, the SQN having the same value n as the previous time is transmitted to the P units without updating the SQN by adding “1”.

  In the P unit, it is determined that the SQN received this time is a value (= n) immediately before the backed up SQN (= n + 1), and the response of the operation response does not reach the CU. Although it is detected that the transmission is a transmission, the received command includes the number of subtraction request balls = 300, but the game balls are not subtracted and updated based on the command. That is, the subtraction update corresponding to the subtraction request is not executed twice.

  Further, since the command P is detected again in the P platform, the previous ball related information already stored in the previous ball related information storage area is stored in the current ball related information storage area in the same manner as the processing of FIG. The accumulated data, that is, the number of added balls = 3, the number of subtracted balls = 8, the number of start ports (1) = 0, and the number of start ports (2) = 1 are accumulated and stored. Then, the number of game balls = 210 + 3-8 = 205 is calculated, and the number of game balls is corrected to 205 and stored.

  Thereafter, the P units create a response of the operation response. Specifically, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = n + 1, number of gaming balls = 205, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracting balls = 21, number of start ports (1) = 1, and start port (2) Number of times = 1 is transmitted as a response to the CU.

  Since this response also did not reach the CU, the CU performs a second retransmission of the command with the same operation instruction.

  In the P units, retransmission detection is performed in the same manner as described above, and the subtraction update is not performed while receiving the subtraction request ball count = 300, and the subtraction update is not performed twice in response to the subtraction request. In the same manner as described above, after accumulating in the previous ball related information storage area, calculating the number of game balls, generating a response, and clearing the current ball related information storage area to 0, as an operation response, addition rejection OFF, SQN = N + 1, number of game balls = 205 + 6-26 = 185, number of added balls = 12, number of subtracted balls = 47, start port (1) number of times = 2, and response of start port (2) number of times = 2 are sent to the CU . Since this response reaches the CU, the CU calculates the number of game balls = 520−300 + 12−47 = 185, corrects the number of game balls to 185, and stores it.

  In this way, in the P units, even if the command including the addition request ball number data transmitted from the CU is received, the SQN received this time is the value immediately before the SQN (= n + 1) backed up (= = N), it is determined that it is a re-transmission, it is not determined that it is an additional subtraction request, subtraction update of the game ball is not performed, and subtraction update in response to the subtraction request is executed twice. Don't do it.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a process when the P units return an addition rejection response to the CU addition request will be described. The initial number of game balls = 520, the balance of the game recording medium (card) inserted in the CU = 1000 yen, and as the operation instruction from the CU, there is no request, SQN = n, C-ID commands are P units Sent to. The P platform calculates the number of game balls = 520 + 3-23 = 500, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, the number of start ports (1), the number of start ports (2), SQN = n + 1, and C− An operation response including ID data is returned to the CU. The CU calculates a game ball based on the motion response and corrects it to game ball = 500.

  Next, the lending button 321 is pressed, and the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command including addition request present, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to P units. In the P platform, for some reason, a response of an operation response including addition rejection ON that rejects addition is returned to the CU.

  Since the CU has received an operation response including addition refusal OFF, it is determined that a game ball cannot be added on the P units, and there is a difference between the P units and the CU, and the communication connection is disconnected. In order to do so, a communication disconnection request command is transmitted to the P units. Upon receiving the request, the P platform returns a response to the communication disconnection response to the CU, disconnects the communication connection, and transmits a launch control signal for stopping the launch from the payout control unit 17 to the launch control board 31. The launch control board 31 that has received this stops the drive of the launch motor 18 and stops the game.

  In addition, as for recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, previous addition number of balls = 6, number of previous subtraction balls = 36, previous start port (1) number = 2, previous start as recovery data Number of mouths (2) = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 460, Current number of added balls = 3, Current number of subtracted balls = 13, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 1, Current starting port (2 ) Store data of number of times = 1.

  Next, after performing chip ID authentication between the CU and the P platform, a recovery request command and a recovery response are transmitted and received. In the response of this recovery response, the above-described recovery data stored on the P platform side is transmitted to the CU side.

  The CU calculates and backs up the number of game balls = 595 + 3-13 = 583 according to the recovery data (current number of added balls = 3, current number of subtracted balls = 13). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the reconnection process (connection sequence) shown in FIG. 39, and the CU transmits a command including game ball correction ON and game ball = 583 to the P units in the communication start request. In response to this, the P platform corrects the game ball to 583. The CU determines that the connection sequence is restarted after sending a communication disconnection request and disconnecting the communication, and executes the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 39 instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation of FIG. To do.

  Also in the processing of FIG. 60, since the consumption of the balance is determined on the CU side without waiting for the response of the operation response from the P units, a response including addition rejection ON is received as the operation response from the P unit. Even if a reply is received, the balance consumption has already been confirmed on the CU side at an earlier stage.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, processing when P units return a subtraction rejection response to a CU subtraction request will be described. Since the initial number of game balls is 520, the number of balls to be added is 3 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 13 at the stage when the command of the operation instruction and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received once between the CU and the P platform. Then, the game ball = 520 + 3-13 = 510.

  At this stage, when a wagon service order or the like is generated and a subtraction request for 500 balls is generated, the CU uses a command with subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, and the number of subtraction request balls = 500 as an operation instruction. Send to the stand. At the stage of receiving this command, the number of balls to be added is 6 and the number of balls to be subtracted is 36 in P units, and the number of game balls at the present time is 510 + 6-36 = 480. As a result, since the current number of game balls (480) is smaller than the number of balls required for subtraction (500), the subtraction request of 500 cannot be satisfied. Therefore, as for the operation P, the subtraction rejection ON indicating that the subtraction request is rejected as an operation response, SQN = n + 3, the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2 and the response of start port (2) number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU.

  In response, the CU calculates a game ball = 510 + 6-36 = 480 and corrects the game ball to 480. Then, subtraction rejection is detected, and subtraction cancellation processing is performed. In the subtraction cancellation process, for example, the display 312 displays a message such as “Unable to subtract due to insufficient game balls”.

Thereafter, normal operation instruction and operation response polling are performed.
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, a process when the P units return a clear rejection response to the CU clear instruction request will be described. When the return button 322 is pressed down with the initial number of game balls = 520, the CU, as with the processing instruction in FIG. A command including unrequested data is transmitted to the P units. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Then, similarly to the processing of FIG. 48, the P platform is provided with a 10-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during this 10-second wait.

  Thereafter, the CU transmits a clear request present and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units. Receiving it, the P stand indicates that it cannot be cleared for some reason, SQN = n + N + 4, number of game balls = 480, number of added balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) times = 1, start port (2) number of times = 2 response of operation response is transmitted to CU. At this stage, the game ball is 480. Then, the CU detects clear rejection, transmits a command of no request and SQN = n + N + 4 as operation instructions to the P units, and performs clear cancel processing. This clear canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Return operation is performed but canceling is not possible” on the display 312. Thereafter, normal polling of operation instructions and response is performed between the CU and the P platform.

  With reference to FIG. 63, a process when P units respond with a permission rejection response to a CU game permission request will be described. Initially, the number of game balls is set to 520, and in the trouble state where some kind of game prohibition factor has occurred, the operation instruction command and the response of the operation response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P device in a state in which P games are prohibited. Then, it is assumed that the game prohibition factor is eliminated at the stage of “game elimination factor elimination” in FIG.

  At that time, the CU transmits a game permission request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. However, the P platform returns to the CU an operation response command including, for some reason, a state where the ball cannot be shot, that is, a game rejection ON that rejects the game permission request.

  In response to this, the CU repeatedly transmits a command including a game permission request to the P machines as an operation instruction until the game is permitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a process when the P units return a prohibition rejection response to the CU game prohibition request will be described. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and a normal operation instruction command and a normal operation response response are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform. At the stage of “game prohibition factor generation” in FIG. Assume that a game prohibition factor such as an operation of the return button 322 occurs. At this stage, the CU transmits a game prohibition request presence and a command of SQN = n + 2 to the P machines as operation instructions. In the P machine, the response of the operation response including the prohibition rejection ON for rejecting the game prohibition request for some reason is returned to the CU. In response to this, the CU detects a game prohibition refusal, and transmits a command including a game prohibition request to the P units as an operation instruction until the game is prohibited.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a process when the P platform returns a glass opening rejection response to the glass opening request of the CU will be described. When an input of opening instruction of the glass door 6 is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 65, as in the process of FIG. And a command of no glass opening request is transmitted to P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for glass opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response of an operation response including a glass opening refusal ON that refuses to unlock and open the glass door 6 for some reason to the CU.

  In response to this, the CU detects glass open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing glass open cancel processing. The glass opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open the glass door” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a description will be given of a process when the P units return a cell open rejection response to the CU cell open request. When an input of a cell opening instruction is detected with the initial number of game balls = 520, although not shown in FIG. 66, as in the process of FIG. A command with no open request is sent to the P units. In response to this, the P platform performs control to stop the driving of the hit ball launch motor 18 and transmits a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition to the CU as an operation response. The CU provides a 10-second wait in consideration of the floating ball processing waiting time, and for 10 seconds, the CU continues polling with the operation instruction (game prohibition) to the P units. Then, at the stage when the 10-second wait is completed, the CU transmits a command for cell opening request and an operation instruction command of SQN = n + 2 to the P units. In response to this, the P platform transmits a response to the operation response including the cell open rejection ON which refuses to release the cell lock for some reason and releases it.

  In response to this, the CU detects cell open refusal, sends a command including no request to the P units as an operation instruction, and executes normal polling after performing cell open cancel processing. The cell opening canceling process is, for example, a process of displaying a message such as “Cannot open cell” on the display 312.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a description will be given of a recovery process when a power interruption occurs on the CU side after reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. The number of game balls is initially 520 and SQN = n and an operation instruction command is transmitted to the P machines. The P machines, as operation responses, have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the number of game balls = 500, the number of additional balls. A response including addition / subtraction data of = 3 and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is transmitted to the CU. After the response reaches the CU, after the SQN = n + 1, C-ID, and the number of game balls = 500, when a power failure occurs in the CU, the commands from the CU are not transmitted to the P units thereafter. . As described with reference to FIG. 28, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the response of the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is transmitted in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 470 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is restored, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  The CU determines that the communication partners are the same and that both SQNs match, and performs a process of correcting the backup value based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation instruction. As the initial number of game balls = 520, the P units that have received the operation instruction command have SQN = n + 1, C-ID, number of game balls = 500, number of additional balls = 3, number of subtracted balls = 23, After the response of the start port (1) count = 1 and the start port (2) count = 1 is sent to the CU and the CU modifies it to SQN = n + 2 and the game ball = 500, the CU No request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID commands are transmitted to P units. If the command does not reach the P unit and the power failure occurs in the CU immediately after that, the P unit cannot receive the command for more than 4 seconds after sending the last response as in the process of FIG. If it is determined that the communication has been interrupted, a transition is made to the unconnected state, and at the same time, the driving of the ball striking motor 18 is stopped and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is restored, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500 + 6-36 = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 2, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 2 and send it as a recovery response to the CU.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is not being transmitted, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one than the SQN on the P base side. Therefore, based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response Performs processing to correct the backup value. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before reaching an operation response related to addition / subtraction data. Assuming that the initial number of game balls is 520, a normal operation instruction and a normal operation response are sent back and forth between the CU and the P platform, and then no request, SQN = n + 2, and C-ID operation instruction commands After being transmitted to the P unit, the P unit has an operation response as follows: SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of game balls = 470, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, start port (1) number of times = 2, Response of start port (2) times = 2 was sent to CU. However, when the response does not reach the CU and the power failure occurs in the CU before the CU executes the operation response process according to the response, If no command is transmitted, the cutting is detected, the driving of the hitting motor 18 is stopped, and the play is stopped.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is restored, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470-3 = 467, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive number of balls = 3, Current starting port (1) Number of times = 0, Current starting port ( 2) Store the number of times = 0 and send it to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partners are the same and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) −3 (current number of subtracted balls) = 467, Total number of balls added = 6 (current number of added balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), total number of subtracted balls = 36 (current number of subtracted balls) + 3 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the control contents when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 67 occurs. (A) shows a case where the CU is replaced with a new CU and becomes inconsistent, and (b) shows a case where the P units are replaced with a new P unit and become inconsistent.

  For example, a power failure occurs due to a failure of a CU, and the failed CU is often replaced with a new CU. In the amusement hall, a plurality of CUs are aged by unit stockers. This aging is a standby state connected to a host server. FIG. 70 (a) shows a state in which the failed CU is replaced by the CU aged by the unit stocker, connected to the P unit, and restarted. In this case, it is determined that the connected party (P units) is different based on the device information response sent from the P units, and the recovery data of the P units is not used for correction of the game balls. In this case, since the P units display untransmitted data when the CU is not connected, if there is untransmitted data, the number of game balls on the card is manually corrected by the POS at the game hall. Specifically, the maintenance screen is displayed on the P platform side so that unsent data to the CU can be confirmed, and if unsent data is displayed, it is artificially performed by a game store clerk. Perform manual correction. This prevents the player from suffering a loss.

  Instead of the artificial manual correction, automatic correction may be performed under a certain condition as indicated by a broken line. A modification of this automatic correction will be described below.

  First, the CU receives a recovery response including the C-ID, and temporarily stores the C-ID. In that state, it waits for the card to be inserted, and when the card is inserted, the C-ID recorded on the card is read and sent as a recovery response with the C-ID of the inserted card. It is determined whether or not the C-ID matches, and if it matches, the following correction processing is performed.

Number of game balls = 470, accumulated ball total = 6, subtracted ball total = 36, start port 1 total = 2, start port 2 total = 2
In addition, when the determination result of C-ID does not correspond, the process which transmits the present game ball number contained in the recovery response to the high-order server 801 is performed. At that time, the C-ID included in the recovery data may also be transmitted to the upper server 801. Receiving it, the upper server 801 backs up the current number of game balls received in association with the C-ID. In the case where the determination results of the C-IDs do not match, the player is playing a game during a replacement operation in which the CU fails and is replaced with a new CU that is aged while the player is playing a game. This is a case where the continuation is given up and another player inserts a card to start the game after the replacement work is completed. In such a case, it is necessary to compensate for a loss for a player who has given up continuation of the game during the replacement work. A player who gives up continuation of such a game causes the upper server 801 to read the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and associates it with the member card as the current number of game balls backed up. Discharge and exchange prizes. In addition, when a player who gave up continuation of the game leaves the game hall once and then leaves the game hall, the player who has left the game hall is present on the upper server 801 for several days so that the loss can be compensated. The number of game balls is backed up, and the player who visits the store again reads the C-ID of the member card owned by the host server 801 and uses the current number of game balls backed up as a ball to the member card. They may be discharged in association with each other so that prizes can be exchanged.

  The condition for automatically correcting the backup value may be that a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) has not elapsed in addition to the C-ID matching determination. In other words, the work of replacing a failed CU with a new CU is completed in about 10 minutes. Therefore, after a predetermined time (for example, 20 minutes) in which the replacement work can be sufficiently performed, the card is inserted. Even if it is determined that the C-IDs coincide with each other after insertion, the backup data may not be automatically corrected.

  If the failed CU is a minor failure and can be communicated, the CU is returned to the unit stocker, and the number of game balls and the C-ID are transmitted from the unit stocker together with the stocker ID to the upper server 801. , The new CU connected to the P unit transmits the game ball number data corrected based on the recovery data from the P unit to the upper server 801, and the upper server 801 stores the data such as the number of game balls of both players. Control may be performed so as to confirm whether or not they match. If they do not match, an abnormality determination is performed and a predetermined abnormality process such as abnormality notification is performed.

  Furthermore, instead of the CU performing data correction based on the recovery data transmitted from the P platform, the CU may perform data correction by downloading the recovery data from the host server 801. Specifically, the CU periodically transmits data such as the number of game balls and C-ID to the upper server 801 and stores it in the upper server 801 as a backup, and is exchanged for a new CU and connected to the P units. When the C-ID included in the subsequent recovery response matches the C-ID recorded on the card inserted in the CU, the C-ID is transmitted to the upper server 801 and the C-ID -Recovery data such as the number of game balls stored in backup corresponding to the ID may be downloaded and stored in the CU.

  FIG. 70 (b) shows a case where the P base is replaced with a new one after the power is turned off. In that case, first, a startup process is performed, and a device information request, a device information response, an authentication request, an authentication response, a recovery request, and a recovery response are transmitted and received. Then, the CU determines that the connected P units are different based on the device information response, and does not use the P recovery data for the correction of the game ball. The original P units of recovery data that was installed before the new P units were replaced are manually corrected by the POS under the intervention of a game hall clerk.

  FIG. 71 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 68 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 71, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 72 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 69 occurs. In the control of FIG. 72, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the addition request is reached. Initial number of game balls = 520 and prepaid balance is 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are sent and received between CU and P units, based on the number of added balls and subtracted balls generated between them When the game ball reaches 500, the lending button 321 is pressed. Then, the CU sets SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, updates the balance to 500 yen, and determines the consumption of the balance at this stage. Then, the CU transmits a command including an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, a balance = 500, and an addition request ball count = 125 as operation instructions to the P units. If this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in the process of FIG.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by one from the SQN on the CU side, so that the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. . Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 595, the total number of added balls = 6, the total number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before reaching the operation response to the addition request. Initial number of game balls = 520, prepaid balance = 1000 yen, normal operation instruction and normal operation response are transmitted / received between CU and P units, and game balls = After reaching 500, the lending button 321 was pressed. Then, the CU calculates SQN = n + 2 and the number of balls requested for addition = 125, calculates balance = 1000 yen−500 yen = 500 yen, sets the balance to 500 yen, and determines the balance consumption at this stage. Then, the CU transmits, as an operation instruction, a command with an addition request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, balance = 500, and addition request ball count = 125 to the P units. In response to this, the P units have SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of game balls = 595, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36, the number of start ports (1) = 2, and the start ports. (2) Send the response of number = 2 to the CU. If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to this response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 28, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P response transmission of the operation response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 595-3 = 592 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 592 is stored.

  Next, when the CU is started after the power interruption is restored, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response are performed in the same manner as in the process of FIG. With the stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 592, Current number of added balls = 0, Current number of subtractive balls = 3, Current start port (1) number of times = 0, Current start port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, it is determined that the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the P SQNs are advanced by 1, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of game balls = 625 (the number of game balls of the CU) +6 (the number of previous addition balls) +0 (the number of current addition balls) −36 (the number of previous subtraction balls) −3 (the number of current subtraction balls) = 592. Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (front Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  FIG. 75 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 75, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 74 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 76, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of a recovery process performed when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the subtraction request is reached. Assuming that the initial number of game balls = 520, normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls = 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls in between. When a subtraction request for 300 balls is generated due to a request for a wagon service or the like, the CU assumes that SQN = n + 2, subtraction request ball count = 300, and has a subtraction request as an operation instruction, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, And a command of the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to P units.

  When this command does not reach the P units, the P unit detects the disconnection and drives the hitting ball launch motor 18 when the command has not been received for 4 seconds since the last response was transmitted. Stop and enter play stop state.

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After the reconnection sequence is started, the CU and the P unit perform the chip ID authentication sequence and transmit / receive the recovery request and the recovery response.

  In the P-unit, as the recovery data, SQN = n + 1, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 3, the number of the previous subtraction balls = 23, the number of the previous start port (1) = 1, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 1, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 470, Current number of added balls = 6, Current subtractive ball = 36, Current start port (1) number = 2, Current start port (2) number = 2 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units, and the backup value is based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. The process which corrects is performed. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (number of CU game balls) +6 (current number of added balls) −36 (current number of subtracted balls) = 470, cumulative number of added balls = 6, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36, start The mouth (1) total = 2, and the starting port (2) total = 2 are corrected.

  As described above, the CU determines that the subtraction request is not executed in the P units based on the value of the SQN, so that the subtraction request for 300 balls is generated in the correction of the backup value accompanying the recovery process. While subtracting, the subtraction request ball number 300 is not subtracted from the game ball number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power failure occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the subtraction request is reached. The initial number of game balls is set to 520, and normal operation instructions and normal operation responses are transmitted and received between the CU and the P platform, and the number of game balls is set to 500 according to the number of addition / subtraction balls generated during that time. In the stage, when a wagon service request for 300 balls is generated, the CU sets SQN = n + 2, the number of subtraction request balls = 300, and the operation instruction includes a subtraction request, SQN = n + 2, C-ID, and A command with the number of subtraction request balls = 300 is transmitted to the P units.

  In response to this, PQ receives SQN = n + 3, C-ID, number of gaming balls = 170, number of additional balls = 6, number of subtracted balls = 36, number of starting ports (1) = 2, and starting port (2) The response of the number of times = 2 is transmitted to the CU. If the response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is executed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 28, in the case of the P platform, when the command cannot be received after 4 seconds, it is determined that the communication is disconnected, the state is changed to the unconnected state, and the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped. Play is stopped. Cumulative storage of the addition / subtraction data and the number of start ports after the P responses are transmitted in response to the motion response including the previous addition / subtraction data is made in the current ball related information storage area, and accordingly, game balls = 170-3 = 167 are calculated. Then, the game ball = 167 and SQN = n + 3 are stored.

  Next, when the CU is powered off and started up, the CU and P units perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence and the transmission / reception of the recovery request and the recovery response as in FIG. Do.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + 3, C-ID, the number of pre-addition balls = 6, the number of pre-subtraction balls = 36, the number of front start ports (1) = 2, the number of front start ports ( 2) Number of times = 2, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 167, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 3, Current starting port (1) number of times = 0, Current starting port (2) number of times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, the communication partner is the same, the operation instruction is being transmitted, and the SQN of the P units is advanced by 1. Therefore, it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, and the recovery sent in the recovery response The backup value is corrected based on the data. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (the number of gaming balls of the CU) +6 (the number of balls added previously) +0 (the number of balls added previously) −36 (the number of balls previously subtracted) −3 (the number of balls currently subtracted) = 467, Cumulative number of added balls = 6 (pre-added number of balls) + 0 (current number of added balls), cumulative number of subtracted balls = 36 (number of pre-subtracted balls) + 3 (current subtracted number of balls), starting port (1) cumulative number = 2 (previous Start port (1) number) +0 (current start port (1) number), start port (2) total = 2 (previous start port (2) number) +0 (current start port (2) number).

  The CU restarts the connection sequence by sending a device information request when the power is turned on, but determines that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN sent from the P units do not match, and FIG. The connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 39 is executed instead of the connection sequence at the time of power activation. As a result, in response to the operation instruction after recovery, the CU forces the game balls for subtraction cancellation to be added to the P platform side and corrects the SQN, and the game ball correction ON, the game ball = 467, the SQN correction ON, and the SQN = A communication start request including n + 2 is transmitted to the P units (see FIG. 39). In response to this, the P platform corrects and stores the game ball = 467 and SQN = n + 3.

  As described above, even when it is determined that the P units have received the subtraction instruction, the reason for performing the subtraction cancellation process is that the P unit side that has received the subtraction instruction always performs the subtraction process according to the subtraction instruction. There is a possibility that the subtraction is rejected on the P platform side. When such a rejection of subtraction on the P platform side is performed, if the subtraction is confirmed on the CU side, there is a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls becomes a negative value. For this reason, subtraction cancellation is performed. As a result, when such a CU-side power interruption occurs, subtraction has been performed despite the fact that the P platform side should have rejected the subtraction instruction because the remaining points are insufficient. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the remaining number of game balls on the machine side becomes a negative value.

  FIG. 79 shows the control in the case where the communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 77 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 79, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 80 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 78 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 80, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, a description will be given of recovery processing when a power interruption occurs on the CU side before the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 81, as in the process of FIG. 48, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating a prohibition request with / without clear request for prohibiting a game as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 48, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and sends a command including SQN = n + N + 3 and C-ID to the P units as an operation instruction, clear request present, clear display, but the command reaches the P units. In the case where there is not, the P platform detects the disconnection and stops the driving of the hitting ball firing motor 18 in the stage where the command is not received after the last response is transmitted for 4 seconds, and the play is stopped. .

  On the other hand, in the CU, as described with reference to FIG. 27, when there is no response from the P units due to the command not reaching, the response is transmitted even after the same command is repeatedly transmitted and the second retransmission is performed. Is not returned, a communication abnormality (communication disconnection) is detected, and a reconnection sequence is started after 5 seconds.

  After starting the reconnection sequence, the CU and the P platform perform the execution of the CU communication control unit authentication sequence and the chip ID authentication sequence, and the transmission and reception of the recovery request and the recovery response, as in FIG.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = n + N + 2, C-ID, as the previous number of balls, the number of previously added balls = 0, the number of previously subtracted balls = 0, the number of previous starting ports (1) = 0, the number of previous starting ports ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 500, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtractive ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the communication partner is the same and the SQN on the CU side is advanced by 1, it is determined that the clear request has not arrived, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Perform processing. Specifically, the number of game balls = 500 (current game balls) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0, cumulative number of subtracted balls = 0, start opening (1) Accumulation = 0, start port (2) Accumulation = 0

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, a description will be given of a recovery process in the case where a power interruption occurs on the CU side before the operation response to the clear request is reached. When the return button 322 for returning the inserted recording medium (card) is pressed, the number of game balls is 500. In FIG. 82, as in the process of FIG. 48, the CU transmits, to the P units, a command including data indicating prohibition request with / without clear request for prohibiting the game as an operation instruction. In response to the request, the P platform returns a response including prohibition rejection OFF and game prohibition data to the CU as an operation response. Similarly to the processing of FIG. 48, the P platform is provided with a 15-second wait, and polling is continued between the P platform and the CU during the 15-second wait.

  Then, the CU sets SQN = n + N + 3, and transmits a command including clear request, clear display ON, and SQN = n + N + 3 to the P units as operation instructions.

  Then, in response to this operation instruction, the P platform clears the game ball to 0 according to the clear request and sets the game ball to 0, and also clears SQN to 0 and sets SQN to 0. = 0, C-ID, number of game balls = 0, number of added balls = 0, number of subtraction balls = 0, start port (1) number of times = 0, and response of start port (2) number of times = 0 are sent to the CU . If this response does not reach the CU and the power is cut off before the operation response process corresponding to the response is performed in the CU, the command from the CU is not transmitted to the P units thereafter. As described with reference to FIG. 28, if the P station cannot receive a command for more than 4 seconds, it is determined that communication has been interrupted, and a transition is made to an unconnected state.

  Next, when the power failure is restored and started in the CU, the connection sequence is resumed in the same way as the processing of FIG. 39, and the device information request, device information response, authentication request, authentication response, recovery request, and recovery response are transmitted and received. CU and P stand.

  In the P-unit, as recovery data, SQN = 0, C-ID, the previous number of balls as the previous number of balls = 0, the number of previous subtraction balls = 0, the number of previous start ports (1) = 0, the previous start port ( 2) Number of times = 0, Current number of balls as current number of balls = 0, Current number of added balls = 0, Current subtraction ball = 0, Current starting port (1) times = 0, Current starting port (2) times = 0 is stored and transmitted to the CU as a recovery response.

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  In the CU, since the SQN on the P platform side is 0, it is determined that the P platform is cleared, and the backup value is corrected based on the recovery data transmitted in the recovery response. Specifically, the number of gaming balls = 500 (CU backup value) +0 (current number of added balls) −0 (current number of subtracted balls) = 500, cumulative number of added balls = 0 (current number of added balls), number of subtracted balls Cumulative = 0 (current number of subtracted balls), starting port (1) cumulative = 0 (current starting port (1) number of times), starting port (2) cumulative number = 0 (current starting port (2) number of times).

  FIG. 83 shows the control when the communication counterparts do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 81 occurs. In the control of FIG. 83, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is performed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 84 shows the control in the case where communication partners do not match in the recovery when the CU-side power cut-off shown in FIG. 82 occurs. Also in the control of FIG. 84, the same control as the control operation described with reference to FIG. 70 is executed. Here, repeated description is omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing transition of display screens on the CU side and the P platform side in correspondence with the control operation when the card shown in FIG. 41 is inserted. Referring to FIG. 85, in a state where no card is inserted, an operation instruction command without an operation request is transmitted from the CU to the P unit during standby, and a response of game ball = 0 is received as an operation response while waiting. A reply is sent from the P platform to the CU. During transmission / reception of such commands and responses, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper left of FIG. 85, “None” in the column of “Card type” is displayed on the CU display 312. “0 shot” is displayed in the title column of “game ball”. Further, as shown in [Normal screen (no card inserted)] in the upper right of FIG. 85, the P display units 54 are displayed in the title column of “0 ball” and “card balance” in the title column of “game ball”. “0 yen” is displayed. In addition, the display 312 and the display 43 display various data indicating the gaming state of P units at the current time. For example, in FIG. 85, the number of starts, the number of jackpots, the number of chances of change, the number of times of the highest consecutive number are displayed, and the number of starts between special prizes (effective start win between one big hit and the next big hit) Count) is displayed as a bar graph. Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side includes a monetary amount setting amount display unit, a card balance amount display unit, a replay ball number display unit, a storage ball number display unit, and a ball lending rate display unit. Is provided.

  Further, the display unit 312 on the CU side is configured with a touch panel as described above, and display items of “device information”, “setting change”, and “order menu” are displayed on the upper left of each display screen. By selecting and touching, the display screen is switched to the touch-operated display screen. In FIG. 85, a screen in a state where “device information” is selected is displayed.

  In addition, the display unit 312 on the CU side is provided with a selection operation display section of “return”, “rental”, “replay”, and “call” in the lower part of each display screen. A command can be input to the CU by selecting and touching. For example, if "Return" is touched, the inserted card is returned, and if "Lending" is touched, a game ball is lent out from the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card. If “Replay” is touched, replay can be performed using the possessed ball or the stored ball of the inserted card (member card). If “call” is touched, a notification for calling a game attendant is made.

  At the time when the card is inserted, the CU transmits a command indicating no operation request to the P units during the card insertion process as an operation instruction. In response to this, the P unit detects that the card insertion processing has been started on the CU side. After the transmission / reception of the operation instruction command, the host server (for example, the hall management computer 1) is in an inquiry state. In this inquiring state, the CU side display 312 displays “inquiry” as shown in the second “card balance inquiry screen” from the top, and the display on the P platform side. The device 54 inquires the server of the inserted card with an arrow displayed from the server to the IC in the lower left corner of the screen as shown in the second [normal screen (inquiring card balance)] from the top. Picture is displayed. “IC” in the display screen indicates a card (IC card).

  The P machines that have received the operation instruction described above return a response of game ball = 0 to the CU while waiting as an operation response.

  In the CU, if the inserted card is verified by making an inquiry to the server and the possessed ball (= 5000) and balance (= 7000) of the inserted card are determined, the card is being held as an operation instruction. Then, a command with the number of balls requested to be added = 5000 and a card balance = 7000 is transmitted to the P units. After the transmission of this command, the CU is being displayed for addition. In the P machines that have received this command, it is detected on the CU side that the card balance and the holding ball have been determined, and thereafter, the addition display is in progress.

  During the addition display, on the display unit 312 of the CU, “5000 balls” is displayed in the holding ball display column as shown in the third “ball lending screen” from the top, toward the gaming machine. An arrow is displayed and the player is informed that 5000 balls are being transmitted to the gaming machine. On the other hand, on the P platform, as shown in the third [normal screen (ball lending)] from the top by the display 54, an arrow is displayed from the IC toward the game ball display section and the card balance display section. As a result, a display indicating that the ball lending is being added (addition display is being performed) is performed. Then, “5000 balls” is displayed on the game ball display section, and “7000 yen” is displayed on the card balance display section.

  Next, a response including game balls = 5000 is transmitted as an operation response from the P platform to the CU. In the CU, when 2-3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the movement display of the ball indicating that the addition is being displayed, the addition display is ended, and the “member” indicating the card type inserted in the display 312, the game It switches to the state which displays "5000 shots" as a ball. On the other hand, on the P platform, the addition display is ended after a lapse of 2-3 seconds from the start of the movement display of the ball as the addition display is in progress, and the movement display of the ball by the display unit 54 is ended.

  As described above, the display of the start of the operation process such as inquiring or addition display is started at the same time between the CU and the P unit, while the end of the display of the operation process is completed from the CU to the P unit. It can be terminated at its own timing on the P platform side without transmitting a command or the like, and is not restricted by the termination timing on the CU side. As a result, unique display unique to the P platform can be performed.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a control process in the case where a player shares a game ball by separately transferring a game ball to another person during a game. The flowchart shown in FIG. 86 and FIGS. 87 and 88, which will be described later, shows control that allows the player to share and transfer the game ball to another person while continuing the game.

  Referring to FIG. 86, first, a card A as a membership card with a holding ball = 5000 is inserted into the CU. If this membership card is inserted into the CU, the membership card must be returned to the player at the end of the game, even if the gaming value of the membership card (money balls, savings and prepaid balance) is all zero. I must.

  After the card A is inserted, the CU transmits a command including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding “5000”, which is the ball of the card A, on the P platform side to the P platform. In response to this, the P platform updates the game ball to 5000, and transmits a response including the game ball to 5000 as an operation response to the CU. After that, the game is started on the P platform, and when the number of game balls decreases to 4000 with the execution of the game, 1000 balls of game balls are transferred to another person and the ball is shared (1000 When a ball (ball) designation operation is performed, the CU and the P platform are in a state of splitting the holding balls thereafter.

  The card B on which the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to another person is recorded, the stock card stored in the card stock section in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 to make up the card B Although writing and discharging from the CU, in order to discharge the card B, it is necessary to first discharge the card A that has already been inserted into the card reader / writer 327. At that time, if all the game balls (= 4000) at the present time are written and discharged to the card A (member card owned by the player), the game ball = 0 and the game can be continued thereafter. Disappear.

  Therefore, in order to make it possible to divide the points while sharing a game (shared ball sharing), the card A is ejected from the CU in the state of “held points = 0”, and the game balls corresponding to the points are CU To keep it as collateral information. Instead of directly recording the card score on the card, the higher server may store the score in association with the card number of the card. In that case, the card number of the inserted card A and the number of game balls = 0 are transmitted to the upper server, and the points stored in association with the card number received by the upper server are searched, The score is updated to 0. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card A.

  After the card A (point 0) is ejected from the card reader / writer 327 of the CU, the stock card B (point 0) in the CU is taken out to the card reader / writer 327 and compensated. At that time, the game balls are subtracted as the game continues in the P units, and the game balls are in a state of 3800. A command including an operation request (operation instruction) with the number of balls to be subtracted = 1000 is transmitted from the CU to the P units in order to write 1000, which is the ball to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) to the card B. In response to this, the P number subtracts 1000 from the current number of game balls 3800 to obtain the number of game balls = 2800, and transmits an operation response including the number of game balls = 2800 to the CU. In response to this, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800.

  Next, the CU writes “Moving Ball = 1000” to the card B by the card reader / writer 327 and returns (discharges) the card B. When the player hands the discharged card B to another person, the game ball can be divided and transferred (shared ball) to the other person. In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

  After ejecting the card B, the CU waits for reinsertion of the card A, which is the player's membership card that has been ejected first, and displays on the display 312 to prompt the user to insert the card A (see FIG. 94). Then, the player who sees it inserts the card A into the CU. At that time, the game ball = 2750. If the card A is inserted into the CU, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected due to the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers match). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. If they match, the ball splitting (ball sharing) process ends, and a message to that effect is displayed on the display 312 (see FIG. 95).

  In the inserted card A, when the card is returned after the game is finished, the game ball is written as a holding ball and discharged from the CU.

  FIG. 87 shows a control operation in the case where a player performs a divided transfer (share of balls) while inserting a visitor card B in which 5,000 balls are recorded into a CU and playing a game. Yes. In this case, since the card B inserted first is a visitor card that does not necessarily have to be returned to the player, the card to be divided by another person is written on the visitor card B inserted earlier. The ball is shared and the visitor card B is transferred to another person.

  First, by inserting the visitor card B (with balls = 5000) into the CU, an operation request including the number of balls to be added = 5000 for adding all the 5000 balls recorded on the inserted card B as game balls. (Operation instruction) is transmitted from the CU to the P platform.

  In response to this, the P platform stores the game ball = 5000 and returns an operation response including the game ball = 5000 to the CU. From that stage, the game is possible with P cars, and the game is in progress.

  Then, after the game balls are used in the game and the game balls are set to 4000, the player designates the shared ball (1000 balls) to divide and transfer the 1000 game balls to another person. From this stage, the player is in the state of dividing points. At this stage, the game balls are further used for the game and the game balls = 3800. Then, an operation request including a subtraction request number of balls = 1000 for subtracting 1000 balls of game balls for split transfer (share ball sharing) from the CU is transmitted from the CU to the P units. In response to this, the P platform subtracts 1000 from the current game ball 3800 to set the game ball = 2800, and returns an operation response including the game ball = 2800 to the CU. In response, the CU backs up the data of game balls = 2800. Then, “Moving Ball = 1000” is written in the card B held by the card reader / writer 327, and the card B is returned (discharged). At this stage, the process of split transfer of holding balls (share holding) is completed. Even after that, if the player continues the game with the P units and the player presses the return button 322 to end the game, the process proceeds to the card return process shown in FIG. 48 and is stocked in the CU. The stock card is taken out by the card reader / writer 327, and the data of the holding ball corresponding to the game ball at that time is recorded on the stock card and discharged.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a score to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score stored in association with the card number received by the higher server is searched, and the score is used as the number of game balls received from the CU. In addition to updating to a corresponding value (= 1000 points), it is stored as a history that the card has been divided and transferred (share points shared) and that 1000 points are points generated by share possession. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B. And also about the stock card discharged | emitted at the time of a game end, the card number and the data of the number of game balls at the time of card | curd discharge | emission are transmitted to a high-order server, and it is matched with the card number received in the high-order server. And a history that the owner of the card B is changed to the owner of the stock card is stored. The CU then discharges the stock card.

  FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing another example of divided transfer of game balls (shared ball sharing). Differences from the control process shown in FIG. 86 will be mainly described. 88 is the same as FIG. 86 in that the card A, which is a player's membership card already inserted, is returned first when performing split transfer (share ball sharing) of game balls. There is a game ball (200 collateral balls) necessary to continue the game during splitting, and the remaining game balls are recorded as cards in card A. 86 is different from FIG.

  Specifically, first, the player operates display unit 312 including a touch panel to designate holding ball sharing in which 1000 balls are divided and transferred. Then, the CU leaves the 1000 shared balls to be split and transferred and the 200 collateral balls described above in the CU, and calculates the remaining game balls 3800. Specifically, the current game ball (5000) −collateral ball (200) −shared ball (1000) = 3800 is calculated. Then, in order to subtract the calculated 3800 game balls, the CU transmits an operation request command including the number of subtraction request balls = 3800 to the P units. In response to this, the P units subtract 3800 from the current game ball 5000 and calculate and store the remaining game balls 1200. Then, an operation response including the game ball = 1200 is returned to the CU.

  The CU receives the operation response (response), leaves the collateral ball = 200, the shared ball = 1000 in the CU, and writes the holding ball = 3800 in the card A held by the card reader / writer 327. Discharge. In this way, in order to perform split transfer (shared ball sharing) of the holding ball while continuing the game in the P unit, the return of the card A that has been inserted leaving the collateral ball for play (play: 200 balls) in the CU Is done.

  Thereafter, the CU takes out the stock card (card B of the holding ball 0) stocked in the CU to the card reader / writer 327 and compensates it. In the meantime, the game is continued in P cars, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 60 are generated. As a result, game balls = 1200 + 10 (number of added balls) −60 (number of subtracted balls) = 1150.

  In the CU, an operation request command including the subtraction request number of balls = 1000 is transmitted to the P units in order to divide and transfer 1000 shared balls (shared ball sharing).

  In response to this, the P player subtracts the number of subtraction request balls 1000 from the current game ball 1150 to calculate the remaining game balls = 150, and transmits a response of the motion response including the game balls = 150 to the CU.

  The CU receives it, writes “Mochitama = 1000” on the card B, and returns (discharges) it. The player can perform divided transfer (shared ball) of the game balls by giving the discharged card B to another person.

  After the card B is discharged, the CU displays on the display 312 to prompt the player to reinsert the member card A that has been discharged. The player who saw it re-inserts the previously ejected card A (mochitama = 3800) into the CU. In the meantime, the game continues with P units, and as a result, the number of added balls = 10 and the number of subtracted balls = 85 are generated. Therefore, the game ball at the time when the card A is reinserted = 150 + 10−85 = 75. When the card A is reinserted, the CU determines whether the inserted card A is the same as the card A that has been ejected along with the point sharing process (for example, both card numbers are the same). If they do not match, the card A is ejected. On the other hand, if they match, the CU adds the number of held balls = 3800 recorded on the card A to the P units as a game ball. Therefore, an operation request command including the number of balls to be added = 3800 is transmitted to the P units. In response to this, the P platform calculates a game ball = 75 + 3800 = 3875, stores it as the current game ball, and transmits a response of an operation response including the game ball = 3875 to the CU.

  In addition, when the score is stored in association with the card number of the card in the host server instead of directly recording the score of the card on the card, the card number of the card B and the divided transfer (held ball) 1000) which is a point to be shared) is transmitted to the upper server, the score = 1000 is stored in association with the card number received by the upper server, and the card is divided and transferred (point sharing) It is stored as a history that 1000 points are points generated by sharing the ball. Thereafter, the CU ejects the card B.

89 to 106 are screen views displayed by the display unit 312 of the CU.
First, based on FIG. 89 to FIG. 95, a display screen displayed on the display 312 in the case of holding ball sharing shown in FIG. 86 will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 89, the player selects and specifies the ball sharing from a plurality of menus displayed by touching the display item (icon) of “Menu” displayed in the upper left half of the screen. The state thus obtained is the display screen for holding ball sharing shown in FIG. The shared ball sharing (game ball split transfer) can be either split transfer from a player-owned ball or split transfer from a stored ball. For this purpose, first, a message “Please select a ball sharing source” is displayed, and a display item (icon) representing a holding ball to be selected and a display item (icon) representing a storage ball are displayed.

  In the right half display screen of FIG. 89, the state of the card inserted at the present time is displayed. FIG. 89 shows that a membership card is inserted, and the membership card has a card balance of 0 yen, a holding ball of 0 balls, a storage ball of 500 balls, and a current game ball of 10,000 balls.

  Further, as the state of the CU, it is displayed that the lending unit amount when lending a game ball from the card balance is 500 yen, and 125 balls corresponding to 500 yen is the number of payout balls. Further, it is shown that the player can reload the card balance of the inserted card by inserting a bill into the CU.

  The player touches either “mochidama” or “reserved ball” on the left half of the screen to select and input a ball sharing source. Here, a case where “mochitama” is selected is shown.

  When the player selects “mochitama”, the screen shown in FIG. 90 is displayed. A message “Please select the number of balls to share” is displayed on the left half of the screen, and the number of balls to be shared is 500 balls, 1000 balls, 1500 balls, 2000 balls, 2500 balls, 3000 balls, 3500 balls, Nine types of 4000 balls and 5000 balls are displayed. The player selects and inputs one of these nine types. Here, a case where “1000 balls” is selected and input will be described.

  If the player selects and inputs “1000 balls”, the screen shown in FIG. 91 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 91, a message “Your ball is divided by the above details. Are you sure?” Is displayed, and the number of balls of your card is 9000 as the details of the number of shared balls. It is displayed that the number of balls of a shared card to be divided and transferred (shared ball sharing) is 1000. Then, a display item (icon) “start ball sharing” and a display item (icon) “cancel” are displayed. The player touches one of these display items to select and input. If “Cancel” is selected, sharing of the ball is canceled. On the other hand, if “start ball sharing” is selected and input, ball sharing processing as shown in the details of the number of balls to be shared is started.

  If the player selects and inputs “ball sharing start”, then the screen shown in FIG. 92 is displayed. In the screen shown in FIG. 92, a message “My card will be ejected” is displayed, and a ball sharing processing status image indicating the progress of the ball sharing processing is displayed. This ball sharing process status image has three types, 1, 2, and 3 as the processing order. In the first process, the player's (player) card is discharged, the shared card is discharged as the second process, and the third process. As reinserted my card is displayed as ejected. In the “status” column, “processing” and “waiting” are displayed from the top, indicating that the first processing is currently being processed. An image in which the user's card is ejected by a broken line from the first process is shown.

  In the right half of the screen in FIG. 92, 10,000 balls that are game balls in the P units at the present time are displayed blinking.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 93 is displayed at the stage where the card has been ejected. In FIG. 93, the “status” column indicates that the discharge of the card as the first process is “completed” and the discharge of the shared card as the second process is being processed next. . A state in which the shared card is ejected from the second process is indicated by an arrow.

  Next, the screen shown in FIG. 94 is displayed when the shared card is completely discharged. In the screen shown in FIG. 94, the user's card has been ejected as the first process, and the shared card has been ejected as the second process. It is shown that there is. An image for inserting one's own card with an arrow is displayed at the third processing location.

  When the player reinserts his / her card into the CU, the screen shown in FIG. 95 is then displayed. In FIG. 95, a message “ball sharing is complete” is displayed, and the ball sharing processing status indicates that all of the first process, the second process, and the third process have been completed. Then, since the sharing of 1000 balls has been completed, it is displayed that the number of game balls in P units at the present time is 10000-1000 = 9000, which is 9000 balls.

  Next, FIGS. 96 to 102 are diagrams of display screens by the display 312 when the control processing of the wagon service shown in FIG. 45 is executed.

  First, referring to FIG. 96, the display screen of FIG. 96 is a state in which the player touches and selects and inputs the display item (icon) of “Wagon Service” displayed in the upper half of the left half of the screen. First of all, the message “Please select the type you want to order” is displayed, and as the wagon menu, “5 classic menu items”, “30 drinks”, “10 food items”, “sweets 20” 4 types of menus are displayed, and an “order status confirmation” icon is displayed.

  The right half of the screen in FIG. 96 displays 1000 balls as the number of game balls at the current time on the P cars. The player selects a wagon menu that can be ordered within the range of 1000 balls, considering that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. For example, when the player selects “30 drinks”, the screen shown in FIG. 97 is displayed. In FIG. 97, a message “Please select a product to order” is displayed, and six types of menus included in the drinks are shown. The number of game balls required to order each menu Is displayed. The player touches and selects and inputs an item to be ordered from the displayed menu in consideration that the current number of game balls is 1000 balls. An equilateral triangle icon and an inverted triangle icon are displayed on the right side where various menus on the left screen are displayed. When the player touches the equilateral triangle icon, the screen is scrolled down and the upper part of the screen is displayed. On the other hand, if the player touches the inverted triangle icon shown in FIG. 97, the screen is scrolled up and the lower portion of the screen is displayed.

  In FIG. 97, after the player selects a menu of coffee that requires 75 balls, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. Returning to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. 96, the menu of “10 foods” in FIG. 96 is selected and the menu of foods is displayed, and “hamburger” requiring 100 game balls is displayed. The menu is selected, and further, the “add product” icon displayed in the title column of “order product details” in FIG. 98 is touched to return to the display screen of the wagon menu in FIG. 96 again. A case will be described in which the icon “20 sweets” is selected and input, and the player selects “ice” that requires 50 game balls from the display screen of the sweets.

  In that case, the screen shown in FIG. 98 is displayed next, and the details of the ordered product selected and input so far are displayed. In the order details, the name of the ordered product, the number of balls consumed, and the quantity of the ordered product are displayed. In the case of FIG. 98, it is shown that one hamburger with a consumption of 100 balls, one coffee with a consumption of 75 balls, and one ice with a consumption of 50 balls are ordered. And it is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is 225 balls. In addition, an “add” icon is displayed in the quantity column of the order item details. When the player touches and inputs this additional icon, the quantity is incremented by “1” each time it is touched. The A “delete” icon is displayed on the right side of the quantity corresponding to each ordered prize. When the player touches this icon, the order for the corresponding product can be deleted. For example, touching “Delete” at the top deletes the hamburger order, touching the second “Delete” deletes the coffee order, and touching “Delete” the third “Ice” Orders are deleted.

  Furthermore, an “add product” icon is displayed below the order product details, and when the player touches this, the player returns to the wagon menu display screen of FIG. It is possible to select an order item and place an additional order.

  In addition, a “cancel” icon is shown below the order product details in FIG. 98, and by touching this icon, the player can cancel all the order products that have been ordered so far.

  Furthermore, an “order” icon is shown below the order item details, and when the player touches this, the order processing of the wagon service as shown in the order item details is executed. Become.

  When the player touches the “delete” icon corresponding to the “ice” order on the display screen of FIG. 98, the screen shown in FIG. 99 is displayed. FIG. 99 shows a state in which the order for “ice” has been canceled.

  On the other hand, when the player touches the “order” icon in FIG. 98, the screen shown in FIG. 100 is displayed. In the display screen of FIG. 100, an image being inquired about the ordered product is displayed. An arrow is displayed to indicate that transmission / reception is being performed between 225 balls, which is the total number of balls consumed, and 1000 balls currently played on P cars, indicating that communication is in progress. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 101, an arrow indicating that the communication is in progress is first displayed in the direction from the “225” balls consumed to the “1000” balls of P units. The text “Inquiry” is displayed.

  After this display is made, an arrow is displayed from the “1000” balls in the P direction toward the “225” balls to be consumed, and the text “inquiry” is displayed. Both of these displays are repeated a plurality of times. After the display, the screen of FIG. 102 is displayed next. In the screen of FIG. 102, a message “The order item has been accepted. The number of consumption balls has been withdrawn from the holding ball” is displayed, and the order item acceptance completion is displayed with the order product acceptance completion indication and It is displayed that the total number of balls consumed is “225”. In the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the game balls in the current P units are “775” balls as a result of the consumption of 225 balls.

  103 and 104 are display screens during addition display in the card insertion process shown in FIG. 41, and are the third display screen from the top of the display screens of the CU side display 312 shown in FIG. Another example is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 103, the left half of the screen shows game table information showing the same contents as the display screen on the CU side in FIG. 85, although the screen configuration is different.

  On the right side of the screen in FIG. 103, a display is shown in which all 1000 balls, which are the balls of the card inserted into the CU, are moving from the CU to the P platform to the P platform side.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 104, a message “Moving ball movement complete!” Is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the field of the ball is 0 balls. 1000 balls are displayed as game balls in the P platform, and the display of “1000” blinking is made.

  FIGS. 105 and 106 are display screens showing a clear display in the card return process shown in FIG. First, referring to FIG. 105, in the right half of the screen, it is displayed that the current game balls on P cars are 1000 balls, and “1000” is displayed blinking. Then, a state in which the holding ball is moved from the P platform to the holding ball display field is displayed, and a character “moving ball holding” is displayed.

  Then, at the stage where the movement of the holding ball is completed, the screen is switched to the display screen shown in FIG. 106, and the game ball on the P platform side is displayed as 0 ball, and 1000 balls are displayed as the holding ball. Then, “1000” is displayed blinking.

  Next, based on FIG. 107, the error monitoring function based on the detection signals of the various detection switches accompanying the circulation of the enclosed ball will be described. Referring to FIG. 107, when the detection signal from the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is continuously off for 2 seconds or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that there is a game ball shortage error 1.

  If the detection signal of the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is continuously on for 2 seconds or more during the game ball transport, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball transport error is 1. When the detection signal of the shot ball detection switch is continuously ON for 2 seconds or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that there is an excessive number of game balls error with too many encapsulated balls.

  If the detection signal of the game ball shortage detection switch 904 is continuously off for 2 seconds or more after 30 seconds from the end of the game, the payout control unit 17 indicates that the number of game balls is too small. judge.

  If the detection signal from the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is continuously off for 2 seconds or more other than during the game ball transport, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball shortage error 2 is present.

  When the detection signal of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is continuously on for 2 seconds or more except during the game ball transport, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game ball transport error is 2.

  When the payout control unit 17 determines that the difference between the number of times the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned on and the number of times the shot ball detection switch 903 is turned on is 30 or more, the payout control unit 17 determines that the game board is clogged with a ball. To do. The difference between the number of times the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned on and the number of times the shot ball detection switch 903 is turned on is the fact that the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game board surface, that is, the game area 27 are still floating in the game area 27. The number of balls is such that such floating balls do not become 30 or more in normal cases, and when they become 30 or more, it is considered that pachinko balls are caught in the game area 27 and are clogged. It is done. In such a case, the payout control unit 17 determines that there is a game board clogging error.

  When the payout control unit 17 determines the various errors shown in FIG. 107, a command signal for displaying on the display unit 54 the type of the error and the fact that the error has occurred is output to the display effect control board 53. . In addition, the type of error that has occurred and the fact that the error has occurred are notified to the hall management computer 1 via the card unit 3, and the type of error that has occurred in the hall management computer 1 and the fact that the error has occurred. You may make it alert | report.

  Next, the function of counting the number of game balls by the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 108, a variation factor of the number of game balls, a factor that causes the number of game balls to fluctuate, a variation detection means for the number of game balls, a management item by the payout control unit 17, and a plurality of types of game balls for each variable value The counting function is shown.

  First, the detection of game ball launching, which detects that the number of game balls has been fired into the game area 27, is detected by the change of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input in the LSI 799 (see FIG. 6) provided with the payout control unit 17, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 17 subtracts “1” from the number of game balls, The number of middle balls (the number of floating balls in the game area 27) is added by “1”, and the number of shot balls launched in the game area 27 is added by “1”.

  The detection of the foul ball is detected when the foul ball detection switch 33 is turned on, and is detected by a port input in the LSI 799. When the payout control unit 17 detects the foul ball, “1” is added to the number of game balls, “1” is subtracted from the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls), and “1” is added to the number of foul balls. .

  The detection of the winning of the game ball is detected when the winning opening switch and the start opening switch are turned on, and is detected when the payout control unit 17 of the LSI 799 receives a command from the main control board 16 (see FIG. 6). The The payout control unit 17 detects the winning, and performs control to add the number of game balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning.

  The detection of the out ball is detected when the out ball detection switch 701 (see FIG. 6) is turned on, and is detected when there is a port input in the LSI. The payout control unit 17 adds “1” to the out ball based on the detection of the out ball.

  The detection of the discharge of the game ball from the game board surface is detected when the shot ball detection switch 903 (see FIG. 6) is turned on, and is detected by a port input in the LSI. When the payout control unit 17 detects the discharge of the game ball from the game board surface, “1” is subtracted from the number of balls in game (the number of floating balls).

  Reception of the addition request instruction is detected by receiving an addition request instruction command from the card unit. When the payout control unit 17 detects this, it performs control to add the number of balls requested for addition designated by the command for requesting addition to the number of game balls.

  The reception of the subtraction request instruction is detected by receiving a subtraction request instruction command from the card unit. When the payout control unit 17 detects this, the number of subtraction request balls specified by the subtraction request instruction command is detected. Control to subtract the number of game balls.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the control of the ball removal ball conveyance process executed by the payout control unit 17. In S30, it is determined whether or not a single ball removal flag or an all ball removal flag is set. If the ball removal flag is not set, this ball removal time ball conveyance process is terminated. The one ball removal flag is a flag that is set when the ball removal portion 915 (see FIG. 2) is operated only once and only one enclosed ball is extracted, and is set in S55 described later. On the other hand, the all ball removal flag is a flag that is set when the ball removal portion 915 is continuously operated to extract all the enclosed balls, and is set in S56 described later. These flags are set on condition that the doffing switch 922 (see FIG. 2) has been operated, as will be described later in S55 and S56 of FIG.

  If either one ball removal flag or all ball removal flags are set, the control advances to S31 to determine whether or not the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is off. When the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is on, that is, when the replenishment balls are completely loaded into the pachinko machine 2 and the game is ready to be played, a NO determination is made at S31 and this is made. The control of the ball conveying process at the time of ball removal ends. On the other hand, when a new pachinko machine 2 is installed in the amusement hall, the encapsulated balls are not yet loaded in the pachinko machine 2. In that case, a predetermined number (50) of pachinko balls are first poured from the out port 145. Then, the pachinko balls flow down the out ball flow path 702, the collection ball passage path 901, and the ball collection path 189 and reach the front of the transport device 190. In this state, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is in an off state in which no pachinko ball is detected. Therefore, YES is determined in S31, the control proceeds to S32, and it is determined whether or not the conveyance failure flag is on. This conveyance failure flag is a flag set in S38, which will be described later, regardless of whether the pachinko ball stopped before the above-described conveyance device 190 is conveyed upward by the conveyance device 190 for a predetermined time. This flag is set when the pachinko ball has not been conveyed upward.

  If the conveyance failure flag is not on, the control advances to S33, and a first timer that times 6 seconds is set. Next, in S35, the transport motor 40 is driven and the transport device 190 operates. Next, in S36, it is determined whether or not the ball raising switch (upper) 41a has been turned on to detect the ball that has been conveyed.

  As described above, the ON determination of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is determined as YES when the pachinko ball is continuously detected for several milliseconds, for example. Thus, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the pachinko balls that are transported upward and discharged from the transporting device 190 flow down to the rectifier 916 and are stopped. ) When the position reaches the detection position 41a, a determination of YES is made in S36, and the stop control of the transport motor 40 in S40 is executed. After the stop control of the carry motor 40 in S40 is executed, the ball carrying process at the time of ball removal is completed, and when the ball drawing process in FIG. 110 is executed, NO is determined in S51, and 1 in S66. The ball removal / all ball removal flag is reset.

  If NO is determined in S36, it is determined in S37 whether or not the timer has expired. If the timer has not yet expired, the control returns to S36. The timer at S37 at this stage is a first timer that times the 6 seconds set at S33. If the pachinko ball is normally conveyed upward during the loop of S36 → S37 → S36, the pachinko ball reaches the ball raising switch (upper) 41a before the time is up. A determination of YES is made in S36, the control proceeds to S40, and control for stopping the transport motor 40 is performed.

  On the other hand, if the pachinko ball (stopped ball) is not detected by the lift switch (upper) 41a due to some trouble even though the transport motor 40 is driven for 6 seconds, a determination of YES is made in S37 and the control is performed. Proceeding to S38, the conveyance failure flag is set, and after notifying an error in S39, the process proceeds to S40. In this error notification, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for error notification to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 controls the display 54 to display that a conveyance error has occurred. Alternatively, the hole management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that a transport error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 may notify the fact.

  Once the transport failure flag is set in S38, when the control reaches S32, a YES determination is made in S32, and a second timer for measuring 2 seconds is set in S34, and the transport in S35 is performed again. The motor is driven, and the control for conveying the ball upward again is executed. If the pachinko ball reaches the detection position of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a at the stage before two seconds have passed, the control proceeds to S40 and is transported in the same manner as described above. The motor is stopped.

  On the other hand, since the second timer (2 seconds) is set at the time of transportation by retry after failure in the first transportation, the transportation motor 40 is rotated by looping through the loop of S36 → S37 → S36. If the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is not turned on in spite of the second drive control, the control proceeds to S38, the conveyance failure flag is set, and the error notification control after S39 is performed as described above. Will be executed.

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the control of the ball removal process executed by the payout control unit 17. By S51, it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 922 is operated and turned on. When it is not in the ON state, the control proceeds to S66, and the above-described one ball removal flag or all ball removal flag is reset. On the other hand, when the doffing switch is on, the control proceeds to S52, the on-time of the doffing switch is continued, and it is determined in S53 whether or not the doffing switch has been switched off. If it has not been switched yet, the process returns to S52.

  Then, the switch-on time is measured in S52 until the doffing switch is switched off, and when the switch is switched off, the control advances to S54 to determine whether or not the long press operation has been performed. If the switch-on time measured in S50 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), it is determined that the operation is a long press operation, the control proceeds to S56, and the all ball removal flag is reset. ), The determination is NO in S54, the control proceeds to S55, and the one ball removal flag is set.

  Next, the control proceeds to S56a, where it is determined whether or not the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned off. After the is finished, no ball removal is performed.

  On the other hand, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned on, that is, when the filled ball has been loaded, the control proceeds to S57, the ball removal motor 195a is driven, and the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b is turned on by S58. A determination is made as to whether or not, and waits until When the ball removal motor 195a is rotated once and the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b is turned on again, a determination of YES is made in S58, and stop control of the ball removal motor 195a is performed in S59. When this ball removal motor 195a rotates once, one enclosed ball is pushed out of the path and discharged.

  Next, the control advances to S60, and it is determined whether or not the all ball removal flag is set. If the single ball removal flag is set, a NO determination is made in S60, the single ball removal flag in S66 is reset, and this ball removal processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the all ball removal flag is set, a determination of YES is made in S60, the control advances to S61, and it is determined whether or not the ball removal switch 922 is turned on. When all the encapsulated balls are extracted, after the ball switch 922 is turned on for 3 seconds or more, the ball switch 922 is not operated again, and therefore NO is determined in S61. Then, in S65, it is determined whether or not the conveyance failure flag is set. If the flag is not set, the control returns to S57, and the ball removing operation by driving the ball removing motor 195a after S57 is executed. The control is executed until all the encapsulated balls are removed. The transport failure flag in S65 is a flag set in S38 described above.

  The ball removal process and the ball conveyance process at the time of ball removal shown in FIG. 109 are performed first after the ball conveyance process at the time of ball removal shown in FIG. 109 is executed, and then the ball removal process shown in FIG. 110 is executed. Is done. When the ball removal by the ball removal unit 915 is performed, the ball raising switch (upper) 41a that has previously detected the ball is in an off state in which no ball is detected. Then, a determination of YES is made in S31 of FIG. 109, processing in S32 and subsequent steps is performed, and the conveying device 190 conveys the ball upward. If the ball has not yet been detected by the lift switch (upper) 41a even though the timer has expired in S37, the conveyance failure flag is set in S38. In that case, the determination of YES is made in S65 of FIG. 110, the process proceeds to S66, and the one ball removal / all ball removal flag is reset, and the ball conveyance processing and ball removal processing are not executed.

  On the other hand, when it is desired to stop the ball removal process in the middle of the entire ball removal process, an attendant at the game hall presses the ball removal switch 922 again for 3 seconds or longer. Then, NO is determined in S63, the switch-on time is continued in S62, and it is determined whether or not the long press operation is performed in S64 when the ball removal switch is turned off. If there is, the single ball removal / all ball removal flag in S66 is reset, and the ball conveyance processing and ball removal processing at the time of ball removal are stopped.

  In place of or in addition to the long pressing operation, the ball removal process may be stopped halfway when the ball removal switch 922 is pushed for a short period of less than 3 seconds.

  In the above-described control, when NO in S51, the one ball removal flag or all ball removal flags are reset in S66. However, when NO in S51, the process may return without performing the process of S66. Good. By doing so, the control routine of the ball removal processing at the time of ball removal can be shared with the drive control of the conveyance motor 40 in the operating state in which the player is performing the hitting operation. In this ball removal ball transfer process, the first timer (6 seconds) is set in S33 and it is determined whether or not the time is up in S37. In the state, the off time of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is at most about 2 to 3 seconds, and the first timer (6 seconds) is set again by S33 without being judged YES in S37. The transport failure flag is never set.

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the control of the firing error process executed by the payout control unit 17. By S71, it is determined whether or not the card is being inserted. This determination is made based on whether or not a command including a card holding ON operation instruction transmitted from the CU described with reference to FIG. 41 is received. If a command including ON during card holding is received, a determination of YES is made in S71. However, if a command including OFF during holding of the card is received, a determination of NO is made in S71 and the process proceeds to S72. It is determined whether or not the level of the detection output of the origin sensor 37 has changed. If not, the firing error process ends. If there is, the control advances to S73 and the firing motor operation error flag is set. The firing motor operation error flag is a flag indicating that an error has occurred in which the hitting ball firing motor has rotated despite the fact that no card is inserted. In S74, control for notifying the firing motor operation error is performed. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for notifying the firing motor operation error to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 that has received the command displays that the launch motor error has occurred. The display is controlled by 54. Alternatively, the hole management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that a firing motor error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 may notify the fact.

  Next, the control advances to S93, and control for limiting the game ball circulation function is performed. Specifically, control is performed so that one, two or more or all of the conveyance motor 40, the polishing motor 193a, the rectifier solenoid 196a, the firing motor 18, and the ball removal motor 195a do not operate.

  Next, in S94, control for limiting the game ball counting function is performed. Specifically, control for invalidating any one, two or more or all detection signals of the ball raising switch (upper) 41a, the foul ball detection switch 33, the out ball detection switch 701, and the shot ball detection switch 903. It is.

  If it is determined in S71 that the card is being inserted, the control proceeds to S75, and it is determined whether or not the firing motor 40 is being rotationally driven. This firing error process is terminated when the rotational drive is not being performed, but when the rotational drive is being performed, an error determination process based on the detection signal of the firing motor origin sensor 37 after S76 is performed.

  The firing speed of the pachinko ball to the game area 27 is set to 100 shots per minute. Accordingly, the rotation speed of the firing motor 18 is also controlled to rotate at a predetermined speed. The dispensing control unit 17 determines the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 or whether or not it is rotating based on the detection output of the firing motor origin sensor 37, and the rotational speed is too slow (launch speed error 2), and the rotational speed is too fast. Error (fire speed error 1), a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 2 seconds), and the error (fire motor origin detection error) that cannot detect that the fire motor origin sensor is on even though the fire motor is driven and controlled Do.

  First, at S76, it is determined whether or not the firing motor origin sensor 37 is on. In the on-state, control is performed to update the measured value of the on-state of the firing motor origin sensor 37 in S77, and whether or not the off-time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is being measured is determined in S78. Is made. When the off-time is not being measured, this firing error process is terminated. On the other hand, when the off time is being measured, a determination is made in S79 as to whether or not the firing motor origin sensor off time is shorter than a predetermined high speed limit time. If it is determined that the time is short, the process proceeds to S86, and the firing speed error 1 flag is set. The firing speed error 1 is an error in which the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 is too fast than a predetermined speed. Next, control for notifying the firing speed error 1 is performed in S87, and then the process proceeds to S91. As for the notification of the firing speed error 1, the payout control unit 17 outputs a command for notifying the firing speed error 1 to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 indicates that a transport error has occurred in the display 54. Control to display. Alternatively, the hole management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that the firing speed error 1 has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 may notify the fact.

  If NO is determined in S79, the process proceeds to S80, and it is determined whether or not the firing motor origin sensor off time has exceeded a predetermined low speed limit time. If not exceeded, the measured value of the firing motor origin sensor off time is reset in S85 and this firing error process is terminated. However, if the slow speed limit time is exceeded, the control advances to S88 and the firing speed error is detected. Two flags are set. This firing speed error 2 is an error in which the rotational speed of the firing motor 18 is too slow than a predetermined speed.

  Next, the process proceeds to S89, and after control for notifying the firing speed error 2 is performed, the process proceeds to S93. Specifically, the control for notifying the firing speed error 2 is performed by transmitting a command for notifying the firing speed error 2 from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 and receiving the command. Is controlled to display on the display 54 that the firing speed error 2 has occurred. Alternatively, the hole management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that the firing speed error 2 has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 may notify the fact.

  If it is determined in S76 that the firing motor origin sensor 37 is not in the ON state, the control proceeds to S81, and control for updating the measured value of the off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is performed. Next, in S82, it is determined whether or not the on-time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is being measured. If the measurement is not in progress, the process proceeds to S90. If the measurement is being performed, the process proceeds to S83. It is determined whether or not the sensor ON time is shorter than a predetermined high speed limit time. If it is not shorter, it is determined in S84 whether or not the on-time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than a predetermined low speed limit time. If it is not long, the process proceeds to S84a, where the measured value of the firing motor origin sensor on time is reset. In S85, the measured value of the firing motor origin sensor off time is reset, and the control of this firing error process ends. On the other hand, if YES is determined in S84, the control proceeds to S88 described above.

  Next, if NO is determined in S82, it is determined in S90 whether or not the off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than a predetermined off upper limit time. If it is not long, the control of this firing error process ends. If it is long, the control proceeds to S91, and the firing motor origin detection error flag is set. The firing motor origin detection error is an error in which the firing motor origin sensor 37 does not detect the rotation of the firing motor 18 even though the firing motor 18 is being driven. In such a case, after the control for notifying the firing motor origin detection error is performed in S92, the control proceeds to S93. Specifically, the notification control of the firing motor origin detection error is performed by transmitting a command for notifying the launch motor origin detection error from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 and receiving the display effect control control board. 53 performs control to display on the display 54 that a firing motor origin detection error has occurred. Alternatively, the hole management computer 1 may be notified via the card unit 3 that a firing motor origin detection error has occurred, and the hole management computer 1 may notify the fact.

  The step of S71A shown by the broken line in FIG. 111 shows a modification, and instead of the step during card insertion of S71, the determination step of S71A holding points (number of game balls) = 0 may be executed. In this determination of the score of S71A = 0, the P payout control units 17 determine whether or not the total number of game balls is 0, and the payout control unit 17 described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. This is a determination function for detecting 0 balls. If YES is determined in S71A, the control proceeds to S72, and if NO is determined, the control proceeds to S75.

  The above-described firing motor origin detection error may be used instead of or in addition to the case where the firing motor origin sensor cannot be detected even though the launch motor is driven and controlled for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 2 seconds). An error is determined when the firing motor origin sensor is in the on state (the origin detection is continued) even though the firing motor is driven and controlled for a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 2 seconds). Also good.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the control of the game end detection error 1 process executed by the payout control unit 17. This error is an error in which the payout control unit 17 detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on in a state where the customer waiting state has elapsed for 60 seconds or more or a card is not inserted. First, in S101, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting state has elapsed for 60 seconds or more. This determination is made based on, for example, whether or not the period during which the hitting operation is not performed since the last change of the variable display device has stopped is 60 seconds or more. If it has not elapsed, it is determined in S102 whether or not a card is being inserted. When the card is being inserted, the control of the game end detection error 1 process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the customer waiting state has elapsed for 60 seconds or more, or if it is determined that the card is not being inserted, the control advances to S103, and it is determined whether or not the firing ball detection switch 903 is on. When it is determined that the game end detection error 1 process is not on, the control of the game end detection error 1 process ends. When it is determined that the game end detection error 1 process is on, the game end detection error 1 flag is set in S104. Is done. The determination in S103 is determined as YES when the shot ball detection switch 903 is continuously on for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds). The detection switch used for the determination of the game end detection error 1 is not limited to the shot ball detection switch 903 but may be another switch.

  Next, in S105, control for notifying the game end detection error 1 is performed. Specifically, a game end detection error 1 notification command is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 that receives the command is sent to the display 54. Control to display. This game end detection error 1 is an error in which the number of encapsulated balls exceeds the specified number (50).

  Next, in S106, control for limiting the game ball circulation function is performed, and in S107, control for limiting the game ball counting function is performed. The control at S106 and S107 is the same as the control at S93 and S94 in FIG.

  113 to 118 are diagrams showing various errors and illegal states determined by the payout control unit 17. As shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 117, there are a power supply system, an illegal game system, a communication system, an operation system, and an operation system as systems indicating the location where an error has occurred. As shown in FIG. 118, there are a ball lending / dispensing system, a winning system, and a control system as systems showing the location of fraud.

  In addition, error display (error number common to all devices) to display the type of error that occurred, error item, error notification location to notify error, cause of error occurrence, function restricted during error, payout control unit Each item of error cancellation and error recovery method / operation after error detection is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 113, four errors will be described as errors occurring in the power supply system. The error of E-0001 (0x01) error display (common error number between devices) is the power failure of the card unit 3 as an error item, and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as an error notification location. The cause is that the device request command (device information request shown in FIG. 29) from the card unit 3 has not been received even after 5 seconds from the power-on of the dispensing control unit 17, and the function is restricted during the error. A communication function with an external device, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball counting function. Further, the error cannot be canceled by the payout control unit 17, and as an error recovery method / operation after the error detection, the communication cable between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 is set to a normal state. Also, the power supply wiring of the card unit 3 is confirmed and the power is turned on.

  An error whose error display (common error number between devices) is E-0002 is that the power supply of the dispensing control unit 17 is turned off as an error item, and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as an error notification part. In this case, the activation instruction command from the payout control unit 17 is not received even after 3 seconds from the power-on of the display effect control board. As a function limited during the error, This is all functions except for the unit, and the error cancellation by the payout control unit 17 is impossible. In addition, error recovery methods / operations after error detection include supplying power to the pachinko machine 2, turning on the power switch on the power supply board, and properly connecting the harness connecting the power supply board and the LSI 799. is there.

  In the case of an error of E-0003 (0x02) as an error display (an error number common to devices), the power item of the main control board 16 is “1” as an error item. This is a power interruption when the connection confirmation signal transmitted from the main control board 16 to the LSI 799 is OFF. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side, and as a cause of the error, the connection confirmation signal input from the main control board 16 is turned on even after 3 seconds have passed since the power-on of the dispensing control unit 17 is turned on. This is the case. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. The game ball counting function is the function of adding and subtracting various balls shown in FIG. Error cancellation by the payout controller 17 is impossible, and error recovery methods / operations after error detection include supplying power to the pachinko machine 2, turning on a power switch on the power supply board, and The harness between the power supply board and the main control board 16 is correctly connected.

  When the error display (common error number between devices) is an error of E-0004 (0x03), the error item is “Power off 2” of the main control board 16. This power-off 2 is a case where there is no response from the main control board 16 at the time of starting up the power. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when a response command is not returned even after one second has elapsed after the dispensing control unit 17 transmits a device information request to the main control board 16. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, power is supplied to the pachinko machine 2, a power switch on the power supply board is turned on, and a harness between the power supply board and the main control board 16 is properly connected. Is to connect.

  Next, errors that occur in the unauthorized gaming system will be described. As an error item, in the case of an error resulting from the authentication of the main control CPU ID of the main control board 16 by the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3, an error display (error number common between devices) is displayed in the card unit 3. Displayed with reference to use. In the case of this error, the error notification location is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side, and the cause of the error is that the ID of the main control CPU is abnormal when the CPU from the card unit 3 is authenticated. Is the case. All functions are restricted as functions restricted during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is checked whether the main control board 16 is proper.

  As an error item, also in the case of an error determined as a result of authenticating the ID of the payout control CPU (CPU of the payout control unit 17) by the main control unit 323 on the card unit 3 side, refer to the use of the card unit 3. An error display (common error number between devices) is displayed. In the case of this error, the error notification location is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side, and the cause of the error is that the ID of the payout control CPU is abnormal when the CPU from the card unit 3 is authenticated. Is the case. All functions are restricted during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is checked whether or not the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 is legitimate.

  In the case of an error in which E-1001 is displayed as an error display (an error number common to devices), the error item is a base abnormality. In the case of this error, the error notification location is the indicator 54 on the pachinko 2 side, and the cause of the error is that the number of game balls is displayed when the glass door 6 or the frame body (front frame 5) is not open. This is a case where a prize ball payout of a game ball exceeding the base value designated by the unit (effect unit 50) is detected by the display effect control board 53. In the case of this error, there is no function restricted during the error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is confirmed whether an illegal game has been performed, and the error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have elapsed since the occurrence.

  In the case of an error display of E-1002 (0x81) (inter-device common error number), the error item is an illegal winning error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the main control board 16 detects the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening in a state other than the big hit or the small hit. In the case of this error, there is no function restricted during the error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is confirmed whether an illegal game has been performed, and the error is automatically recovered when 4 minutes have elapsed since the occurrence.

  Referring to FIG. 114, in the case of an error of E-1003 (0x82) (common error number between devices), the error item is a radio wave sensor error and is displayed on the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The The cause of the error is when the main control board 16 detects that the radio wave sensor is turned on. A radio wave sensor for detecting unauthorized radio waves is connected to the main control board 16, and a radio wave sensor error is determined when a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor is input to the main control board 16. In the case of this error, there is no function restricted during the error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is to check whether an illegal game is being performed. Errors are automatically recovered when 4 minutes have passed since the occurrence.

  The error item of E-1004 (0x83) error display (inter-device common error number) is the magnet sensor error. This magnet sensor error is an error when an illegal action such as a player bringing a magnet close to the game area 27 and guiding a pachinko ball to a winning opening in the game area 27 occurs. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The error is caused when the main control board 16 detects that the magnet sensor is turned on. A magnet sensor is connected to the main control board 16, and when the magnet sensor detects magnetism and the detection signal is input to the main control board 16, it is determined that a magnetic sensor error has occurred. . No functionality is limited during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, it is confirmed whether or not an illegal game is performed. Errors are automatically recovered when 4 minutes have passed since the occurrence.

  Next, communication system errors will be described. In the case of an error of E-2001 (0x04) error display (inter-device common error number), the error item is a communication line disconnection error of the card unit 3. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is that the payout control unit 17 does not receive the next request command even after 4 seconds have passed since the response is sent to the card unit 3, or the payout control unit 17 in response to a request from the card unit 3. Is when the communication line is disconnected. Functions restricted during an error include an external device communication function, an authentication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball count function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized, the communication is automatically restarted, the communication cable between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 is set to a normal state, the card unit 3 The pachinko machine 2 is turned off and turned on again.

  If the received command from the card unit 3 is an error in an error item (abnormal CRC), no error is displayed. The cause of the error is when the CRC part of the command received from the card unit 3 and the CRC calculation result in the payout control part 17 are inconsistent. As described above with reference to FIG. 24 and the like, the CRC is a parity check, and the CRC is abnormal means that the result of the parity check is NG, that is, an abnormality. No functionality is limited during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the command received from the card unit 3 is discarded, no response command is transmitted, and a command transmission retry from the card unit 3 is waited.

  In the case of an error item error of the reception command error (data length error) of the card unit 3, no error is displayed. The cause of this error is when the length of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate. No functionality is limited during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the received command is discarded, a response command is not transmitted, and a command transmission retry from the card unit 3 is waited.

  In the case of the error of the error item of the reception command error (data content error) from the card unit 3, no error display is performed. The cause of this error is a case where part or all of the content of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate. No functionality is limited during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the received command is discarded, a response command is not transmitted, and a command transmission retry from the card unit 3 is waited.

  No error is displayed in the case of an error item for the card unit receive command error (encryption error). The cause of this error is when the encryption part of the command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control part 17 is not appropriate. No functionality is limited during an error. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the received command is discarded, a response command is not transmitted, and a command transmission retry from the card unit 3 is waited.

  The error item E-2101 (0x05) error display (inter-device common error number) has an error item of communication line disconnection 1 of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the connection confirmation signal input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is turned off (except when it corresponds to E-0003). Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. The payout controller 17 can cancel the error. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 is in a normal state, and the pachinko machine 2 is turned off and turned on again. .

  The error item E-2102 (0x06) error display (inter-device common error number) indicates that the error item is communication line disconnection 2 of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when a response command is not returned even after one second has elapsed after the dispensing control unit 17 transmits a device information request other than the device information request to the main control board 16. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized, communication is resumed, the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 is set to a normal state, and a pachinko machine. 2 is to turn off the power and turn it on again.

  Referring to FIG. 115, the error of E-2103 (0x07) error display (inter-device common error number) is an error of the reception command abnormality (sum value abnormality) of the main control board 16. This error is caused by the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side as a notification location, and the cause of the error is that the CRC calculation result of the command received from the main control board 16 and the CRC calculation result in the payout control unit 17 are three times consecutive This is the case when there was disagreement. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized, communication is resumed, the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 is set to a normal state, and a pachinko machine. 2 is to turn off the power and turn it on again.

  The error of E-2104 (0x08) error display (error number common between devices) is an error item of reception command abnormality (data length abnormality) of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is that the length of the command transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate three times in succession. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized, communication is resumed, the communication cable between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 is set to a normal state, and a pachinko machine. 2 is to turn off the power and turn it on again.

  The error of E-2105 (0x09) error display (inter-device common error number) is an error item of reception command abnormality (data content abnormality) of the main control board 16. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when a part or all of the contents of the command transmitted from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 is not appropriate three times in succession. Functions restricted during the error include an inter-board communication function, a general game function, an operation mode switching function, a game ball circulation function, and a game ball number counting function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized and communication is resumed, and the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 is set in a normal state. This is to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 2 and turn it on again.

  The error of E-2201 error display (common error number between devices) is an error item of reception command abnormality (sum value abnormality) of the display control effect control board 53. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the CRC part of the command received from the payout control part 17 and the CRC calculation result on the display effect control board 53 are inconsistent three times in succession. The function restricted during the error is an operation mode switching function. The error cannot be canceled by the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized and communication is resumed, and the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 is operated normally. To put it in a state, to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 2 and turn it on again.

  The error of the error display (common error number between devices) of E-2202 is that the error item is a reception command abnormality (data length abnormality) of the display control effect control board 53. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is that the length of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 is not appropriate three times in succession. The function restricted during the error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized and communication is resumed, and the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 is operated normally. To put it in a state, to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 2 and turn it on again.

  The error of the error display of E-2203 (inter-device common error number) is a reception command abnormality (data content abnormality) of the display effect control board 53 for the display. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is a case where part or all of the content of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 is not appropriate three times in succession. The function restricted during the error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit 17. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized and communication is resumed, and the communication cable between the LSI 799 including the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 is set to a normal state. This is to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 2 and turn it on again.

  For the error in the error display (common error number between devices) of E-2204, the error item is a reception command abnormality (sequence abnormality) of the display control effect control board 53. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the sequence number of the command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 is missing. The function restricted during the error is an operation mode switching function. It is impossible to cancel the error in the payout control unit. As an error recovery method / operation after error detection, the communication state is initialized, communication is resumed, and the communication cable between the LSI 799 provided with the payout control unit and the display effect control board 53 is in a normal state. It is to turn off the power of the pachinko machine 2 and turn it on again.

  Next, the operation system error will be described. For the error of E-3001 (0x0A) error display (inter-device common error number), the error item is a door opening error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects the opening of the glass door 6 and / or the opening of the frame (front frame 5). The functions restricted during the error include a game ball launch function and a game ball count function. Error cancellation by the payout control unit 17 is possible. The error recovery method / operation after error detection is to close the glass door 6 and / or the frame (front frame 5).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 116, an error in E-4001 (0x0B) error display (inter-device common error number), which explains an error in the operation system, is a launch motor operation error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side, and a command for notifying the firing motor operation error is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board receiving it. 53 controls the display 54 to display E-4001. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects a level change of the firing motor origin sensor 37 in a state where no card is inserted. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, or replace the launching mechanism (launching unit 38).

  The error item (common error number between devices) of E-4002 (0x0C) is an error item of the launch motor origin detection error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for informing the firing motor origin detection error to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4002 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is when the discharge motor origin sensor 37 is not detected to be turned on by the dispensing control unit 17 even if 2 seconds elapse while the firing motor 18 is being driven. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a fireball circulation function and a game ball count function. An error can be canceled by the payout control unit, and an error recovery method / operation after error detection is to check, repair, or replace the launching mechanism (launching unit 38).

  The error item of E-4003 (0x0D) error display (inter-device common error number) is the firing speed error 1 (the firing speed is fast). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying the firing speed error 1 to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command causes the display 54 to display E-4003. Take control. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects a state in which the on time or off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is shorter than the specified time while the firing motor 18 is being driven. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the launching mechanism (launching unit 38).

  The error of the error display (equal device common error number) of E-4004 (0x0E) is the firing speed error 2 (slow firing speed). The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a command for notifying the firing speed error 2 to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command causes the display 54 to display E-4004. Take control. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects a state in which the on time or off time of the firing motor origin sensor 37 is longer than the specified time while the firing motor 18 is being driven. However, the case where it corresponds to the error display of the above-mentioned E-4001 is excluded. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the launching mechanism (launching unit 38).

  The error of E-4101 (0x0F) error display (inter-device common error number) is the game item shortage error 1 (before the transport motor). This is an error that game balls are insufficient on the front side of the transport motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball shortage error 1 notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4101 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 continuously detects the turning-up switch (lower) 41b off for 2 seconds or more. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after error detection, a game ball is supplied to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, a game ball is inserted into the out port 145). The game ball circulation mechanism is to eliminate clogging on the board surface, and the game ball circulation mechanism is to be inspected, repaired and replaced.

  The error in the error display (common error number between devices) of E-4102 (0x10) is the game ball transport error 1 (before the transport motor). This error is a game ball transport error that occurs on the front side of the transport motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball transport error 1 notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4102 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the ball raising switch (lower) 41b is turned on for 2 seconds or more during the game ball transfer operation. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error, the clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism is eliminated, and the game ball circulation mechanism is inspected / repaired / replaced. It is.

  The error displayed in E-4103 (0x11) (common error number between devices) is the game item shortage error 2 (after the transport motor). This error is an error in which a shortage of game balls has occurred on the lower conveyance side of the conveyance motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball shortage error 2 notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4103 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is a case where the payout control unit 17 detects the turning-up switch (upper) 41a off continuously for 2 seconds or more other than during the game ball transport operation. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after error detection, a game ball is supplied to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, a game ball is inserted into the out port 145). It is to eliminate clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, and to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error displayed in E-4104 (0x12) (common error number between devices) is the game item transport error 2 (after the transport motor). This error is a game ball transport error that occurs on the lower transport side of the transport motor 40. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball transport error 2 notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4104 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is when the turn-up switch (upper) 41a is continuously detected for 2 seconds or longer by the payout control unit 17 during the game ball transport operation. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error, the clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism is eliminated, and the game ball circulation mechanism is inspected / repaired / replaced. It is.

  The error displayed on the error display E-4105 (0x13) (common error number between devices) is “game ball transport error 3”. This error notification location is the display device 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball conveyance error 3 notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4105 on the display 54. To control. As the cause of the error, when the game ball transport error 3 is not occurring, the payout control unit 17 cannot detect the turning-up switch (upper) 41a on for 6 seconds or more during the game ball transport operation. This is a case where, during the occurrence of the game ball transport error 3, the payout control unit 17 cannot detect the turning-up switch (upper) 41a on for 2 seconds during the game ball transport operation. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after error detection, a game ball is supplied to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, a game ball is inserted into the out port 145). It is to eliminate clogging of the game ball circulation mechanism, and to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error in the error display (common error number between devices) of E-4201 (0x14) is an error in which the error item is an excessive number of game balls. This error is an error in which the total number of enclosed balls enclosed in the gaming machine 2 is too large. The error notification location is the display 54 on the gaming machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game ball overload error notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4201 on the display 54. To control. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on for 2 seconds or more after the customer waiting state has elapsed for 60 seconds. There is no function restricted by the payout controller 17 during an error. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to remove several balls, and to check, repair, or replace the game ball circulation mechanism. .

  With reference to FIG. 117, the continuation of the operation system error will be described. The error of the error display (common error number between devices) of E-4202 (0x15) is the game end detection error 1 (abnormality detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Specifically, the payout control unit 17 transmits a game end notification error notification command to the display effect control board 53, and the display effect control control board 53 receiving the command displays E-4202 on the display 54. Take control. The cause of the error is when the waiting state for 60 seconds has elapsed, or when the payout control unit 17 detects the firing ball detection switch 903 being turned on in a state in which no card is inserted. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error in the error display (common error number between devices) E-4203 (0x16) is the game end detection error 2 (clogged up). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 continuously detects that the firing ball detection switch 903 is turned on for 0.5 seconds or more. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4301 (0x17) error display (inter-device common error number) is an error item whose game ball number is too low. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 detects that the gaming ball shortage detection switch 904 is turned on continuously for 2 seconds or more after the customer waiting state has elapsed for 60 seconds. There is no function restricted by the payout controller 17 during an error. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and as an error recovery method / operation after detecting the error, a game ball is supplied to the game ball circulation mechanism (for example, a game ball is inserted into the out port 145). ), Inspecting, repairing and replacing the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error displayed in E-4401 (0x18) (common error number between devices) is a game board clogging error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 detects that the difference between the number of times the ball raising switch (upper) 41a is turned on and the number of times the shot ball detection switch 903 is turned on is 30 or more. The difference between the number of balls detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the number of balls detected by the shot ball detection switch 903 is that the pachinko balls that have been driven into the game area 27 are not yet collected and the game area 27 The number of floating balls that are floating in the inside is generally not possible to be 30 or more. That means that the number of floating balls is 30 or more has been thrown into the game area 27. It is assumed that the game ball is caught on the game board surface and is in a clogged state. The function restricted by the payout control unit 17 during the error is only the launch function of the game ball circulation function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after the error detection is to open the glass frame 6 and eliminate clogging of game balls on the board surface.

  The error of E-4501 (0x19) error display (common error number between devices) is foul ball detection error 1 (abnormality detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the waiting state for 60 seconds has elapsed, or when the dispensing control unit 17 detects that the foul ball detection switch 33 is turned on in a state where no card is inserted. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error displayed in E-4502 (0x1A) (common error number between devices) is a foul ball detection error 2 (clogging). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 continuously detects that the foul ball detection switch 33 is turned on for 0.5 seconds or more. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error of E-4601 (0x1B) is an out ball detection error 1 (abnormality detection). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the waiting state for 60 seconds has elapsed, or when the payout control unit 17 detects that the out-ball detecting switch 701 is turned on in a state where no card is inserted. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error in E-4602 (0x1C) error display (inter-device common error number) is out ball detection error 2 (clogging). The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the payout control unit 17 continuously detects that the out ball detection switch 701 is turned on for 0.5 seconds or more. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, or replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error in E-4701 (0x1D) error display (common error number between devices) is a doffing switch error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects that the ball removal switch 922 is turned on continuously for 1 second after the power is turned on. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error include a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  The error item (common error number between devices) of E-4702 (0x1E) is an error item of a ball removal motor origin sensor error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects that the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b is turned on except during the ball removal operation. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  An error in E-4703 (0x1F) error display (error number common to all devices) is a dash error. The error notification location is the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. The cause of the error is when the dispensing control unit 17 detects that the signal level of the ball removal motor origin sensor 195b does not change even if 1 second elapses while the ball removal motor 195a is driven. Functions restricted by the payout control unit 17 during an error are a game ball circulation function and a game ball count function. The payout control unit 17 can cancel the error, and the error recovery method / operation after detecting the error is to check, repair, and replace the game ball circulation mechanism.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118, various illegal game contents when an illegal game is performed will be described. First of all, I will explain fraudulent game of ball lending and payout system. As an item, the illegal game of the interface game is that the content of the illegal game is data falsification between the device, CPU impersonation, and interface. The card unit 3 is used as an illegal game detection location. The notification location of the illegal game is the display 312 on the card unit 3 side. Measures against illegal games are to prevent spoofing and data tampering by ID authentication between devices and data encryption between interfaces.

  The illegal game whose item is Selgot is to insert a thin board made of celluloid or the like into the game board as the content of the illegal game, and to change the trajectory of the game ball, which widens / opens the entrance of the winning opening. The illegal game detection locations are the card unit 3, the main control board 16, and the display effect control board 53. The notification location of the illegal game is the display 312 of the card unit 3 and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Measures against fraudulent games are to detect the number of winnings per unit time and monitor base abnormality, and to monitor illegal winnings for electric powers.

  Next, winning-type illegal games will be described. In the case of an illegal game of magnet goto as an item, the content of the illegal game is to change the trajectory of the game ball using a magnet and increase the winning rate to a winning opening or the like. The location where the illegal game is detected is the main control board 16. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. A countermeasure against illegal games is to monitor magnetism with a magnet sensor.

  When the item is a fraudulent game with a radio wave, the content of the fraudulent game is to cause the software or the proximity sensor to malfunction using a radio wave transmitter. The location where the illegal game is detected is the main control board 16. The notification location of the illegal game is the display 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. Countermeasures against fraudulent games include monitoring the transmission of radio waves with a radio wave sensor and monitoring the difference between the number of winning and the number of winnings.

  In the case of a fraudulent game with the item of glass door opening / frame opening, as a content of the fraudulent game, the glass door 6 or the frame (front frame 5) is opened by using a tool such as a key or a bar obtained illegally. The game balls are awarded / the control board is exchanged. Detection points for illegal games are the card unit 3, the main control board 16, and the payout control unit 17. The notification location of the illegal game is the display 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. As countermeasures against illegal games, prize balls are not paid out even if a winning of a game ball is detected while the glass door / frame is open, and is similar to the item of interface goto when replacing a board.

  In the case of a fraudulent game with a fraudulent ball goto as an item, the content of the fraudulent game is to use a game ball smaller than the regular ball to increase the winning rate to the winning a prize opening or the like. The illegal game detection location is not applicable (cannot be detected) and is an illegal activity that cannot be detected. Therefore, it is impossible to notify illegal games, and countermeasures against illegal games are also impossible.

  Next, the illegal game of the control system will be described. In the case of fraudulent games with the exchange of the back ROM, the contents of the fraudulent games are to attach a non-regular board or CPU to the gaming machine and play a specific procedure to illegally hit a large number of prize balls. It is to tamper. The detection unit of the illegal game is the card unit 3. The notification location of the illegal game is the display 312 on the card unit 3 side. A countermeasure against illegal games is to prevent impersonation by ID authentication between devices.

  In the case of a fraudulent game with an inter-bank machine as an item, the content of the fraudulent game is to use a special device to synchronize the launch timing of the game ball with the internal lottery timing of the game machine and make a big hit. There are no corresponding illegal game detection locations and illegal game notification locations. As a countermeasure against fraudulent games, a random number that affects the game play rate is to change the initial value and make the update of the random value indefinite.

  In the case of a fraudulent game with hanging as an item, the content of the fraudulent game is to attach a circuit board or the like that manipulates signal timing or the like to the circuit board / harness. The illegal game detection locations are the card unit 3 and the display effect control board 53. The notification location of the illegal game is the display unit 312 on the card unit 3 side and the display unit 54 on the pachinko machine 2 side. A countermeasure against illegal games is to detect the number of winnings per unit time and monitor the base abnormality.

  Next, a detailed example of a communication command between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 124, (A) authentication response (payout control unit → card unit), (B) recovery request (payout control unit → card unit), and (C) recovery response (payout control unit → card). Commands relating to the operation instruction (card unit → payout control unit) of unit (D) and the operation response (card unit → payout control unit) of (E) are shown.

  In (A) to (E) shown in FIG. 119 to FIG. 124, information such as a provider of information about a command to be transmitted, a transmission source, and a reception destination is associated with each other in a table format. A command communicated between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 includes SOF (Start of Frame) data indicating the start of a communication frame and EOF (End of Frame) data indicating the end of the communication frame. In the meantime, the frame data basically consists of a frame structure in which data length, transmission data (business message), and CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) data are arranged in this order. In the command, the data length of the transmission data is specified by the data length. As the CRC, a CRC-ITU-T method is used with a business message as a calculation target range.

  The command of the authentication response in FIG. 119 (A) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3 and notifies that the authentication request from the card unit 3 has been accepted. The command of the authentication response includes a command code, a random number A, a random number B, and a MAC as transmission data. The command code is code information provided in association with each command in order to specify the command type.

  The recovery request command in FIG. 119 (B) is a command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, and requests the gaming machine to transmit recovery information. The recovery request command includes a command code, spare, and MAC as transmission data.

  119 and 120, the recovery response command (C) is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3, and transmits recovery information to the card unit 3. The recovery response command includes, as transmission data, a command code, connection time, last sequence number, previous ball related information, current ball related information, spare, and MAC. The connection time is the connection time backed up by the gaming machine, and the final sequence number is the final sequence number backed up by the gaming machine.

  The previous ball related information of the recovery response includes the previously notified game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, game ball firing number information, out ball passing information, symbol determination count 1, symbol determination count 2, start port 1 count , 2 start ports, 3 start ports, 1 winning port, 2 winning ports, 1 winning port, 2 winning ports, 3 winning ports, and 4 winning ports. In this example, the case where the symbol determination number 1 and the symbol determination number 2 are transmitted by being divided into bytes of 1 byte is shown.

  The current ball related information in the recovery response includes the game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, game ball firing number information, out ball passing information, and the number of symbol determinations currently held by the gaming machine. 1, symbol determination number 2, start port 1 time, start port 2 times, start port 3 times, grand prize port 1 time, grand prize port 2 times, winning port 1 time, winning port 2 times, winning port 3 times, and , 4 winning entries are included.

  Of the data transmitted to the card unit 3 in the recovery response, information on the number of game balls acquired, symbol determination count 1, symbol determination count 2, start port 1 count, start port 2 count, start aperture 3 count, grand prize winning count 1 count The main control board 16 is the information provider of the number of grand prize winning times 2 times, the number of winning times 1 time, the number of winning times 2 times, the number of winning times 3 times and the number of winning times 4 times.

  The main control board 16 transmits a response of the base state inquiry response to the payout control unit 17 in response to the command of the base state inquiry request from the payout control unit 17. In the main control board 16, between the command transmissions of the table state inquiry response, the accumulated value of the number of winning balls (number of winning balls), the number of symbol determinations 1, the number of symbol determinations 2, the number of game balls won in the starting port 1 ( The number of game balls won in the start port 1), the number of game balls won in the start port 2 (start port 2 wins number), the number of game balls won in the start port 3 (start port 3 wins number), and the prize winner 1 Number of game balls (number of winning a prize opening 1), number of game balls won in 2 times of winning a prize opening (number of winning 2 winning prizes), number of game balls won in a winning opening 1 (number of winning 1 winning prizes) ), The number of game balls won in winning port 2 (winning port 2 winning numbers), the number of game balls won in winning port 3 (winning port 3 winning numbers), and the number of game balls won in winning port 4 A process of calculating the cumulative value of (the number of winning prizes 4) is performed.

  Then, the data accumulated between the command transmissions in this way is provided to the payout control unit 17 as data of the table state inquiry response. In the payout control unit 17, based on each data provided from the main control board 16 as described above, the game ball acquisition number information, the back ball addition information, the game ball firing number information, the out ball passing information, the design as described above Number of determinations 1, Number of symbol determinations 2, Start port 1 times, Start port 2 times, Start port 3 times, Grand prize port 1 time, Grand prize port 2 times, Winning port 1 time, Winning port 2 times, Winning port 3 times And the data of the number of winning times 4 times can be obtained, and these data are transmitted as data of the recovery response.

  121 and 122, the operation instruction command (D) is a command transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17, instructing the gaming operation to the gaming machine, and the number of game balls, etc. Request transmission of game machine information. The operation instruction command includes, as transmission data, a command code, a sequence number, an operation request, a CU state, an addition request ball number, a subtraction request ball number, a card balance, an operation mode switching preparation specification, an operation mode switching specification, and a game ball total. Number information, maintenance content or test content, and MAC are included.

  As described above, with regard to the operation request, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7 is used to indicate “game ball number addition request”, “game ball number subtraction request”, “game permission request”, “game prohibition request”, “game ball number”. And “Sequence Number Clear Request”, “Glass Door Open Request”, and “Cell Open Request” (Bit7 is “Preliminary”).

  Regarding the CU state, in this example, 2 bytes of Bit0 to Bit15 are used to indicate that “card insertion processing”, “cash insertion processing”, “general card holding”, “member card holding”, “test card holding” ”,“ Prepaid loan display ”,“ Replay loan display ”,“ Mobama split display ”,“ Wagon service display ”,“ Clear display ”, and“ Resting ”(Bit7-5, Bit15) -14 are designated as “standby”).

  As described above, the addition request ball number indicating the value to be added to the number of game balls is valid when Bit 0 of the operation request is “1”. As described above, the number of subtraction request balls indicating the value to be subtracted from the number of game balls is effective when Bit 1 of the operation request is “1”.

  As for the card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3, the balance is designated by 2 bytes.

  As for the operation mode switching preparation designation, the operation mode switching preparation designation of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7.

  As operation modes, “operation mode” in the operating state, “test card insertion mode” in the test card insertion state, “maintenance mode” for daily cleaning, replacement of consumables, and failure / repair of equipment, and nails There are multiple modes: "Test mode" for checking the results of adjustment and base adjustment, and checking the operation at the time of installation, and "Test mode" used for analyzing the operation at the time of game machine production and market return. . The operation mode is switched when a predetermined switching condition as described later is satisfied.

  As the operation mode switching preparation designation, the operation mode preparation designation is made when Bit0 is “1”, the test card insertion mode preparation designation is made when Bit1 is “1”, and the maintenance mode preparation designation is made when Bit2 is “1”. Yes, when the bit 3 is “1”, the test hit mode preparation is designated, and when the bit 4 is “1”, the test mode preparation is designated (bits 7 to 5 are reserved).

  Regarding the operation mode switching designation, the switching designation of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7.

  As operation mode switching designation, when Bit0 is “1”, operation mode switching is designated, when Bit1 is “1”, test card insertion mode switching is designated, and when Bit2 is “1”, maintenance mode switching is designated. When Bit 3 is “1”, trial mode switching is designated, and when Bit 4 is “1”, test mode switching is designated (Bits 7 to 5 are reserved).

  The game ball total number information is 3-byte data indicating the number of game balls held in the gaming machine when shifting to an operation mode other than the operation mode, and is transmitted to the payout control unit 17 when shifting to the operation mode. Is done.

  As for the maintenance content or test content, when the operation mode switching designation is Bit2 “1” and the maintenance mode switching designation is made, the maintenance contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to 7 (Bit7 to 4). Is spare). On the other hand, when Bit 4 is “1” in the operation mode switching designation and the test mode switching designation is made, the test contents 1 to 4 are instructed by 1 byte of Bits 0 to 7 (Bits 7 to 4 are reserved).

  The operation response (E) in FIGS. 123 and 124 is a response transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3, and a game operation instruction execution result and the number of game balls are given to the card unit 3. Notify the stand information. In the action response, as transmission data, command code, sequence number, execution result, game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing Information, ball related information, game machine information, operation mode switching preparation result, operation mode switching result, and MAC are included.

  As for the sequence number, a value obtained by incrementing the sequence number received by the operation instruction by 1 is indicated by 1 byte.

  As for the execution result, as described above, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7 is used to determine whether or not “game ball number addition permission”, “game ball number subtraction permission”, “game permission permission”, “game prohibition permission”, “game ball number” And sequence number clear permission / inhibition ”,“ glass door opening / closing permission ”, and“ cell opening permission / inhibition ”(Bit7 is“ reserved ”).

  The ball-related information of the motion response is information indicating the current number of balls, and as described above, the total number of gaming balls, the number of gaming balls acquired, the back ball addition information, the gaming balls currently held in the gaming machine Number of shots, out ball passing information, symbol determination count 1, symbol determination count 2, start aperture 1 count, start aperture 2 count, start aperture 3 count, grand prize winning 1 count, grand prize winning 2 count, winning prize 1 count , The number of winning ports 2 times, the number of winning ports 3 times, and the number of winning ports 4 times.

  In the payout control unit 17, as described above, based on each data provided from the main control board 16, the game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information, game ball firing number information, out ball passing information, as described above, Symbol determination number 1, Symbol determination number 2, Start port 1 time, Start port 2 times, Start port 3 times, Grand prize port 1 time, Grand prize port 2 times, Winner port 1 time, Winner port 2 times, Winner port 3 The data of the number of times and the number of winning holes 4 times can be obtained, and these data are transmitted as an operation response.

  The operation response gaming machine information is information indicating the current gaming machine state, and includes gaming machine state 1, gaming machine state 2, gaming machine error state 1, and gaming machine error state 2 as described above. ing.

  In the payout control unit 17, the gaming machine state 1, the gaming machine state 2, the gaming machine error state 1, and the gaming machine error state 2 provided from the main control board 16 as described above, Data of gaming machine state 2, gaming machine error state 1, and gaming machine error state 2 can be obtained, and these data are transmitted as operation responses.

  For the game table state 1, 1 byte of Bit 0 to Bit 17 is used to indicate “game allowed state or game prohibited state”, “waiting or playing”, “number of game balls 0”, “game completion”, and “game table”. "Reset" (Bits 7 to 5 are "reserved") is instructed.

  For the game table state 2, 1 bit of Bit0 to Bit17 is used to indicate “big hit 1”, “big hit 2”, “big hit 3”, “big hit 4”, “big hit end display”, “high base” ”,“ High probability ”, and“ Waiting for customer ”.

  For the game table error state 1, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit17 indicates that “the frame body is open”, “the glass door is open”, “the magnet sensor error is occurring”, “the radio wave sensor error is occurring”, and “illegal “End of occurrence of winning error” (bits 7 to 5 are “reserved”) is instructed.

  Regarding the gaming machine error state 2, in this example, the “inter-device common error number” (Bits 0 to 6) is indicated by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit17, and an error (Bit7: 1) on the main control board or the payout control unit Error (Bit7: 0) is indicated.

  Regarding the operation mode switching preparation result, the operation mode switching preparation result of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7. As the operation mode switching preparation result, when Bit0 is “1”, the operation mode shift permission / inhibition, when Bit1 is “1”, test card insertion mode shift permission / inhibition, when Bit2 is “1”, maintenance mode shift permission / inhibition, Bit3 is “1”. ”Indicates whether the test hit mode is permitted or not, and when Bit 4 is“ 1 ”, the test mode is permitted (bits 7 to 5 are reserved).

  Regarding the operation mode switching result, the switching result of the operation mode of the gaming machine is instructed by 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit7. As a result of the operation mode switching, when Bit 0 is “1”, the operation mode is shifted, when Bit 1 is “1”, the test card insertion mode is shifted, when Bit 2 is “1”, the maintenance mode is switched, and when Bit 3 is “1”. When the test hit mode shifts and Bit 4 is “1”, the test mode shifts (bits 7 to 5 are reserved).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127, a detailed example of communication commands between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 will be described. 125 to 127, (A) start instruction (payout control unit → display effect control board), (B) gaming machine information notification (payout control board → display effect control board), and (C ) Command relating to the card insertion request (payout control board → display effect control board).

  In (A) to (C) shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, information such as a provider of information about a command to be transmitted, a transmission source, and a reception destination is associated with each other in a table format. The commands communicated between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 are basically data of transmission data (business message) and sum (SUM) value (communication frame error detection data). Is frame data having a frame configuration arranged in this order. In this command, the sum value is calculated from the addition result of all data other than the sum value.

  125A is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, and notifies the display effect control board 53 that power has been turned on. The start instruction command includes a command code as transmission data.

  The game machine information notification (B) in FIGS. 125 to 127 is a command transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 and notifies the display effect control board 53 of the game machine information. . For game machine information notifications, command data, game ball total number information, game ball acquisition number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing information, symbol confirmation as transmission data Number of times 1, Symbol determination number 2, Start port 1 time, Start port 2 times, Start port 3 times, Grand prize port 1 time, Grand prize port 2 times, Winner port 1 time, Winner port 2 times, Winner port 3 times, Winning mouth 4 times, gaming machine state 1, gaming machine state 2, gaming machine error state 1, gaming machine error state 2, CU state, card balance, operation mode switching preparation designation, operation mode switching designation, game ball total number information, In addition, maintenance contents or test contents are included.

  Game ball total number information, game ball earned number information, back ball addition information (addition), game ball firing number information (subtraction), out ball passing information, symbol determination number 1, symbol determination number 2, start port 1 time, start FIG. 123 (E) shows the number of times of 2 mouths, the number of times of starting 3 times, the number of times of winning 1 times, the number of times of winning 2 times, the number of times of winning 1 times, the number of times of winning 2 times, the number of times of winning 3 times, The data has the same contents as the data described in the operation response. The payout control unit 17 can obtain these data based on the data provided from the main control board 16 and the like, and transmits these data as game machine information notification data.

  The gaming machine state 1 is data having the same contents as the gaming machine state 1 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and can be obtained from the gaming machine state 1 data provided from the main control board 16. . The gaming machine state 2 is data having the same contents as the gaming machine state 2 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and can be obtained from the gaming machine state 2 data provided from the main control board 16. .

  For the gaming machine error state 1, 1 byte of Bit0 to Bit17 is used to indicate that “a magnet sensor error is occurring”, “a radio wave sensor error is occurring”, and “an illegal winning error is occurring” (Bits 1 to 0, 7 to 5). Is “reserved”). The payout control unit 17 can obtain the data of the gaming machine error state 1 based on the gaming machine error state 1 provided from the main control board 16. The gaming machine error state 2 is data having the same contents as the gaming machine error state 2 described in the operation response of FIG. 124 (E), and is obtained from the gaming machine error state 2 data provided from the main control board 16. be able to.

  The CU state is data having the same contents as the CU state described in the operation instruction in FIG. 121D, and can be obtained from the CU state data provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  As for the card balance indicating the balance of the card inserted in the card unit 3, the balance is designated by 2 bytes.

  The CU state is the same data as the CU state described in the operation instruction of FIG. 121 (D), and can be obtained from the CU state data provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  The operation mode switching preparation designation is data having the same contents as the operation mode switching preparation designation described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and the operation mode switching preparation designation provided from the card unit 3 as described above. Can be obtained from the data.

  The operation mode switching designation is data having the same contents as the operation mode switching designation described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and as described above, from the operation mode switching designation data provided from the card unit 3. Can be obtained.

  The maintenance content or test content is data having the same content as the maintenance content or test content described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D). As described above, the maintenance content or the test content provided by the command from the card unit 3 or It can be obtained from test content data.

  The card insertion request in FIG. 127 (C) is data transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 table, and transmits a card ID (C-ID). The command for requesting card insertion includes a command code and a card ID as transmission data.

  The card ID is the same data as the operation mode switching designation described in the operation instruction of FIG. 122 (D), and can be obtained from the card ID data provided from the card unit 3 as described above.

  Next, each operation mode will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the transition (transition) relationship of the operation modes in a table format.

  As described above, the operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes (mode 1), test card insertion mode (mode 2), maintenance mode (mode 3), test hit mode (mode 4), and test mode (mode 5). Mode is provided.

  When the gaming machine is turned on, an operation in an operation mode, which is an operation mode in which a normal game can be performed, is started. In the operation mode, a general game machine function such as a game function and a game history data collection function are validated, and a normal game can be performed. The operation mode does not shift to another operation mode when a general card (visitor card) and a membership card are inserted into the card unit 3, and changes to the test card insertion mode when a test card is inserted into the card unit 3. To do. When the test card is inserted, information such as the number of game balls is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the card unit 3.

  The test card insertion mode (mode 2) is an operation mode in which, for example, a transition to another operation mode can be made in response to an operation on the card unit 3.

  In the test card insertion mode, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays a mode setting operation unit including an operation button icon for performing an operation of selecting and setting the maintenance mode, the test hit mode, or the test mode. .

  In the test card insertion mode, when an operation for selecting the maintenance mode is performed on the mode setting operation unit of the display 312, the operation mode transitions to the maintenance mode. Further, in the test card insertion mode, when an operation for selecting the trial hit mode is performed on the mode setting operation unit of the display 312, the operation mode transitions to the trial hit mode. In the test card insertion mode, when the operation for selecting the test mode is performed on the mode setting operation unit of the display 312, the operation mode is changed to the test mode. In the test card insertion mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed with the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode transitions to the operation mode.

  The maintenance mode (mode 3) is an operation mode for performing maintenance such as daily inspection / daily cleaning of game machines, replacement of consumables, breakdown / repair of equipment, and setting of business parameters. In the maintenance mode, functions relating to general gaming machines and gaming history data collection functions that are enabled in the operation mode are not enabled.

  At the time of transition to the maintenance mode, the main control board 16 uses the probability variation function (control function related to the probability variation state), the variation time shortening function (control function related to the time shortening state), etc. 100 (%)) is temporarily saved in the save area provided in the RAM, and when the operation mode is restored, the saved variables are restored to the original state, and the state of the gaming machine is restored. .

  Further, in the maintenance mode, it is possible to transition to another operation mode in accordance with the operation on the card unit 3.

  In the maintenance mode, the gaming machine can be operated by lending a ball from the test card. Also, the game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are not backed up.

  In the maintenance mode, an operation button icon for selecting the maintenance mode is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 as a mode setting operation unit. In the maintenance mode, when an operation for selecting the maintenance mode is performed on the mode setting operation unit of the display 312, the maintenance mode ends and the operation mode transitions to the test card insertion mode. However, the maintenance mode does not end until all the launched game balls are discharged from the game board surface. The fact that all of the launched game balls are discharged from the game board surface is confirmed based on the fact that the number of in-game balls counted is “0” as described above.

  In the maintenance mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed with the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode transitions to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, the gaming machine clears game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations (number of symbol determinations). In addition, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of game balls received by the card unit 3 when the test card is inserted is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When maintenance is performed at a gaming machine manufacturer, a device simulating the card unit 3 is used in place of the card unit 3 to analyze and repair the failure point of the gaming machine, and the operation after the analysis and repair Verification is performed in test mode.

  The test hit mode (mode 4) is used to check the shipment at the time of game machine manufacture at the game machine manufacturer, the operation check at the time of game machine installation in the hall, the display of the number of balls such as safe / out, and the base check at the time of gauge adjustment. This is an operation mode when the game machine is operated and a game ball is tried. In the trial hit mode, functions related to general gaming machines and a game history data collection function that are enabled in the operation mode are not enabled.

  When transitioning to the test hit mode, the main control board 16 temporarily saves variables related to the payout rate, such as the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function, in the save area provided in the RAM and returns to the operation mode. Then, the saved variable is returned to the original state, and the state of the gaming machine is restored.

  Further, in the test hit mode, it is possible to shift to another operation mode in accordance with an operation on the card unit 3.

  In the test hit mode, the gaming machine can be operated by lending a ball from the test card. Also, the game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are not backed up.

In the trial hit mode, an operation button icon for selecting the trial hit mode is displayed on the display 312 of the card unit 3 as a mode setting operation unit.
In the test hit mode, when an operation for selecting the test hit mode is performed on the mode setting operation unit of the display 312, the test hit mode ends and the operation mode shifts to the test card insertion mode. However, the test hit mode does not end until all the launched game balls are discharged from the game board surface.

  When the test card is returned by the return button 322 in the card unit 3 in the test hit mode, the operation mode transitions to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is cleared by the gaming machine. In addition, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of game balls received by the card unit 3 when the test card is inserted is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  In the case of making a test hit at a gaming machine manufacturer, a test hit in the test hit mode is performed in the same manner as when the card unit 3 is used instead of the card unit 3 using a device simulating the card unit 3.

  The test mode (mode 5) is an operation mode for performing an operation check at the time of game machine manufacture at a game machine manufacturer and an operation check at the time of game machine installation in a hall. In the test mode, functions related to general gaming machines and game history data collection functions that are enabled in the operation mode are not enabled.

  In the test card insertion mode, operation button icons for selecting test modes such as “fire test”, “circulation test”, and “display test” are provided as mode setting operation units on the display 312 of the card unit 3. Is displayed. When any of the icons for selecting the test mode is selected, the operation mode transitions to the test mode.

  When transitioning to the test mode, the main control board 16 temporarily evacuates variables related to the payout rate, such as a probability variation function and a variation time shortening function, in the evacuation area provided in the RAM and returns to the operation mode. Then, the saved variable is returned to the original state, and the state of the gaming machine is restored.

  Further, in the test mode, it is possible to transition to another operation mode in accordance with the operation on the card unit 3.

  In the launch test in the test mode, the game ball launching mechanism alone is operated. In the circulation test in the test mode, the game ball circulation mechanism is operated by operating the hitting operation handle 25 by ball lending from the test card. In the display test in the test mode, various data are displayed on the display unit 54.

  In the test mode, a test end icon is displayed on the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 as an operation button icon for selecting the test end. When the test end icon is operated on the display 312 in the test mode, the test mode ends and the operation mode shifts to the test card insertion mode. However, in the circulation test, the test mode does not end until all the game balls that have been fired are ejected from the game board surface.

  In the test mode, when the return operation of the test card is performed with the return button 322 in the card unit 3, the operation mode transitions to the operation mode. When transitioning to the operation mode, game history data such as the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations is cleared by the gaming machine. In addition, when transitioning to the operation mode, information such as the number of game balls received by the card unit 3 when the test card is inserted is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17.

  When testing at a gaming machine manufacturer, instead of the card unit 3, an apparatus that simulates the card unit 3 is used and an operation test in the test mode is performed in the same manner as when the card unit 3 is used. .

  Next, a communication sequence between the card unit 3 and an LSI (including a payout control unit) 799, a communication sequence between the LSI (including a payout control unit) 799 and the main control board 16, and an LSI (including a payout control unit) ) A typical example of a communication sequence between 799 and the display effect control board 53 will be described.

  FIG. 129 and FIG. 130 are diagrams showing representative examples of communication sequences between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17. 131 and 132 are diagrams showing a typical example of a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16. 133 to 136 are diagrams showing representative examples of a communication sequence between SI799 and the display effect control board 53. FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a display example on the display unit 54. In the present embodiment, the steps indicated by broken lines indicate the control contents of the modification.

  FIG. 129 and FIG. 133 show communication sequences executed between the card unit 3 and the payout control unit 17 and between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 based on card insertion. ing.

  Referring to FIG. 129, in card unit 3, when a card is inserted, information such as a card balance and a card ID recorded on the inserted card is read by card reader / writer 327. Then, the operation number as shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122 (D) is sent from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as a sequence number, card holding ON (general card holding, member card holding), and Data including addition display (during prepaid lending display, replay lending display) OFF when the card insertion process is ON is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the sequence number that has been added and updated is sent to the card unit 3 as an operation response as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. Sent.

  133, with reference to FIG. 133, payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction is in a state of inquiring card information, and from payout control unit 17 to display effect control board 53, FIG. 125 and FIG. As a gaming machine information notification as shown in (B), data including a card insertion processing display ON is transmitted. Referring to FIG. 133, on display effect control board 53, when a card is not inserted, a waiting-for-customer animation is displayed on display 54, and when such a game machine information notification is received, Control is performed to switch the display of 54 to the communication animation display during communication (animation display indicating that communication with the card unit 3 is being performed).

  Referring to FIG. 129, when the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the dispensing control unit 17 as a card insertion request. In the card unit 3, a process for inquiring the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801 is performed.

  Upon receiving such a card insertion request from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17, and as shown in FIG. As an insertion request, data including the received card ID is transmitted to the display effect control board 53. In this way, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  Referring to FIG. 133, display effect control board 53 that has received the card insertion request determines the card ID of the membership card, general card, or test card inserted into card unit 3 based on the received card ID. , And store (save) it in the card ID storage unit of the display effect control board 53.

  Then, the display effect control board 53 determines whether or not the received card ID matches the card ID stored last time. If the card ID matches, the future game result is stored in the personal game history stored in the previous time. Performs processing that is used in combination with data. On the other hand, if they do not match, the personal game history data stored last time is cleared, and the future game results are used as new personal game history data.

  As described above, the game history data is accumulated and stored in association with the card ID in the display effect control board 53, but the payout control unit 17 also has a game in the LSI 799 separately from the display effect control board 53. A history data storage unit may be provided, and the game history data may be accumulated and stored in association with the card ID in the game history data storage unit. Specifically, when the payout control unit 17 stores the card ID received from the card unit 3, the game history data aggregated by the game history data management unit 291 provided in the payout control unit 17 is used as the card ID. The game history data storage unit may be stored in association with the game history data. When such a configuration is adopted, as shown by a broken line in FIG. 133, the payout control unit 17 also obtains and stores the card ID and receives the received card as in the display effect control board 53. It is determined whether or not the ID matches the card ID stored last time. If the ID matches, a process of using the future game result in combination with the personal game history data stored last time is performed. On the other hand, if they do not match, the personal game history data stored last time is cleared, and the future game results are used as new personal game history data.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  When the card unit 3 receives the card insertion response and the inquiry result that the card ID is normal is obtained, the operation number is the sequence number, card holding ON, card insertion processing OFF, addition display ON, data including addition request balls, and card balance are transmitted to the payout control unit 17, and sequence number data and game ball (addition request balls) data in the transmission data are stored in the backup recording area. To do. In such a state, the card unit 3 performs a control for displaying on the display 312 that a game ball is being added indicating that a game ball is being added.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, according to the received data, the gaming machine includes game ball number related information, card balance, card insertion processing display OFF, and addition display ON. The information notification is transmitted to the display effect control board 53. In the display effect control board 53, when such a gaming machine information notification is received, the display 54 is controlled to switch the display to the animation display during addition (animation display indicating that addition is in progress).

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction transmits data including a sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Thereafter, the addition display ends in the card unit 3, and as the operation instruction, data including a sequence number, ON during card holding, OFF during card insertion processing, OFF during addition display, the number of balls required for addition, and a card balance are paid out. Transmit to the control unit 17.

  Upon receiving such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 transmits a gaming machine information notification including OFF during addition display to the display effect control board 53 according to the received data. In the display effect control board 53, when such a gaming machine information notification is received, the display 54 performs control to end the adding animation display.

  Further, the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction transmits data including a sequence number and the number of game balls to the card unit 3 as an operation response that is a response to the operation instruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, a communication sequence when the operation mode shifts from the operation mode to the test card insertion mode will be described.

  Referring to FIG. 130, in card unit 3, when a test card is inserted, information such as a card ID recorded on the inserted card is read by card reader / writer 327. Then, the operation number as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122 (D) is sent from the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 17 as a sequence number, card holding ON (test card holding), and card insertion processing ON. Data containing is sent.

  In the payout control unit 17 that has received such an operation instruction, data including the sequence number that has been added and updated is sent to the card unit 3 as an operation response as shown in FIG. 123 and FIG. Sent.

  When the reading of the card information is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including the read card ID to the dispensing control unit 17 as a card insertion request. In the card unit 3, a process for inquiring the normality of the read card ID to the upper server 801 is performed.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request from the card unit 3 stores (holds) the received card ID in the card ID storage unit of the payout control unit 17 and receives the received card as a card insertion request. Data including the ID is transmitted to the display effect control board 53. In this way, the card ID of the inserted card is notified.

  The payout control unit 17 that has received such a card insertion request transmits a card insertion response as a response to the card insertion request to the card unit 3.

  In the card unit 3, when the card insertion response is received and the inquiry result that the card ID is normal is obtained, the data including the test card insertion mode preparation designation ON of the operation mode switching preparation designation is provided as the operation instruction. This is transmitted to the payout control unit 17.

  Upon receiving such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the payout control unit 17 inserts a test card specifying operation mode switching preparation into each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53 according to the received data. Data including mode preparation designation ON is transmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 131, payout control unit 17 switches the operation mode as a base state inquiry request to main control board 16 according to data including test card insertion mode preparation designation ON received from card unit 3. Data including preparation-designated test card insertion mode preparation designation ON is transmitted. The main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request.

  As shown in FIG. 131, until the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, the test card insertion of the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response as shown in FIG. Data including a test card insertion mode transition rejection ON similar to the mode transition rejection is transmitted. On the other hand, when the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, data including test card insertion mode transition rejection OFF is transmitted. As a result, when the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not established, the game machine completes preparation for shifting to the test card insertion mode.

  In the payout control unit 17, when such a table state inquiry response is received from the main control board 16, control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed according to the received data. Referring to FIG. 130, payout control unit 17 waits until all game balls are ejected from the game board surface, and is a response to the operation instruction of test card insertion mode preparation designation ON. As a response, data including test card insertion mode transition permission / denial OFF is transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, it is notified that the operation mode switching preparation of the entire gaming machine is completed.

  When preparations for switching the operation mode of the entire gaming machine are completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including a test card insertion mode switching specification ON for specifying the operation mode switching to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, a test card insertion mode in which operation mode switching is designated on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53 according to the received data. Data including switching designation ON is transmitted.

  Referring to FIG. 131, payout control unit 17 designates operation mode switching as a table status inquiry request to main control board 16 according to data including test card insertion mode switching designation received from card unit 3. The data including the test card insertion mode switching designation ON is transmitted. The main control board 16 that has received such a stand status inquiry request temporarily evacuates variables related to the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function in a evacuation area provided in the RAM. Further, on the main control board 16, game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the change of the operation mode is performed by completing the change of the symbols and the big hit gaming state and performing the switching operation of the processing such as temporarily saving the data and clearing the game history data. It is.

  The main control board 16 waits until the switching of the operation mode is completed, and displays the result of the operation mode switching included in the operation response as shown in FIG. 124E as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request. Data including a test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the test card insertion mode transition ON is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives a table state inquiry response including such a test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, it responds to the operation instruction of the test card insertion mode switching ON according to the received data. As a certain operation response, the test mode insertion result transition ON of the operation mode switching result and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the test card insertion mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the test card insertion mode.

  Next, a communication sequence when shifting from the test card insertion mode to the operation mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the return button 322 is operated in the card unit 3 in the test card insertion mode, the operation mode preparation designation ON of the operation mode switching preparation designation as shown in FIG. Contains data is sent.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the operation mode preparation for specifying the operation mode switching preparation is performed on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53 according to the received data. Data including specified ON is transmitted.

  In the dispensing control unit 17, a test card insertion mode preparation designation for operation mode switching preparation designation is made as a stand status inquiry request in accordance with data including an operation mode preparation designation ON received from the card unit 3 with respect to the main control board 16. Send data including ON. The main control board 16 that has received such a table state inquiry request transmits the following data to the payout control unit 17 as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request.

  In the main control board 16, until the condition that the design is not changing and the big hit is not established, the operation mode switching preparation result included in the operation response as shown in FIG. The data including the operation mode transition rejection ON similar to the above is transmitted. On the other hand, if the condition that the symbol is not changing and the big hit is not satisfied, data including the operation mode transition rejection OFF is transmitted.

  In the payout control unit 17, when a table state inquiry response including such an operation mode transition rejection OFF is received from the main control board 16, control for stopping the launch of the game ball is performed according to the received data. The payout control unit 17 waits until all game balls are discharged from the game board surface, and the operation response that is a response to the operation instruction of the operation mode preparation designation ON is data including operation mode transition permission OFF Is transmitted to the card unit 3.

  When the operation mode switching preparation is completed, the card unit 3 transmits data including an operation mode switching designation ON, which is designated as an operation mode switching, to the payout control unit 17 as an operation instruction.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives such an operation instruction from the card unit 3, the operation mode switching designation of the operation mode switching designation is performed on each of the main control board 16 and the display effect control board 53 according to the received data. Send data including ON.

  In the payout control unit 17, the data including the operation mode switching designation ON of the operation mode switching designation as the stand status inquiry request according to the data including the operation mode switching designation received from the card unit 3 with respect to the main control board 16. Is transmitted to the main control board 16. In the main control board 16 that has received such a stand status inquiry request, the variables related to the payout rate such as the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function temporarily retracted in the retreat area are returned to the original state, and the game Restore the machine status. Further, on the main control board 16, game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of big hits and the number of symbol rotations are cleared. In the main control board 16, the change of the operation mode is performed by completing the change of the symbols and the big hit gaming state and performing the switching operation of the processing such as temporarily saving the data and clearing the game history data. It is.

  The main control board 16 waits until the switching of the operation mode is completed, and displays the result of the operation mode switching included in the operation response as shown in FIG. 124E as a table state inquiry response that is a response to the table state inquiry request. Data including a test card insertion mode transition ON similar to the test card insertion mode transition ON is transmitted to the dispensing control unit 17.

  When the payout control unit 17 receives a base state inquiry response including such a test card insertion mode transition ON from the main control board 16, an operation that is a response to the operation instruction of the operation mode switching designation ON according to the received data. As a response, the operation mode switching result of the operation mode switching ON and data including the number of game balls are transmitted to the card unit 3. Thereby, the transition of the operation mode to the operation mode is completed in the entire gaming machine, and the card unit 3 is notified that the operation mode switching is completed.

  In the card unit 3, when such an operation response is received from the payout control unit 17, the operation mode of the card unit 3 also shifts to the operation mode.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 at the time of an addition request will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the card unit 3, when a prepaid lending operation by the operation of the lending button 321 or a replay lending operation by the operation of the replay button 319 is performed, a game ball addition factor occurs, and a game ball owned by the player is added. Is done. In those cases, information related to the number of game balls including the number of balls requested for addition shown in the operation instruction of FIG. 121D, CU state (data being displayed during prepaid lending display or replay lending display (in addition display) Is ON), and data such as a card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout controller 17 as an operation instruction. In this way, the card unit 3 transmits to the payout control unit 17 an operation instruction including data specifying the addition factor (during prepaid lending display and replay lending display).

  When the addition based on the prepaid lending operation or the replay lending operation is performed, an image during addition display as shown in FIG. 83 is displayed on the display 312 of the card unit 3.

  When a game ball addition factor occurs, the payout control unit 17 determines the total number of game balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification of FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 based on the data received from the card unit 3. Related to the number of game balls, including CU status (data for prepaid lending display or replay lending display (additional display) is ON), and data such as card balance as a gaming machine information notification from the payout controller 17 for display It is transmitted to the effect control board 53. Thus, the game machine information notification including the data (prepaid lending display, replay lending display) specifying the addition factor is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53.

  In the display control board 53, when the gaming machine information notification is received, whether the game ball addition factor corresponds to prepaid lending or replay lending based on the data specifying the addition factor. judge.

  Then, in the display effect control board 53, based on the determination result of the game ball addition factor, when the game ball addition factor is prepaid lending, the display 54 displays (A1) to (A3) in FIG. Display control for displaying prepaid rental animation as shown. The prepaid lending animation display changes from the display before prepaid lending as shown in FIG. 137 (A1) to the prepaid lending display as shown in (A2) of FIG. 137, and then the prepaid as shown in (A3) of FIG. 137. It becomes the display after lending. In the prepaid lending display, the card balance ("Balance" in the figure) is gradually converted to the value of the holding ball ("Holding" in the figure). Made. When such animation display ends, the display after prepaid lending as shown in FIG. 137 (A3) is obtained. As described above, in the prepaid lending animation display, the value of the card balance is changed to display that the number of possessed balls is increased, thereby specifying that the addition factor is prepaid lending.

  Further, in the display effect control board 53, when the game ball addition factor is replay lending based on the determination result of the game ball addition factor, the display unit 54 displays (B1) to (B3) in FIG. The display control to display the replay rental animation as shown in FIG. The replay lending animation display changes from the display before replay lending as shown in (B1) of FIG. 137 to the display during replay lending as shown in (B2) of FIG. 137, and thereafter, as shown in (B3) of FIG. 137. It will be displayed after replay lending. In the replay lending display, the value of the card balance (“balance” in the figure) is not changed, and an animation display is performed in which the number of possessed balls (“held ball” in the figure) gradually increases. When such animation display ends, the display after replay lending as shown in (B3) of FIG. 137 is obtained. In this way, in the replay lending animation display, it is specified that the addition factor is replay lending by displaying that the number of possessed balls increases without changing the value of the card balance.

  When the image display during addition display on the card unit 3 ends, the data (in addition display) during prepaid lending display or replay lending display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, the prepaid lending display or replay lending display data (additional display) included in the CU state in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 is turned OFF. The display effect control board 53 performs control to end the addition animation display when the data of the prepaid lending display or the replay lending display is turned OFF in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 at the time of the subtraction request will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the card unit 3, if a holding ball splitting operation by specifying operation of holding ball sharing (holding ball splitting) or a wagon order operation by specifying operation of wagon order is performed, a game ball subtraction factor occurs and the player owns The game balls of are subtracted. In these cases, the game ball number related information including the number of balls to be subtracted indicated in the operation instruction of FIG. 121D, the CU state (data in the split ball display or wagon service display (subtraction display) Is ON), and data such as a card balance is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the payout controller 17 as an operation instruction. In this manner, the card unit 3 transmits an operation instruction including data specifying the subtraction factor (during the splitting of the ball or displaying the wagon service) to the payout control unit 17.

  For example, when a wagon order operation is performed, an image during subtraction display such as an image showing subtraction of the wagon service display shown in FIGS. 94 to 100 is displayed on the display 312 of the card unit 3. In addition, when the holding ball splitting operation is performed, the display unit 312 of the card unit 3 displays an image during subtraction display such as an image indicating subtraction due to the splitting of the holding ball.

  When a game ball subtraction factor occurs, the payout control unit 17, based on the data received from the card unit 3, the total number of game balls shown in the gaming machine information notification of FIG. 125 and FIG. Information related to the number of game balls including the CU status (data for splitting the holding ball display or wagon service display (subtraction display) is ON), and data such as card balance as a game machine information notification for the display unit It is transmitted to the effect control board 53. In this manner, the game machine information notification including the data specifying the subtraction factor (the holding ball split display or the wagon service display) is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53.

  In the display effect control board 53, when the gaming machine information notification is received, based on the data specifying the subtraction factor, the game ball subtraction factor corresponds to the holding ball division or the wagon order. judge.

  On the display effect control board 53, when the game ball subtraction factor is the split ball based on the determination result of the game ball subtraction factor, the display 54 gradually increases the value of the ball to the split ball. It will be converted into a numerical value of, and an animation will be displayed in which the number of holding balls decreases. On the other hand, on the display effect control board 53, when the game ball subtraction factor is the wagon order based on the determination result of the game ball subtraction factor, the number of holding balls is gradually increased to the wagon order on the display unit 54. It will be converted into a numerical value of, and an animation will be displayed in which the number of holding balls decreases. Such a display in which the number of holding balls decreases based on the subtraction factor is called a subtraction animation display. Thus, the subtraction factor is specified in the subtraction animation display.

  When the image display during the subtraction display on the card unit 3 is completed, the data (in the subtraction display) during the ball split display or the wagon service display included in the CU state in the operation instruction transmitted to the payout control unit 17 is turned OFF. Accordingly, in the gaming machine information notification transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53, the data of the ball split display or wagon service display included in the CU state (additional display) is turned OFF. The display effect control board 53 performs control to end the subtraction animation display when the data of the holding ball division display or the wagon service display (subtraction display) is turned OFF in the gaming machine information notification.

  Next, a communication sequence between the payout control unit 17 and the display effect control board 53 during the game will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming state until the big hit is generated in the card unit 3, the display control control board 53 performs display control for displaying an in-game animation on the display 54, which is an animation displayed during the game. It is. Then, when a big hit occurs, the big hit similar to ON in the big hits 1 to 4 included in the game information notification as shown in FIG. 126 (B) as a base state inquiry response from the game control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 Data including medium ON is transmitted.

  When receiving such a table status inquiry response including ON during jackpot, the payout control unit 17 includes a game ball including the total number of game balls indicated in the gaming machine information notification of FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 (B). Number-related information, data including the big hit (including one of the big hits 1 to 4) ON, and data including the big hit end display OFF are transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53 as a gaming machine information notification. In this way, a gaming machine information notification including data specifying the gaming state is transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the display effect control board 53.

  In the display effect control board 53, when the game machine information notification including ON during the big hit is received, the display control for displaying the big hit during the big hit game is displayed on the display 54 during the big hit game. Is done.

  Then, before the big hit game state is ended, the big hit end display included in the game information notification as shown in FIG. 126 (B) is sent from the game control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 as a base state inquiry response. The data including ON during the big hit end display similar to ON is transmitted.

  When receiving the table status inquiry response including ON during the jackpot end display, the payout control unit 17 turns ON the jackpot end display data included in the gaming machine information notification of FIG. 125 and FIG. 126 (B). (The data during the big hit continues with ON).

  In the display effect control board 53, when the game machine information notification including the big hit end ON and the big hit end display ON is received, the display unit 54 ends the big hit middle animation display and displays an animation displayed at the end of the big hit. Display control for displaying a big jackpot end animation is performed.

  Then, when the big hit game state is ended, the big hit during the big hit included in the game information notification as shown in FIG. 126 (B) and the big hit end as a table state inquiry response from the game control board 16 to the payout control unit 17 Data including OFF during display is transmitted.

  When receiving the table state inquiry response including such a big hit during OFF and a big hit end display OFF, the payout control unit 17 is in the big hit during the game machine information notification of (B) in FIG. 125 and FIG. 126. Data and big hit end display data are turned OFF.

  When the display effect display control board 53 receives the gaming machine information notification including the big hit end OFF and the big hit end display OFF, the display 54 displays the display for terminating the big hit end animation display and displaying the in-game animation display. Control is performed.

  Next, management of security related information in the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3 will be described.

  The security related information includes, for example, authentication operation designation information including setting information such as at least a base abnormality detection setting value, a gaming machine test hit mode setting value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. As described above, the security-related information includes predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Further, such security related information includes numerical data indicating the version number of information for the entire security related information. Data indicating the version number of such information is updated (for example, addition update of numerical data of the version number) when any of the security-related information as described above is changed. It should be noted that the version number data of such information is not limited to the case where the security related information is set as a whole, but authentication including a base abnormality detection setting value, a gaming machine test hit mode setting value, and a subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value. Each data of the operation designation information may be individually set and updated. Such security related information is stored in a security related information storage unit provided in each of the upper server 801 and the CU 3.

  In such security-related information, standard setting information is preset as default data (data of “initial values” of various information described later), and a predetermined input operation such as a keyboard provided in the upper server 801 is performed. In the means, it is possible to change (update) the data by manually inputting the data by the manager of the game hall. Therefore, when no change operation is performed on the security-related information in the upper server 801, the security-related information is set to “initial value” data. When manually inputting security-related information in the host server 801, for example, each gaming machine in the game hall may be manually entered for each gaming machine, or a unified threshold value may be input and set for each model. Is possible. The host server 801 may acquire and use security related information as follows. If the model information of the gaming machine and the setting information of the security related information are associated in advance, that is, if the model information and the setting information of the security related information are in one-to-one correspondence, the setting information is input The model information is downloaded to the upper server 801 from an upper server than the upper server 801 to be set, and the downloaded model information is stored in the upper server 801 so that the model information is one-to-one corresponding to the security. The upper server 801 may select and store the related information, and the security related information may be used. Further, such security-related information can be automatically changed (updated) to predetermined data at a preset timing (for example, a regular timing) without manual input. You may do it.

  The base abnormality detection set value is data for setting the presence / absence of base abnormality detection and its constant (threshold value) when the CU 3 detects a base abnormality state. The base abnormality detection setting value includes a low base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a low base state and a high base threshold value used as a base abnormality detection setting value in a high base state.

  The low base time threshold value is in the range of 0 to 100%, and the initial value is 30%. Such a low base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and indicates “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the low base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set low base time threshold is performed, and when the low base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the low base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  As for the high base time threshold, the set value is in the range of 0 to 150%, and the initial value is 120%. Such a high base time threshold indicates “not detected” when set to 0%, and “detected” when set to a value other than 0%. Thus, when the high base time threshold is other than 0%, the base abnormality detection using the set high base time threshold is performed, and when the high base time threshold is 0%, the base abnormality using the high base time threshold is performed. No detection is performed.

  The gaming machine trial hit mode setting value is data for setting the presence or absence of a trial hit mode such as adjustment of a gaming machine nail. In the gaming machine test hit mode setting value, “test hit mode present” or “no test hit mode” is indicated, and the initial value is “no test hit mode”.

  The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the presence / absence of an abnormal state detection and the constant (threshold value) of the subtraction ball number (the number of balls subtracted from the game ball number based on the firing detection signal) in CU3. It is. The abnormal state of the subtraction balls set here is detected based on the fact that there is a game ball winning in succession for the set number of balls, even though no game balls are fired. The threshold value of the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is data for setting the number of winning balls that have been continuously awarded and determined to be an abnormal state of the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value has a setting value in the range of 0 to 99 balls and an initial value of 5 balls. Such a subtractive ball abnormality detection setting value indicates “not detected” when set to 0 balls, and indicates “detected” when set to other than 0 balls. Thereby, when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is other than 0 balls, the subtraction ball abnormality detection is performed using the set subtraction ball threshold value, and when the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value is 0, the subtraction ball abnormality is detected. No detection is performed.

  Such security related information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU 3 at a predetermined timing such as when communication between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is established (communication connection establishment) and when a setting value of the security related information is changed. . However, the version number of the security-related information is managed by both the upper server 801 and the CU3. When the CU 3 holds (stores) information of the same version number as that of the upper server 801 at the predetermined timing, the security related information is not transmitted.

  Next, a specific example of security related information processing for managing security related information in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart illustrating processing related to security-related information in the upper server 801 and the CU3. In FIG. 138, (A) shows security related information management processing as processing executed on the upper server 801 side, and (B) shows security related information processing as processing executed on the CU3 side (main control unit 323). An information setting process is shown.

  Referring to FIG. 138 (A), in the upper server 801, when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts (for example, it is necessary until the setting change of the security related information is completed by S713 described later) It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined short period after the start of communication establishment (such as a time obtained by adding a predetermined margin to a standard time) (S701). In this case, when the establishment state of the communication connection is started, the host server 801 is always in an operating state, the CU 3 is turned on before the start of business hours, and the power is turned off after the end of the business hours. This means the time when the establishment state of the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 starts due to the input. When it is in the communication connection establishment start state, the process proceeds to S703 to be described later.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the communication connection establishment start state, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting is changed in the online state (S702). When the security related information setting is changed, for example, the setting of any one of the base abnormality detection setting value, the gaming machine trial hit mode setting value, and the subtraction ball abnormality detection setting value as described above is performed manually (for example, This is a time when the security related information management process is executed after the change by manual change by the operation input of the staff. Specifically, a predetermined change flag is set when the security-related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online, and when such a change flag is set in S702. It is determined that the security related information setting is being changed. Further, such a change flag is reset when it is confirmed that the setting of security related information has been changed in the CU 3 in response to the setting change of security related information in the upper server 801. Further, such a change flag is not set when the security related information setting is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. This is because, when the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, even if the setting of the security related information is changed in the upper server 801, the security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. This is because the security-related information after the change can be transmitted to the CU 3 by proceeding from S701 to the processing after S703 described later at the start of the established state of the communication connection when the power is turned on.

  In the upper server 801, the security related information setting is changed when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting the security related information is offline and when the communication state with the CU3 that is the target of setting of the security related information is the online state. It is possible to execute in both cases. However, when the communication state between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 is an online state, the security-related information after the setting change can be immediately transmitted to the CU 3. However, when the communication state is an offline state, The security related information after the change cannot be immediately transmitted to the CU3. In this embodiment, in S702, it is determined whether or not the security-related information setting has been changed when the communication state with the CU 3 that is the setting target of the security-related information is an online state.

  When the setting of security related information is changed while the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are offline, the change flag is set and held. After the next power-on of the CU 3, the S701 is bypassed and the security is performed by the S702. It is determined that the related information setting has been changed (if the change flag is set, it is determined that the security related information setting has been changed) and is the same as when the security related information is immediately changed in the online state. By performing the process, the security related information after the change may be transmitted to the CU 3 after the next power-on of the CU 3. Further, in the upper server 801, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is online. Further, the setting change of the security related information may be executed only when the communication state with the CU 3 for which the security related information is set is offline.

  The setting change of the security related information may be changed by the following method other than the change by the manual operation input as described above. Automatic setting change in which the upper server 801 sets data corresponding to the model of the P unit 2 to which the CU 3 is connected based on the received gaming machine information from among a plurality of setting data stored by itself. May be performed. Further, the upper server 801 is connected to the CU 3 by performing data communication with an external server (for example, a server provided at a gaming machine manufacturer) provided outside the game room based on the received gaming machine information. Setting data corresponding to the P machine model may be downloaded, and automatic setting change may be performed based on the setting data.

  If it is determined in S702 that the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S702 that the security-related information setting is being changed, the process proceeds to S703. On the other hand, when it is determined in S702 that it is not time to change the setting of security-related information, that is, when it is offline or when the setting of security-related information has not been changed, the conditions of S702 are not met. Since it is not necessary to transmit data related to the setting change of the security related information to the CU 3, the process is terminated.

  In S703, it is determined whether or not a security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted (S703). Here, the security-related information version number request command is a command for requesting a response of the security-related information version number data stored in the CU 3. Specifically, in S703, it is determined whether the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet in the state where it is determined that the transmission timing of security-related information is determined in S701 or S702. Whether or not a security-related information version number request command has been transmitted is determined based on whether or not a later-described version number requested flag is set.

  When it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted, a process for transmitting the security-related information version number request command to the CU3 is performed (S704), and the process ends. When a security-related information version number request command is transmitted in S704, the above-described version number requested flag is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has not been transmitted yet, it is determined whether or not it is the time when the security-related information version number response is received from the CU3 (S705). Here, the security-related information version number response is a response in which the CU3 returns the version number data of the security-related information stored in the CU3. Specifically, in S705, after it is determined in S703 that the security-related information version number request command has already been transmitted, it is determined whether it is the timing when the security-related information version number response from the CU3 is received. It is.

  If it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version number response has not been received, the process proceeds to S709 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in S705 that the security-related information version response has been received, the version specified by the received security-related information version response and the version stored and managed by the upper server 801 The number is compared (checked) to determine whether or not they match (S706). In the upper server 801, when the security-related information as described above is changed, data indicating the version number is updated. On the other hand, when the security-related information is received from the upper server 801, the CU 3 stores and manages the version number data included in the information as updated version number data.

  If it is determined in S706 that the version numbers match, the security-related information stored in CU3 is appropriate information, and it is not necessary to newly send security-related information to CU3. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S706 that the version numbers do not match, the security-related information stored in CU3 is inappropriate information, and the security-related information stored in CU3 is stored in the upper server 801. Since it is necessary to change (update) the latest information stored and held, a process for transmitting the latest security-related information to the CU 3 is performed (S707), and the process ends.

  As described above, when the security-related information version numbers do not match in S707, when the security-related information is changed in the upper server 801 when the power of the CU3 is turned on, the power of the CU3 is turned off. When security-related information is changed in the upper server 801, when a CU-side device is replaced, such as when the CU3 is turned off, or when the power of the CU3 is turned on, a communication failure occurs. Included when incorrect security-related information is stored in CU3, and when security-related information stored in CU3 changes to inappropriate information due to noise or the like when CU3 is powered on Yes. Here, when at least one of the CU 3 and the P stand 2 is exchanged, the version number is different between the security related information stored in the CU 3 before the exchange and the security related information stored in the CU 3 after the exchange. There is a case. Therefore, even when such a device replacement is performed, the version numbers of the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU 3 may not match, so the upper server 801 and the CU 3 store them. It is necessary to match the security related information.

  Next, timing of the response waiting time is started (S708). Here, the response waiting time is a time from when security-related information is transmitted until a response (security-related information setting response described later) received from the CU 3 is received in response to the transmission of the information. It is timed by software timer processing, and when a predetermined time elapses, it times out.

  For example, when the response waiting time is timed out, when the CU 3 is operating normally and the communication state between the CU 3 and the upper server 801 is normal, the security related information setting response is received from the time when the security related information is transmitted. The standard time required until the time is set to a time that allows for a predetermined margin. That is, the predetermined time for the response waiting time to time out is set to a time that allows the CU 3 to operate normally and accepts that the communication state between the CU 3 and the upper server 801 is normal.

  In S709, it is determined whether the response waiting time has not timed out and is in a response waiting state as a state of waiting for reception of a security related information setting response from the CU 3 (S709). When not waiting for a response, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when the response is waiting, it is determined whether or not a security related information setting response from the CU 3 has been received (S710).

  When it is determined in S710 that a security related information setting response has been received, the response waiting state is terminated (S713), and the process is terminated. In this case, the response waiting time measurement ends in S713. On the other hand, when it is determined in S710 that the security-related information setting response has not been received, it is determined whether or not the response waiting time for which timing has been started in S708 has timed out after a predetermined time has elapsed (S711). . If it is determined in S711 that the timeout has not occurred, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S711 that a timeout has occurred, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in information communication, and processing for blocking communication between the upper server 801 and CU3 is performed (S712), and a response is awaited in S713. Exit state. When S713 is executed, the aforementioned version number requested flag is reset.

  Note that the process of confirming the version number of the security-related information as described above and transmitting the security-related information to the CU 3 when there is a discrepancy is a regular timing in addition to the timing determined in S701 and S702 as described above. Such as a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, a predetermined period after the transition from the high base state to the low base state, and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered. As described above, it may be executed at the timing when the gaming state is changed, or may be always executed.

  Further, the above-described S701 determines whether or not the communication connection to the network in the game arcade is established when the upper server 801 is turned on, and the process proceeds to S703 when the establishment is established. Thereafter, it may be determined whether or not the setting of security related information has been changed in S702. In that case, when the setting of the security related information is changed, the above-described change flag is set when the setting of the security related information is changed regardless of whether the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are online. When the change flag is set, the process may proceed from S702 to S703.

  When the upper server 801 and the CU 3 are always in the power-on state and are always on, the communication connection between the upper server 801 and the CU 3 except when an abnormal state such as a power failure occurs. Is always established, and whenever the security-related information is changed and set in the upper server 801, the process always proceeds from S702 to S703.

  Next, referring to FIG. 138 (B), in CU3, in the security-related information setting process, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive a security-related information version number request command from the upper server 801 (S751). . If it is determined in S751 that the security related information version number request command is not received, the process proceeds to S754 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in S751 that the security related information version number request command is received, the security related information version number data stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3 is confirmed (S752). A process for transmitting a security related information setting response as a response for specifying the version number data to the upper server 801 is performed (S753), and the process ends.

  In S754, it is determined whether or not it is time to receive the security related information transmitted from the upper server 801 in S707 described above (S754). If it is determined that the security related information is not received, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the security related information is being received, the received security related information is stored (updated) in the security related information storage unit in the CU 3 (S755). Thereby, the security-related information transmitted from the upper server 801 is stored and held in the CU3. Then, a security related information setting response is transmitted to the upper server 801 as a response to the upper server 801 in response to storing the security related information (S755).

  In order to determine whether or not the security-related information stored in the upper server 801 and the CU3 is different, whether or not the version numbers match when the security-related information version data is transmitted from the CU3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value data of the security-related information may be received from the CU 3 to compare whether the setting value data matches. In this way, when the CU 3 is replaced, the CU 3 is connected to the P unit 2 of a different model, and the setting value data of the security related information is different, but the version number data of the security related information happens to happen. When the version data of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 matches, it is possible to prevent the abnormality detection from being performed with an incorrect setting value.

  Next, a base monitoring process executed by the CU 3 (main control unit 323) in order to monitor the base based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU 3 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the base monitoring process executed by the CU3. The base monitoring process is executed in a state other than the big hit gaming state.

  In the base monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 has been received (S801). When it is determined that the game ball firing number information has been received, based on the received game ball firing number information, the number of fires counted by the firing information number counter is updated in CU3 (S802), and S803. Proceed to On the other hand, when it is determined that the shipment number information has not been received, the process proceeds to S803 without adding and updating the data of the number of shots. Thereby, in CU3, the number of discharges can be counted and managed.

  In S803, it is determined whether or not the game ball acquisition number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 is received (S803). When it is determined that the game ball acquisition number information has been received, the acquisition number data counted by the acquisition number counter in the CU 3 is added and updated based on the received game ball acquisition number information (S804). move on. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball acquired number information is not received, the process proceeds to S805 without adding and updating the acquired number data. Thereby, in CU3, the acquisition number can be counted and managed.

  In S805, it is determined whether or not a predetermined base calculation timing is reached (S805). In CU3, for example, in order to perform a process of calculating a base every time a predetermined time such as one minute elapses, the elapsed time is measured using a predetermined software timer after the card is inserted into CU3, and the timer is set to a predetermined time. Every time a time (for example, 1 minute) is timed out and timed out, it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing has come.

  If it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is not reached, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S805 that the base calculation timing is reached, a process of calculating the base is performed based on the number of fires counted in S802 and the number of acquisitions counted in S804 (S806). Specifically, in S806, the base is calculated by performing an arithmetic operation using an arithmetic expression such as “acquired number / launched number × 100” (%).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a low base state (S807). In S807, for example, the current gaming state is in the high base state based on the information indicating whether or not the high base is specified by the data of the “gaming table state 2” transmitted from the P table 2 and received. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When it is determined in S807 that the base state is not the high base state, that is, the base state is the low base state, the low base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value in the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in the CU3. It is set (S808), and the process proceeds to S810. On the other hand, when it is determined in S807 that the state is the high base state, the high base threshold is set as the base abnormality detection setting value among the security related information stored in the security related information storage unit in CU3 (S809), Proceed to S810.

  In S810, it is determined whether or not the base value calculated in S806 is greater than or equal to the base abnormality detection set value set in accordance with whether or not the high base state is set in S808 or S809. If it is determined in S810 that it is not equal to or greater than the base abnormality detection set value, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the base abnormality detection set value is equal to or greater than S810, an error notification for notifying the occurrence of the base abnormality for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the base is performed on the display 312 (S811). Then, the host server 801 is notified of the error information specifying the abnormal state (S812), and the process ends. As error notification, instead of or in addition to that executed by the indicator 312, the point of an abnormality notification lamp provided on the CU 3 (or blinking), or abnormality notification by sound from a speaker May be performed. Such display, light emission, and sound notification may be performed by a display, a lamp, and a speaker provided in the host server 801, or a display (for example, a display) provided in the P stand 2. It is also possible to use a lamp and a speaker.

  The error information notified in S812 includes occurrence date and time, error code (major classification data), error information (minor classification data), BB serial number, main control chip information (main chip ID), and payout control chip. Information (payout chip ID) is included. Here, the error code is information indicating a large classification error code when the error type is largely classified according to a predetermined classification standard. The error information is information indicating a small classification error code when the large classification error code is classified in detail according to a predetermined classification standard.

  Thus, when it is determined that the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the P unit 2 is inappropriate, error information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate is received from the CU 3. Since the data is transmitted to the upper server 801, the upper server 801 can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  As described above, the base calculation timing in S805 and the abnormality detection timing in S810 are low for a predetermined period after the transition from the low base state to the high base state, instead of the periodic timing as described above. It may be set to a timing when the gaming state changes, such as a predetermined period after the transition to the base state and a predetermined period when the big hit gaming state is entered, and the base monitoring process is executed. The base may be calculated at all times.

  The CU3 (main control unit 323) also executes a subtraction ball monitoring process for monitoring the subtraction balls based on the security-related information stored (held) in the CU3. In the subtraction ball monitoring process, the payout control unit 17 recognizes whether or not there is a fired ball based on the game ball fired number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 and determines that there is no fired ball. The winning ball detected based on the winning information transmitted from (start opening 1 to 3, large winning opening 1 and 2, winning winning 1 to 4) is recognized, and the winning ball is stored (held) in CU3. When it is determined that the number of winning balls related to the subtraction abnormality included in the security-related information is continuously won or more (for example, five balls), it is determined that an abnormality in the number of subtracting balls has occurred. Then, when it is determined that a subtraction ball abnormality has occurred, an error notification for specifying the abnormal state and an error notification are performed as in the case of the base abnormality described above.

  In addition to the base abnormality and the subtraction ball abnormality described above, the following security-related information is stored in each of the upper server 801 and the card unit (CU) 3, and the base abnormality and the subtraction ball abnormality as described above are stored. Similarly, setting value transmission processing and error monitoring processing may be executed.

  Judgment that determines that the number of possessed balls is abnormal when the difference between the number of retained balls stored in the CU 3 and the number of held balls stored in the P stand 2 exceeds a set value (for example, one ball). A numerical abnormality may be used as the security-related information.

  In the state where there is no winning count based on the information on the number of game balls acquired transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3, the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU3 (starting ports 1-3, large winning ports 1, 2) An addition ball abnormality that is determined to be an abnormality of the addition ball when a winning ball is detected based on the winning openings 1 to 4) may be used as the security-related information.

  Based on the game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3, a negative ball that is determined to be abnormal when the number of held balls stored in the CU 3 becomes a negative value. An abnormality may be used as the security related information.

  Based on the winning information transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 (starting ports 1 to 3, large winning ports 1 and 2, and winning ports 1 to 4), the number of winning balls per unit time has exceeded the set value. An abnormality in the number of winning balls per unit time that is sometimes determined to be abnormal may be managed as the security related information. In that case, as setting values, a first setting value for a big hit gaming state (for example, 50 balls / minute) and a second setting value for a non-hit gaming state (for example, 10 balls / minute) It can be managed separately.

  A difference in the number of balls that is determined to be abnormal when the difference between the number of shot balls and the number of balls to be collected transmitted from the payout control unit 17 to the CU 3 is equal to or greater than a set value may be used as the security-related information. .

  Corresponding to the probability of occurrence of jackpot, the start count is abnormal when the average start count for jackpot as the average start count required for one jackpot occurrence (variable display device fluctuation start count) falls below the set value. May be provided, and the abnormality determination value may be managed as security related information.

  As security related information, in addition to the above-described authentication operation designation information, authentication control information is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3, and such authentication control information is stored in both the upper server 801 and the CU3. You may make it manage. Here, the authentication control information is predetermined setting information including threshold data related to the various types of authentication described above, and whether or not the setting information is transmitted at the same timing as the authentication operation specifying information described above. As in the authentication operation designation information described above, the information may be transmitted only when the version number stored in the upper server 801 and the version number stored in the CU 3 do not match.

  Thus, as the security-related information, predetermined setting information including threshold data for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state is appropriate. Then, such setting information data is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and stored in both the upper server 801 and the CU3. In the CU3, the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation. Is used to determine whether or not is appropriate.

  As the base abnormality detection setting value, a low base time threshold value used in the low base state and a high base time threshold value used in the high base state are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a big hit time threshold value used in the big hit game state is provided and transmitted from the upper server 801 in the security related information, and used for abnormality detection in the same manner as the low base time threshold value and the high base time threshold value. Also good. In this case, the base may be calculated even during the big hit gaming state, and the calculated base may be compared with the big hit threshold value to detect the base abnormality during the big hit.

  Further, based on the C-ID (card ID) inserted into the CU 3 and the game information corresponding to the C-ID, a player having a high occurrence frequency of an abnormal state such as a base abnormality is identified, and the player Security-related information so that anomaly can be determined using special security-related information in which data such as threshold values that are different from those of other players (for example, threshold values that are easier to detect abnormal states) are set. By setting the data, the setting contents of the security related information may be varied according to the occurrence frequency of the abnormal state.

  As described above, the setting information related to the security related information such as the base abnormality detection setting value is transmitted from the upper server 801 to the CU3 and stored in the CU3. In the CU3, the base abnormality and the like are set based on the setting information. By monitoring the abnormality related to the security related information, the processing load of the higher level server 801 can be reduced compared to the case where the higher level server 801 monitors the abnormality related to the security related information. Furthermore, since the higher-level server 801 and the CU 3 share security-related information monitoring processing, it is possible to perform abnormality determination using a more detailed threshold. Even in such a case, the host server 801 only manages the setting value, and the CU 3 only makes an abnormality determination based on the transmitted setting value, so that it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing burden on both.

  Further, as described above, when the version number of the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the version number of the security related information stored in the CU 3 are compared (verified), the version numbers do not match. Since the security related information is transmitted, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game is continued while the stored security related information is set incorrectly. In addition, although the security related information stored in the upper server 801 and the security related information stored in the CU 3 match, there is no need to update the security related information stored in the CU 3. It is possible to prevent unnecessary communication of security related information. Note that security-related information must be sent without comparing the version number at a predetermined timing, such as when the communication connection establishment start state as described above and at the time of changing the setting value of security-related information are made. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the upper management server 801 is taken as an example of a game management apparatus that manages setting information such as threshold values of security related information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, the hall management computer 1 may manage setting information such as a threshold value of security related information.

  In addition, in the case of inputting threshold data of security related information in the upper server 801, instead of setting the data directly by inputting, for example, 10%, 20%, 30%. The management is divided into a plurality of stages (for example, setting 1, setting 2,...), And thresholds are associated with the setting stages (for example, setting 1: 10%, setting 2: 20%, setting 3:30). %)), For example, by inputting and setting setting stage information such as setting 1, setting 2, setting 3,..., Threshold value data is indirectly specified and stored in the upper server 801. May be.

  140 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 2, which is a modification of the one shown in FIG. Here, the circulation path of the sealed circulation pachinko balls will be mainly described.

  The game board holding frame 95 of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a rotation lever 100 for attaching the game board. By rotating the rotation lever 100, the game board 26 can be attached and detached. On the other hand, all winning balls won from a winning opening provided in the game area 27, a variable winning ball device, etc. are collected by the winning ball collecting cover member 144 and flow down the winning ball flow path 147. On the other hand, the out ball that has entered the out port 45 is received by the out ball flow path 702 and flows down the out ball flow path 702. An out ball detection switch 701 is provided in the out ball flow path 702, and a ball flowing down the out ball flow path 702 is detected.

  On the other hand, the foul balls are discharged from the foul ball return port 150 and then detected by the foul ball detection switch 33. Thereafter, the foul balls enter the out ball flow path 702. The pachinko balls that have flowed down the out ball flow path 702 are guided to the ball collection basket 189.

  The pachinko balls guided to the ball collection basket 89 are lifted by the lifting device 190. The lifting device 190 has a built-in lifting screw that is rotated by the transport motor 40, and the pachinko ball is lifted by rotating the lifting screw. The back of the lifting device 190 is provided with polishing members 200a and 200b (200b is not visible in the drawing) for polishing the pachinko balls by contacting with the pachinko balls being transported. While being done, the surface is polished.

  A ball raising switch (lower) 41b is provided on the ball inlet side (lower side) of the lifting device 190, and a ball raising switch (upper) 41a is provided on the ball discharge side (upper side). A pachinko ball to be transported is detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a and the ball raising switch (lower) 41b. The pachinko balls that have been lifted by the lifting device 190 and detected by the ball raising switch (upper) 41a are guided to the firing ball guiding path 153 and supplied from the driving ball outlet 49 to the ball feeding device (not shown). The ball feeding device has a function of feeding the next pachinko ball to the hitting ball launching position every time the player operates the hitting ball operating handle 25 to hit one pachinko ball. A pachinko ball fed by the ball feeding device is detected by a launch detection switch (not shown), and the launch detection signal is input to the payout controller 17 as will be described later.

  Further, game ball excess / deficiency detection switches 42a and 42b are provided in the middle of the circulation path of the pachinko balls (see FIG. 4) to detect whether or not the number of pachinko balls in the circulation path is a predetermined number (for example, 50). .

  FIG. 141 is a diagram showing another example of the back side configuration of the pachinko machine 2 shown in FIG. 140. Here, the differences will be mainly described.

  Referring to FIG. 141, various winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h for detecting winning balls that are won in various winning ports provided in game area 27 are provided, and only the out balls collected from out port 145 are detected. An out-ball detection switch 701 is provided. The merge path detection switch 32 is provided in the merge passage path 702 where the out balls detected by the out ball detection switch 701 and the prize balls detected by the various prize ball detection switches 700a to 700h merge and pass. Yes.

  Of these various detection switches, only the merging path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and the other detection switches are constituted by proximity switches. By configuring the various detection switches in this way, when a so-called radio wave is generated and an illegal radio wave is transmitted and an illegal act of illegally outputting a winning ball detection signal from various winning ball detection switches occurs, the proximity switch is Although a detection signal is output in response to the illegal radio wave, only the junction path detection switch 32 is constituted by an optical sensor, and therefore does not output any detection signal without responding to the illegal radio wave.

  If it is normal, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by the proximity switches should be the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch. However, when a radio wave that transmits an illegal radio wave occurs, the detection signal from the detection switch constituted by other proximity switches is output without outputting the detection signal from the junction path detection switch 32. The ball detection total by the various detection switches configured by the proximity switches and the number of balls detected by the merge path detection switch 32 do not match. Based on the occurrence of such a mismatch phenomenon, it can be determined that an illegal act has occurred.

  For this purpose, the payout controller 17 receives the detection signals from the various winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the detection signal from the out ball detection switch 701, the detection signal from the foul ball detection switch 33, and the detection signal from the merge path detection switch 32. Then, the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 configured by proximity switches is calculated, and whether the total and the number of balls detected by the merging path detection switch 32 coincide with each other. Is determined. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As still another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 141 is provided at a position lower than the joining place where the foul balls detected by the foul ball detecting switch 33 join the joining passage path 702, You may comprise so that the sum of an out ball | bowl and a foul ball | bowl may be detected by the joining path | route detection switch 32. FIG. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54.

  As still another example, the joining path detection switch 32 shown in FIG. 141 is left as it is, and is separated from the joining point where the foul ball detected by the foul ball detection switch 33 joins the joining passage path 702. May be configured such that the total of winning balls, out balls, and foul balls is detected by another merging path detection switch. In that case, the total number of balls detected by the various detection switches constituted by proximity switches, that is, the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h, the out ball detection switch 701, and the foul ball detection switch 33 is calculated, and the total and the joining path are calculated. It is determined whether or not the number of balls detected by the detection switch 32 matches. If it is determined that there is a predetermined number or more of gaps, the payout control unit 17 determines that an abnormality has occurred, transmits an abnormality display command to the display effect control board 53, and displays the display effect control board 53. Displays an abnormality on the display 54. In addition, the above-described abnormality determination is performed by determining whether the total number of balls detected by the winning ball detection switches 700a to 700h and the out ball detection switch 701 matches the number of balls detected by the joining path detection switch 32 or not. Run in parallel.

Next, another control of the payout control unit 17 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 142 (a) shows the launch and lift control command output processing executed by the payout controller 17. In step SA (hereinafter simply referred to as SA) 1, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. The game prohibition flag is turned on when an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU is received, and turned off when a game permission request is received. If NO is determined in SA1, processing for outputting a firing permission signal to the firing control board 31 is performed in SA2. Upon receipt of this, when the touch ring signal is input by the player operating the hitting operation handle 25, the launch control board 31 drives and controls the hitting motor 18 to hit the hit ball.

  A signal of the launch motor origin sensor is input as the hitting ball launch motor 18 is driven. If there is an input of the signal, a determination of YES is made in SA3, and control for driving the carry motor 40 is performed in SA4.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is ON, a process of outputting a launch control signal including a launch prohibition signal to the launch control board 31 is performed at SA5. Upon receiving this, the launch control board 31 stops driving the hit ball launch motor 18 and puts it into a shot stop state where no hit ball is fired.

  FIG. 142 (b) shows error processing. In SA10, it is determined whether or not the game prohibition flag is ON. If YES is determined by SA10, it is determined whether or not a winning detection signal is input. If a detection signal is output from any of the winning ball detection switches 700 a to 700 h, the signal is input to the main control board 16, and the detection signal is input from the main control board 16 to the payout control unit 17. In SA11, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input. More specifically, after receiving an operation instruction including a prohibition request from the CU, the floating ball processing waiting time (10 When the winning ball detection signal is input after the elapse of (second), a determination of YES is made by SA11.

  At this time, all the floating balls in the game area 27 should have been collected, and the fact that the winning ball detection signal has been input nevertheless means that a so-called radio wave attack that illegally generates a winning due to an illegal radio wave. There is a risk. In this case, the control proceeds to SA12, and an error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is output.

  On the other hand, when the game prohibition flag is OFF, it is determined by SA13 whether or not a firing motor origin sensor signal has been input. If not, that is, if the firing motor 18 is not driven, the transport motor 40 should also be stopped (see SA3 and SA4). Nevertheless, if a detection signal is input from the cue detection switch (upper) 41a or the cue detection switch (lower) 41b, a determination of YES is made by SA14, and according to the type of error by SA12. An error notification signal is output.

  Specifically, the output of the error notification signal corresponding to the type of error is a signal for performing abnormality display by the indicator 54, the point of the abnormality notification lamp (or blinking) or the abnormality notification by sound from the speaker. The control part 17 outputs. For example, in the case of an abnormality determined to be YES by SA14, an abnormality display such as “the lifting device has operated abnormally” on the display 54, a point of the lifting device abnormality notification lamp (or blinking), or “ The payout control unit 17 outputs a signal to notify the abnormality from the speaker by a sound such as “the feeding device has abnormally operated”.

  When the firing motor 18 is not driven, that is, when a ball is not being fired, an error is notified when the lifting of the pachinko ball is detected by the ball raising detection switch (upper) 41a or the ball raising detection switch (lower) 41b. The reason is that if pachinko balls continue to be fed and supplied even though they are not being hit, there is a risk of clogging in the passage and failure may occur. This is so that it can be dealt with.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the number of game balls is managed on the CU side, there is no need to provide the management function on the P platform side, and the cost of the P platform is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed as much as possible. In particular, the P machine has a short exchange cycle in the game hall in order to be able to provide a more interesting game as soon as possible, and tends to be exchanged early in units of several months if it is one year or early. . In addition, as new stands are being developed one after another, which quickly incorporates rapidly changing player preferences, there is also a tendency for the base exchange cycle in the amusement hall to be accelerated.

  On the other hand, CUs are rarely replaced from the viewpoint of preference, and in general, equipment replacement is performed in response to a failure. It is what is used. If no failure occurs, replacement is not performed for several years.

  For this reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the P units are introduced can be reduced by providing the management function of the game balls not on the P units side but on the CU side to suppress the cost of the P units.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and SID (also referred to as a unique ID) for ensuring security.

  In the amusement hall, a host server 801, a card unit 3, and a pachinko machine 2 are installed. The card unit 3 and the pachinko machine 2 perform encryption communication with each other. The card unit 3 and the upper server 801 are also performing encrypted communication with each other. Further, encryption communication is also performed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 provided in the card unit 3. Further, cryptographic communication is also performed between the payout control unit 17 and the main control board 16 in the LSI 799 configured with one chip provided in the pachinko machine 2 and between the main control board 16 and the key management server 803. Yes. Further, intra-chip communication is performed between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17.

  The host server 801 is a server designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3, and has a function of managing sales in the case where a player inserts a card into the card unit 3 and plays a game using, for example, a prepaid balance. have. A key management server 800 that can communicate with the host server 801 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 800 is also designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the card unit 3.

  A key management server 803 that can communicate with the main control board 16 is installed outside the game hall. This key management server 803 is designed and manufactured by the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 2.

  The CU communication control unit 80 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 store a dedicated program common to each company regardless of the card unit manufacturer or the pachinko machine manufacturer, and the communication control is performed according to the program. As a result, the specifications of the communication interface between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in order to enable communication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 in any card unit manufacturer. Is open to each card unit manufacturer. Except between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, the specification of the communication interface is not disclosed. On the other hand, in the case of communication between the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the payout control unit 17, both are provided in the one-chip microcomputer and communication is performed within the chip. Need not be published.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an entire system for distributing authentication information including an authentication key and a unique ID (also referred to as SID) for ensuring security. Key management server 800 and host server 801, host server 801 and main control unit 323, main control unit 323 and CU communication control unit 80, CU communication control unit 80 and P unit communication control unit 81, payout control unit 17 and main control board 16 and the main control board 16 and the key management server 803 mutually authenticate using the authentication information, and determine whether or not the counterpart devices are appropriate. Then, communication is performed with each other on the condition that an authentication result that is appropriate is obtained. Distribution of authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 will be described below with reference to FIG.

  The SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit are transmitted from the key management server 800 in FIG. 143 to the main control unit 323 of the card unit 3 and stored in the EEPROM 808. Specifically, referring to FIG. 143, key management server 800 stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each SID of the main control unit. As described above, the card unit manufacturer stores the SID of the main control unit in the EEPROM 808 in the manufacturing stage of the card unit 3, and the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control unit, that is, already stored in the ROM 809. The SID of the CU communication control unit and the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 are transmitted to the key management server 800 together with the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808. Then, the key management server 800 receives it, and stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit transmitted in association with the transmitted SID of the main control unit. In this way, the key management server 800 constructs a database of authentication information for a pair consisting of the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit corresponding thereto, and the authentication key that is a common key.

  As described above, the SID of the main control unit itself is authentication information, but is transmitted to the key management server 800 to identify the corresponding CU communication control unit SID and authentication key in the key management server 800. It is also used for authentication information identification information.

  When the card unit 3 is first turned on after the card unit 3 is installed in the amusement hall, the main control unit 323 manages the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 via the host server 801 and manages the key. Send to server 800. The key management server 800 searches for the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in association with the received SID of the main control unit 323, and searches for the SID and authentication of the searched CU communication control unit 80. The key is returned to the main control unit 323 via the host server 801. The main control unit 323 receives this, and stores the received SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80 in the EEPROM 808. As a result, the same SID (pair) as the SID of the CU communication control unit 8 stored in the ROM 809 of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the EEPROM 808 and the same as the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 (pair). An authentication key is stored in EEPROM 808.

  Whether the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the ROM 809 is correct between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 using the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 stored in the EEPROM 808 The CU communication control unit 80 determines whether or not the CU communication control unit 80 is appropriate, and performs serial ID authentication and stores it in the EEPROM 808 using the SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813. BB serial ID authentication is performed to determine whether the SID of the main control unit 323 is correct and determine whether the main control unit 323 is correct. Further, whether or not a common authentication key is stored between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 is determined by using an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808 and an authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813. Device authentication is performed by using and determining.

  Next, the reason why the key management server 800 is used as the distribution source for distributing the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit 80, which is a part of the authentication information, to the main control unit 323 will be described.

  For example, referring to FIG. 9 described above, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 804 in the main control unit 323 as well as the SID of the CU communication control unit 80 is stored in the ROM 809 at the time of chip manufacture. When stored, the memory chip storing the SID of the same CU communication control unit 80 must be mounted on both the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, and in the memory chip mounting process, A pair of memory chips must be mounted, and the mounting process becomes inconvenient.

  Therefore, for example, one of the pair authentication information, that is, the SID of the CU communication control unit 80, the SID of the main control unit 323, and the authentication key are stored in the CU communication control unit 80, and the card unit 3 is manufactured. At the time of installation or when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, one authentication information stored in the CU communication control unit 80 is transmitted to the main control unit 323. A method of storing the transmitted authentication information, that is, the SID of the main control unit, the SID of the CU communication control unit, and the authentication key by using the EEPROM 808 can be considered.

  However, in the case of this method, the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, so that there is a risk of leakage of the authentication information during that time, resulting in a security problem. In particular, between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, as described above, the communication interface specification is disclosed, and the authentication information is transmitted according to the disclosed communication interface specification. Accordingly, there is a disadvantage that the risk of leakage of authentication information increases. Moreover, the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80 are, for example, devices located in a local area compared to the upper server 801 and the key management server 800, and the number thereof is also higher than that of the upper server 801 and the key management server 800. For this reason, there is a possibility that a person who attempts fraud easily allows an unauthorized person to intercept and eavesdrop on authentication information.

  Further, when the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, the following inconvenience occurs. For example, the CU communication control unit 80 is replaced with an illegally manufactured CU communication control unit 80, and then the authentication information is transmitted from the CU communication control unit 80 to the main control unit 323, and the main control unit 323 stores the authentication information. In the case where an illegal act is performed, in the mutual authentication between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80, it is not determined that there is any abnormality, and the CU communication control unit 80 is illegal. Can not be found. In other words, in the case of a system in which authentication information is supplied from one side that performs mutual authentication to the other side that performs mutual authentication, one side that performs mutual authentication is replaced with an unauthorized one, and then the fraudulent act is performed by supplying authentication information. This creates a security hole that allows you to forgive.

  In order to prevent the above inconveniences, a download method is adopted in which the authentication information stored in the upper server 801 is downloaded and stored in the main control unit 323.

  Also, for the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 16 and the payout control unit 17 in the pachinko machine 2, the authentication information stored in the key management server 803 is downloaded as described above. Then, a download method of storing in the main control board 16 is adopted.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 17, the SID of the payout control unit 17 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is used by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured. And the authentication key are written in the EEPROM of the payout control unit 17, and the SID of the main control board is written in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 by a ROM writer or the like when the pachinko machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the pachinko machine 2 is installed in the game hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 16 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 16. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in a plurality of pachinko machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 16, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 16. The main control board 16 stores the returned SID of the payout control unit and the authentication key in the EEPROM.

  Further, in the authentication information used for mutual authentication between the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 in the slot machine 2S (FIGS. 144 to 148), which will be described later, the key management server 803 also stores information similar to the above. A download method is employed in which the stored authentication information is downloaded and stored in the main control board 116.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the ROM chip manufacturing stage of the payout control unit 117, the SID of the payout control unit 117 is stored in the ROM, and the main control board is read by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured. The SID and the authentication key are written into the EEPROM of the payout control unit 117, and the SID of the main control board is written into the EEPROM of the main control board 116 by a ROM writer or the like when the slot machine is manufactured.

  In this state, when the power is turned on for the first time after the slot machine 2S is installed in the amusement hall, the SID of the main control board stored in the EEPROM of the main control board 116 is read from the I / O port of the main control board 116. Transmit to the key management server 803. The key management server 803 stores the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in association with the SID of each main control board in the plurality of slot machines. The key management server 803 searches for the SID and authentication key of the payout control unit corresponding to the SID of the main control board transmitted from the main control board 116, and uses the searched SID and authentication key of the payout control unit. It returns to the main control board 116. The main control board 116 stores the returned SID and authentication key of the payout control unit in the EEPROM.

  Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. Referring to FIG. 144, in the slot machine 2S, a front door 2b is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 2a with the left side edge as a swing center.

  A pair of upper and lower engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are provided in the vicinity of the edge of the front door 2bS opposite to the swing center. The engaging protrusions 6aS and 6bS are pressed downward by a spring (not shown). On the other hand, engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS are provided at positions of the main body frame 2aS facing the engagement protrusions 6aS and 6bS. When the opened front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS, the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS get over the engaging receiving pieces 7aS, 7bS, and the engaging protrusions 6aS, 6bS are moved downward by the biasing force of the spring in the state of getting over. Move and become locked.

  A front door opening solenoid 110 (see FIG. 145) is provided on the back side of the front door 2bS, and the front door opening solenoid 110 is excited to energize a pair of upper and lower against the spring biasing force. The mating projections 6aS and 6bS are pushed upward, and as a result, the engagement projections 6aS and 6bS are disengaged from the engagement receiving pieces 7aS and 7bS to be unlocked, and the front door 2b is opened.

  A front door closing detector 112 (see FIG. 5) is provided at a position in contact with the front door 2bS in the upper part of the main body frame 2aS, and the front door 2bS is pressed against the main body frame 2aS to be locked. Detected.

  Next, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S will be described with reference to FIG. The card unit 3 is provided with a main control unit 323 composed of a microcomputer or the like. The main control unit 323 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. RandomAccess Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 323 is provided with an external communication unit 324 for communicating with the hall management computer 1 and the like, and performs communication via the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S and the S communication control unit 82. A CU communication control unit 80 is provided for this purpose. The card unit 3 is provided with a connector 330 for connection to the slot machine 2S side, and the slot machine 2S is provided with a connector 220 for connection to the card unit 3 side. The CU communication control unit 80 and the S unit communication control unit 82 are communicably connected via the connectors 330 and 220 and connection wiring.

  The currency identifier 344 identifies the authenticity and type of the bill, and the identification result signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the main control unit 323. The card reader / writer 327 reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the main control unit 323 and written to the card reader / writer 327 from the main control unit 323. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer 327 writes the data to the inserted card.

  Display data such as the balance or the number of points is output from the main control unit 323 to the display 312, and the display 312 displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates a touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the lending button 321, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the replay button 319, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323. When the player operates the return button 322, the operation signal is input to the main control unit 323.

  The slot machine 2S is electrically connected to a main control board 116 that controls the progress of the game of the slot machine 2S (game control) and a payout control unit 117 that transmits information about points and the like to the card unit 3. It is provided in the state. Furthermore, the slot machine 2S is provided with an effect control board 90 electrically connected to the payout control unit 117 and an effect ROM board 92 electrically connected to the effect control board 90.

  On the main control board 116 is mounted a main control unit 41 constituted by a game control microcomputer. The main control unit 41 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area of the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The main control unit 41 includes a random number generation circuit that generates a predetermined range of random numbers, a sampling circuit that acquires random numbers from the random number generation circuit, and the like. The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery for a winning combination using the random number acquired from the random number generation circuit.

  The main control board 116 has a single BET switch 500, a MAXBET switch 600, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, a game auxiliary display 120, a payout display 130, a start valid LED 180, a waiting LED 19, and a replaying. The LED 200, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected.

  The main control board 116 detects the start operation after setting the bet amount, starts variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), draws the results of one game, and stops each reel in response to the stop operation. Let

  Here, processing executed by the main control unit 41 in the slot machine 2S will be described.

  In the slot machine 2S of the present embodiment, a winning is awarded when the winning symbols are aligned on any winning line of the variable display device constituted by the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  In the following, the big bonus may be referred to as BB, and the regular bonus provided during the big bonus may be referred to as RB. In some cases, a big bonus or a regular bonus is simply referred to as a bonus. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery and set a winning flag for the winning combination.

  The “game” in the slot machine 2S, in a narrow sense, refers to a period from when the start switch 7 is operated until the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped. Since the setting of the bet number before the operation of No. 7 and the payout of medals and the transition of the gaming state are performed after the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, these incidental processes are also included in the “game” in a broad sense. And

  First, the main control unit 41 sets the bet number by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, and starts rotating the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by detecting the operation of the start switch 7. .

  However, if the player has won a replay in the previous game, the same bet number as the previous game is automatically set by the replay game flag (the replay game flag is erased at this stage).

  When the bet number is set and the start switch 7 is operated, the main control unit 41 extracts a random number for internal lottery, and assigns each combination determined according to the gaming state based on the extracted random number value. A lottery process is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed.

  The main control unit 41 performs a reel rotation process after the lottery process. In the reel rotation process, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the previous game are processed on the condition that one game regulation time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has passed since the time counted by one game timer has elapsed. The motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven to start rotation of all the left, middle, and right reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  The main control unit 41 stops when a predetermined condition (detection of the reference position by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R after the rotation speed reaches a certain speed) is satisfied from the start of rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. The operation of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is made valid. Thereafter, when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated by the player, the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stopped, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped.

  When the driving of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the main control unit 41 performs a winning determination process for determining whether any predetermined role symbol is derived and displayed on the winning line. In the winning determination process, when it is determined that a winning combination such as BB has been won, a process for controlling the bonus (for example, setting a bonus value corresponding to the value of the gaming state flag) is performed.

  When the winning determination process ends, the main control unit 41 performs a payout process. In the payout process, an addition number signal indicating the number of points to be given is output to the payout control unit 117. In the payout process, a bonus end determination process for determining whether or not a bonus end condition corresponding to the bonus is satisfied is performed during the bonus (BB or RB) as various processes not related to winning.

  Next, each board other than the main control board 116 mounted on the slot machine 2S will be described.

  The payout control unit 117 is equipped with a holding point control unit 31 constituted by a holding point control microcomputer. The holding point control unit 31 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM ( Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The payout control unit 117 includes a score counter for storing a player's total score separately from the card unit 3. The payout control unit 117 receives an addition request number signal from the card unit 3 when the player performs an operation to secure the score by deducting the valuable value owned by the player, and the payout control unit 117 In response to the addition request number signal, the score counter is added and updated. On the other hand, when the bet amount is set, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score point counter.

  Further, a front door opening solenoid 110 and a front door closing detector 112 are provided in an electrically connected state with respect to the dispensing control unit 117.

  When the front door closing detector 112 detects the closing of the front door 2bS, the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits a front door opening solenoid excitation signal to the front door opening solenoid 110 to excite the front door opening solenoid 110 and unlock the front door 2bS.

  On the effect control board 90, an effect control unit 91 configured by an effect control microcomputer is mounted. The production control unit 91 includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (Random) that functions as a work area for the CPU. Access Memory), and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  The effect control board 90 is provided with a liquid crystal display 510, speakers 530 and 540, a chance button 58, and a jog dial 59. The effect control unit 91 inputs the data read signal to the ROM mounted on the effect ROM board 92, reads the image data, transmits the display data to the liquid crystal display 510, and sends it to the liquid crystal display 510. Control is performed to display a display screen such as a navigation effect relating to points, bets, or small roles.

  Further, the button input signal of the chance button 58 and the dial input signal of the jog dial 59 are input to the effect control board 90, and the effect control board 90 outputs the chance button input signal and the jog dial input signal to the liquid crystal display 510. Then, a display screen reflecting the operation of the jog dial 59 and the operation of the chance button 58 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 510.

  Next, signals transmitted and received between the card unit 3 and the slot machine 2S and between each board of the slot machine 2S will be described.

  From the card unit 3 to the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S, an addition request (holding point +), a subtraction request (holding point-), a game permission request, a game prohibition request, an addition request count, and a subtraction request Both numbers are sent as “commands”.

  The addition request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when the points are lent by debiting the prepaid balance or the points are lent by operating the replay button 319. In response, the payout control unit 117 adds and updates the number of points. The subtraction request command is transmitted to the payout control unit 117 when a divided transfer of points (point sharing process) or a wagon service is performed. Receiving it, the payout control unit 117 subtracts and updates the score.

  The game permission / prohibition request command is a command requesting the payout control unit 117 to permit the game or a command requesting prohibition of the game. The number of addition requests is a command for designating the number of points to be added to the number of points by an addition request command. The subtraction request number is a command for designating the number of points to be subtracted from the number of points by a subtraction request command.

  On the other hand, from the payout control unit 117 of the slot machine 2S to the card unit 3, the number of points indicating the value of the point counter stored in the payout control unit 117, the number of points added according to the winnings, and the number of bets The number of points subtracted according to the setting and external output information indicating various game states and the like are transmitted.

  The external output information includes bet number setting information (indicating the set bet number) transmitted when the bet number is set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAX BET switch 600, and the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Reel start information transmitted at the time of starting, internal winning status information (indicating the winning result) transmitted at the time when the internal lottery is executed by the start operation, and the time when each of the first to third stop operations is executed 1st to 3rd stop operation information (indicating stop reel type), result information (indicating the type of winning or winning combination) transmitted when the display result is finalized, and game state changed It includes game state information transmitted at the time (indicating the type of game state that has changed) and error information (indicating the type of error) transmitted when an error occurs.

  When the CPU of the main control board 116 detects an error that occurs during the game or a disconnection due to a connection confirmation signal, the CPU controls the lighting or blinking of the calling lamp provided on the curtain board and the I / O of the main control board 116. An abnormality notification signal for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality to the hall management computer 1 is output from the O port (not shown).

  The gaming state notified by the gaming state information includes a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), an RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, and an internal lottery result by the effect control unit 91. An AT (Assist Time) that is a notification period in which a navigation effect for notification can be executed is included.

  From the payout control unit 117 to the main control board 116, a health check command, a prize payout number reception command, and a BET impossible signal are transmitted. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 116 is operating normally. The winning / dispensing number reception command is a command indicating that the addition number transmitted from the main control board 116 has been received. The BET impossible signal is a signal indicating that the value of the score counter has become less than the minimum value required for setting the betting number. When the main control board 116 receives this BET disabling signal, the main control board 116 enters a game prohibition state in which a game cannot be newly started thereafter. Specifically, the operation of the single BET switch 500 and the MAXBET switch 600 for setting the bet amount is invalidated.

  A connection confirmation signal is returned from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 116 and the payout control unit 117 are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 116 to the payout control part 117. The payout control unit 117 is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control unit 117 receives the predetermined voltage signal.

  In addition, an “addition number +” signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117 when winning is detected, while a “subtraction number +” signal is detected when it is detected that reel rotation has started. Sent. “Addition number +” indicates the number of points to be added according to the winning, and “Subtraction number +” indicates the number of points to be subtracted according to the bet number setting. The payout control unit 117 adds the value of the score counter in accordance with the “addition number +” signal, and adds the “addition number” for transmission to the card unit 3. Further, the payout control unit 117 subtracts the value of the score counter in accordance with the “subtraction number +” signal and adds the “subtraction number” to be transmitted to the card unit 3.

  Further, various external output information indicating the bet number setting and reel start-up described above is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 transmits each external output information to the card unit 3 at the timing when the external output information is received. The external output information may be directly transmitted from the main control board 116 to the card unit 3.

  A display control command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90. This display control command includes a gaming machine information command, a card unit (CU) operation command, a test command, and an effect command. The gaming machine information command is a command indicating the gaming state of the slot machine 2S such as BB or RT, and the card unit operation command is a command transmitted in response to the player operating the card unit 3. The test command is a command for testing the effect display operation of the effect control unit 91. The effect command is a command for instructing switching to various effect screens according to the gaming state.

  A command is transmitted from the payout control unit 117 to the effect control board 90 every 300 ms. The effect control board 90 detects a line disconnection and performs a time over detection process (error process) when the next command is not received despite a lapse of a fixed time exceeding 300 ms after the command is received. Specifically, if the next command is not transmitted even though 300 ms has been received since the previous command was received, the error count is incremented by one, and the effect control is performed when the error count is counted ten times continuously. The substrate 90 detects the time-over, initializes the communication state, and controls the liquid crystal display 510 to display an error animation.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a description will be given of main data among various data stored on the CU side and the S platform side, and a transmission / reception mode thereof.

  In the present embodiment, on the CU side, the fluctuation of the number of points on the S platform is calculated and the current number of points is managed. On the S side, the current number of points is calculated and stored. However, on the S side, the number of points is only to prevent a new game from being started as early as possible when the number of points is less than the minimum number required for setting the number of bets (for example, 0). It is a secondary thing used for. In the present embodiment, since the main management of the number of points is performed on the CU side, it is not necessary to provide a function for strictly managing the number of points on the S platform side, and the cost of the S platform is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, compared to the CU, the S units have a shorter replacement cycle at the game hall and are replaced early. Therefore, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the S machines are introduced can be reduced by providing the CU side with the main management function related to the number of points on the S machines side to suppress the costs on the S machines side. is there.

  In FIG. 146, storage data of the RAM provided in the main control unit 323 on the CU side and storage data of the RAM mounted on the payout control unit 117 on the S platform side are shown. First, when the power is turned on with the S units (slot machine 2S) and the CU (card unit 3) being electrically connected for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall, the payout control unit 117 on the S unit side The main chip ID is transmitted from the main control board 116, the main chip ID is transmitted to the CU side, and the payout chip ID stored in the payout control unit 117 is transmitted to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, connection time, that is, data of the time when the CU side and the S side are connected and communication is started is transmitted from the CU side to the S side, and the transmitted connection time is stored on the S side. .

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU side are stored on the CU side and the S platform side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the S side to the CU side.

  On the CU side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same S units as in the previous time are connected. Note that the connection time data is transmitted from the CU side to the S side when new power is turned on and communication between the CU side and the S side is started. Is stored on the S side.

  Each time an operation instruction and an operation response are transmitted between the CU side and the S platform side, the sequence number (SQN) is incremented by “1” on the CU side and the S platform side, and the sequence number is updated on the CU side. And S side. The SQN is a communication number for checking whether or not the communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU and the S platform. SQN is a number updated at the end of the communication number to be updated.

  A specific aspect of SQN backup in the CU and S units in the present embodiment will be described. The CU backs up and stores the SQN transmitted to the S units in response to the operation instruction, and then receives the SQN from the S units and rewrites and stores the SQN stored in the backup with the received SQN. When the next operation instruction is transmitted, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted to the S units, and the transmitted SQN is stored in the backup. The CU repeats such processing.

  Similarly, in the S unit, the SQN received from the CU by the operation instruction is backed up and stored, and when the operation response is transmitted from the S unit to the CU next time, the SQN stored in the backup is updated by 1 and transmitted. The transmitted SQN is stored as a backup. When the next operation response is received, the SQN stored in the backup is rewritten and stored in the received SQN. Such processing is repeated for the S units.

  And when communication interruption occurs during communication, SQN is backed up and stored until communication reconnection. On the S side, the operation response is always sent regardless of the occurrence time of communication interruption. Therefore, the SQN stored as a backup until communication reconnection is always the SQN transmitted last. On the other hand, since the CU side is in a state in which an operation instruction has been transmitted or an operation instruction has been received in accordance with the timing of communication disconnection, the SQN stored in the backup until communication reconnection is transmitted last. Either the last received or last received.

  For example, an operation instruction is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side, and the sequence number n at that time is transmitted, and the transmitted sequence number n is stored on the S platform side. When an operation response is returned from the S platform to the CU side, the stored sequence number n added by 1 (n + 1) is also transmitted. On the CU side, since the returned sequence number n + 1 is incremented by 1 from the already stored sequence number n, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally. The n + 2 sequence number is sent to the S side.

  Next, the current point-related information (point-related information being counted) is transmitted from the S platform to the CU side. This current point related information is stored by each counter in the current point related information storage area of the RAM.

  As shown in FIG. 146, a total of four types of counters including an addition number counter, a subtraction number counter, an external output information counter, and a score counter are provided in the current score-related information storage area of the RAM. Yes.

  The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. When a winning occurs in the S units, an addition number signal that can specify the number of points added is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the addition number counter based on the addition number signal.

  The subtraction number counter is a counter for counting the number of points to be subtracted according to the betting number setting. When a bet number setting operation is detected, a bet number setting signal is transmitted from the main control board 116 to the payout control unit 117. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the subtraction number counter based on the betting number setting signal.

  The external output information counter is a counter for counting the number of times the game state has changed. The external output information counter includes a counter that counts the number of bets set by operating the single BET switch 500 or the MAXBET switch 600, a counter that counts up when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating, and a start operation. A counter that counts the internal winning combination for each winning combination when the internal lottery is executed, a counter that counts the operation according to the first to third stop operations when the reel stop operation is performed, and the display result is fixed A counter that counts up at the time, a counter that counts up according to the gaming state when the gaming state changes, and a counter that counts up according to the error type when an error occurs are included.

  Note that counters that count up for each gaming state when the gaming state changes include a counter corresponding to BB, a counter corresponding to RB, a counter corresponding to RT, and the like. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the corresponding external output information counter based on various external output information transmitted from the main control board 116.

  The score counter is a counter for storing the score (total score) of the player at the current time. The payout control unit 117 adds and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the addition number counter when adding and updating the addition number counter, and updates the point counter by the addition amount of the subtraction number counter when adding and updating the subtraction number counter. Subtract update.

  A command requesting data transmission is transmitted from the CU to the S units at regular time intervals. The S units transmit the values of the above four types of counters (addition number counter, subtraction number counter, external output information counter, and score point counter) to the CU at the timing of receiving the command. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the S units, for the three types of counters of the above four types of counters excluding the point number counter, set the counter value of “previous point related information” for each data transmission. Back up to storage area.

  That is, the value of the addition counter is “addition number”, the value of the subtraction counter is “subtraction number”, the value of the external output information counter is “external output information”, Stored in the area. In addition, when storing in the storage area, the data stored before that is erased. That is, new data is overwritten and saved (rewritten) in the storage area of “previous holding point related information”.

  The addition number counter, subtraction number counter, and external output information counter whose counter values are backed up in the storage area of “previous holding point related information” are then initialized (cleared to 0) to prepare for the next data count. It is done.

  As a result, the addition number counter, the subtraction number counter, and the external output information counter change the amount of data (points, external output information) since the last data transmission to the CU (untransmitted to the CU). Data) is stored. When the data transmission request is received from the CU next time, the amount of change in data from when the data transmission request was last received until this time when the data transmission request is received is sent to the CU. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the total number of points at the current stage is stored in the point counter that is not initialized every time data is transmitted. Each time a data transmission request is received from the CU, the total number of points at the current stage is transmitted to the CU. That is, each time the S unit receives a command instructing transmission of the data change amount, the S unit transmits the data change amount from the previous reception of the command to the reception of the current change.

  In other words, the data of addition number, subtraction number, and external output information, which is the current score related information transmitted to the CU immediately before in the storage area of the previous score related information (current score related information transmitted immediately before). Is stored as backup data. This backup data includes not only the value of each current counter but also the value of each previous counter that was not transmitted in the next transmission when the current holding point related information is not transmitted from the S side to the CU side. It is intended to enable transmission.

  On the CU side, a total addition number (addition total), a total subtraction number (subtraction total), an external output information total, and a score are stored in a total data storage area in the RAM.

  The CU updates the total addition number and the number of points based on the value of the addition number counter transmitted from the S platform. Further, the total subtraction number and the number of points are updated based on the value of the subtraction number counter transmitted from the S platform. Furthermore, the cumulative number of external output information is updated based on the value of the external output information counter transmitted from the S units. The external output information cumulative number is updated for each type of external output information counter. As a result, on the CU side, according to “number of bets”, “reel start”, “internal winning by winning combination”, “first to third stop operation”, “display result”, “game state change”, The number (number of times) is accumulated.

  In this way, the CU can manage the latest score by updating the score based on the current score-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Similarly, the CU can manage the latest information by updating the total number of additions, the total number of subtractions, and the total number of external output information with the current point-related information transmitted from the S units one by one. Become.

  Note that the CU receives the count value of the score counter in addition to the values of the addition counter and the subtraction counter from the S side, but the score stored by itself is stored in the addition counter and the subtraction counter. Updating based on the value, the count value of the point counter sent from the S platform side is not used. For this reason, even if the number of points sent from the S platform does not match the number of scores managed on the CU side, the score on the CU side is updated with the number of scores sent from the S platform. It will never be done.

  Further, the CU collates the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform with the current score updated on the CU side, and determines whether or not they match.

  The CU sends a normal (normal) operation request (command) and a normal (normal) operation response (with normal operation) (provided that a match (confirmation confirmation) has been made) Continue to receive (response). On the other hand, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU performs control to shift to an error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, error notification is performed by the display 312 or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer 1 (in this case, the hall management computer). Error notification by 1) may be performed), or a predetermined notification for encouraging an artificial response by an attendant may be considered.

  Alternatively, when it is determined that they do not match, the CU may generate a command for instructing the number of points to be corrected to the number of points managed by the CU side, and transmit the command to the S units. Conceivable. In this case, the S units are provided with a function of correcting the number of points stored therein according to the correction instruction command. The correction instruction command may be a command specifying the number of points managed on the CU side, or the difference between the number of points managed on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side. It is good also as a command which shows.

  In this way, the CU receives the values of various counters transmitted from the S platform, and calculates and manages the current number of points based on the value of the addition / subtraction number counter in particular, and manages it. have. For this reason, it is not necessary to provide a main management function for the S units. Accordingly, the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced. In the present embodiment, for the purpose of allowing the game to be immediately prohibited when the score becomes 0, the score is also stored on the S platform side. However, a score counter for storing the score on the S side may not be provided.

  The CU does not match the function of performing the score number coincidence determination process for determining whether or not they match by comparing the calculated current score number with the value of the score counter transmitted from the S platform. It sometimes has a function of performing control to shift to an error state (error control at mismatch).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the score is stored on the S side, but it can be determined whether or not the score matches the score stored and stored on the CU side. (CU side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of points stored on the gaming machine side does not coincide with the number of points stored on the CU side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU side. For example, the number of points stored on the CU side and the number of points stored on the S platform side by the hall management computer 1 connected to the CU. May be received to determine whether or not both are consistent.

  As shown in FIG. 146, the CU further includes a storage area for storing a medal and a storage area for storing a card balance of the accepted (inserted) prepaid card (game card). The main control unit 323 of the CU receives a predetermined number from the storage area for storing the medal according to an input requesting the use of the medal (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319 (see FIG. 145) provided on the CU). Subtract the savings medal. In addition, the main control unit 323 (see FIG. 145) of the CU subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area that stores the card balance in response to an input requesting use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the lending button 321).

  In addition, when the player performs an operation for deducting the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, points recorded on the card, or the number of stored medals) and using it for the game, An addition request number for adding the number of points to be deducted to the point number counter is transmitted from the CU side to the S platform side. In response to this, the S platform side adds and updates the score counter.

  On the other hand, when an operation for performing a so-called wagon service order in which a player-owned game value is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like is executed, the number of subtraction requests for the player-owned game value is received from the CU side. S is sent to the S side. In response to this, the S platform side subtracts and updates the score counter.

  FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram corresponding to the storage control of the game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 8, and is a diagram showing the storage control of the game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as in FIG. 8 is performed, and the S units are used instead of the P units. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted.

  When the management of security-related information in the upper server 801 and CU3 related to the P machine 2 described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139 is applied to the S machine 2S, the following security is applied to the upper server 801 and CU3. Information should be managed.

  For example, instead of managing the base, in the normal state that does not correspond to the bonus game, the inserted medals and the paid-out medals are counted, and the ratio thereof is managed. Then, a threshold value for abnormality detection is set to such a ratio, and it may be managed in the same manner as the base abnormality detection setting value described above.

  Further, instead of the average number of times of big hit, the average number of games at the time of occurrence of a role is managed as the average number of games required until the occurrence of one combination corresponding to the probability of occurrence of a small combination with payout of medals. Then, an abnormality determination value may be provided for determining that the role occurrence game number is abnormal when the average number of games at the time of such a combination is equal to or less than a set value, and the abnormality determination value may be managed as security related information. . Instead of setting the occurrence of a small role as a management target, the next game can be started without the need to set a special bonus with a shift to the big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), and the number of bets. Occurrence of other combinations such as a re-playing combination (replay) may be managed as a management target, and the abnormality determination information of the management target may be managed as security related information.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which threshold data for detecting an abnormal state that is disadvantageous for the game hall is set as the security-related information has been shown (for example, in the case of P machines, the base is predetermined). More than the value, in the case of S units, the medal payout / injection ratio is a predetermined value or more). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and threshold data for detecting an abnormal state that is disadvantageous to the player may be set. For the abnormal state of the P stand 2, for example, a threshold value for determining that the base is abnormally low is set as the base abnormality detection setting value for each gaming state such as the low base state and the high base state. As the above-described various abnormality detection setting values, setting values for detecting an abnormal state that is disadvantageous to the player side may be used. For the abnormal state of the S platform 2S, for example, a threshold value for determining an abnormally low payout ratio is set as a threshold value for determining the above-described abnormal ratio of inserted medals to paid-out medals. For example, a set value for detecting an abnormal state that is disadvantageous for the player may be used as the set value for detecting various abnormalities described above. In this way, it is possible to manage whether or not the abnormal state is disadvantageous for the player due to a predetermined cause that is disadvantageous for the player such as fraud on the game hall side.

  Moreover, as an example of an abnormal state unfavorable for the player as security-related information about the P table 2, for example, in addition to the example described above, an abnormal state in which the number of times of display (start count) of the P device is too small, and There are various abnormal states such as an abnormal state in which the probability of jackpot occurrence is too low for the number of times of change display (start number). Further, as an example of an abnormal state that is disadvantageous to the player as security-related information about the S platform 2S, for example, in addition to the above-described example, an abnormal state in which the occurrence of small roles such as small roles is too small, There are various abnormal states such as an abnormal state in which the probability of occurrence of a specific combination such as a small combination is too low.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like in the embodiment described above will be described below.
(1) FIG. 148 shows a modified example of the card unit 3 shown in FIG.

  The card unit 3 is incorporated at a position below the game area 27 as indicated by a broken line. A player can insert a card from a card insertion / discharge port 309 provided in the card unit 3, and a player can insert a bill from a bill insertion port 302 provided in the card unit 3. ing. Further, the indicator 312 of the card unit 3 is provided next to the indicator 54 of the gaming machine so that the player can visually recognize it. In the figure, 320 is an IR photosensitive unit, 319 is a replay button, 321 is a lending button, 322 is a return button, and 798 is a call button.

  The modified example of the card unit shown in FIG. 148 shows that incorporated in the pachinko machine 2 which is an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to be incorporated is not limited to the pachinko machine 2, and FIG. The slot machine 2S shown in 147 may be used.

  (2) Next, a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 8, 42, and 147 will be described. FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a modification of the control mode for storing the game history data on the CU side and the P base side shown in FIG. 8. Here, differences from FIGS. 8, 42, and 147 will be mainly described.

  In the case of FIG. 8, the game history data is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 293 provided on the P base 2. However, in the modification shown in FIG. 149, the hall management computer 1 The game history data is cleared on the basis of a clear command transmitted from CU3 to CU3. Clearing of the game history data needs to be performed for each gaming machine installed in the game hall before the game hall starts business. Therefore, it is more convenient to clear the game history data by simultaneous delivery of the clear command signal from the hall management computer 1 to each CU 3 instead of the operation of the RAM clear switch installed for each gaming machine.

  When a hall attendant operates the hall management computer 1 or the clock function built in the hall management computer 1 reaches a predetermined time before the game hall opening time, the hall management computer 1 A clear command signal is simultaneously distributed to each CU3. The CU 3 that has received the clear command signal erases the memory in the P game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392 by the action of the clear processing unit provided in the game history data management unit 391. As a result, the display of the current P game history data on the display 312 is erased (cleared). Further, a clear command signal is transmitted to the game history data management unit 291 of the P table 2 by the operation of the clear processing unit.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the clear command signal deletes the data stored in the backup data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 by the action of the clear processing unit, and the P machine game history data. Of the storage data for 10 days in the storage unit, the oldest storage data is erased, and the remaining 9 days of storage data is shifted and stored one by one in the storage area of the old day. As a result, the newest storage area (current day storage area) becomes an empty area. Today's game history data is stored in this empty area (current day storage area).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 149, after the player leaves the seat, the identity of the player who has left the seat and the player who will play the next game is determined on the CU3 side. The C-ID, which is the player identification information of the player who has left the seat, is stored in the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392. Thereafter, when the player inserts a card into the CU 3 to play again in the P table 2 that has left the seat, the information of the inserted card is read and the C-ID included in the inserted card information and the current player The C-ID of the player who has left the seat stored in the game history data storage unit is compared to determine whether or not they match. When it is determined that the two match, the same command is transmitted from the game history data management unit 391 of the CU3 to the game history data management unit 291 of the P unit 2, while when it is determined that they do not match The difference command is sent.

  The game history data management unit 291 that has received the same / difference command receives the C-ID and the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit in the current player game history data storage unit if they are the same command. Control to restore and store. On the other hand, when a difference command is received, control is performed to erase backup data stored in the backup data storage unit.

  FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram of a modification corresponding to the storage control of game history data in the P units and the CU shown in FIG. 149, and is a diagram showing storage control of game history data in the S units and the CU. The same control as that in FIG. 148 is performed, and the difference is that S units are used instead of P units. Since others are the same, here, only the drawings are disclosed and the repeated description is omitted. Similarly to FIGS. 8 and 147 described above, FIG. 149 and FIG. 150 confirm the identity of the player only when the C-ID of the membership card is read instead of the visitor card, and the current player game history Store it in the data and take over the game history and aggregate it.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing control of insertion processing in the modification shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. The control shown in FIG. 151 is obtained by changing a part of the control shown in FIG. 42. The same control steps are given the same step numbers, and differences will be mainly described here. Also in FIG. 151, the solid-line arrows indicate the flow of control, and the two-dotted-line arrows indicate the flow of information to be transmitted. In FIG. 151, each step of S1, S2, S4 to S7, S20, and S21 is executed by the CU, and P22 is executed by S22, S10, S12, S13, and S15.

  If it is determined in S1 that it is not interrupted, the control advances to S20, and the C-IDs of the card inserted this time and the card inserted last time are compared to determine whether or not they match. Next, in S21, control based on the determination result is transmitted to the P units. Specifically, in the case of a determination result that matches, the same command is transmitted to the P units in the case of a determination result that does not match.

  In the P machines, whether or not the transmitted command is a coincidence command is determined in S22, and the game history data in the backup area (backup data storage unit) is stored in the current area (on the condition that they coincide with each other). Control is returned to the current player game history data storage unit) and the update of game history data is resumed (S12).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 151, the control of S14 shown in FIG. 42 is not executed.

  In this modified example, instead of transmitting the same command as described above, the game history data a stored in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) of the data storage unit 392 is used as a gaming machine (P machine 2 or S May be transmitted to the stand 2S). The gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S) that has received the game history data a stores the received game history data a in the current area (current player game history data storage unit) and takes over the game history data a. To add and update new game history data. In this case, a backup area (backup data storage unit) is unnecessary in the gaming machine (P 2 or S 2S).

(3) The above-described embodiment discloses an invention having the following configuration.
A gaming system comprising a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player, and a gaming device (card unit 3) that is communicably connected to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
First control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the gaming machine;
Second control means (LSI 799, 999) communicatively connected to the first control means,
The first control means includes
Error determination means (CPU of the main control boards 16 and 116) for determining an error that occurs during the control of the gaming machine;
Abnormality notification control means (CPU of main control boards 16 and 116, I / O port) for performing control to notify abnormality when occurrence of an error is determined by the error determination means,
The second control means includes
Communicatively connected to the gaming device (connected by connectors 380, 20 or connectors 330, 220);
Including an abnormality determining means (authentication sequence of FIG. 31) for determining an abnormality of the first control means;
When the abnormality determining means determines that an abnormality has occurred in the first control means, output means (notifying the abnormality of the main control boards 16, 116) that outputs abnormality notification information notifying that an abnormality has occurred to the gaming device. The detected payout control units 17 and 117 notify the CU communication control unit 80 from the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82),
The gaming device performs control for notifying an abnormality when the abnormality notification information is received.

  According to such a configuration, when the error occurs during the control of the gaming machine, the abnormality of the first control means itself having a control function for notifying the abnormality is determined by the second control means, and the first control means The first control having an abnormality notification control function when an abnormality occurs in order to perform control for notifying the abnormality in the gaming apparatus that the abnormality of the control means itself has occurred is output from the first control means to the gaming apparatus. Even when there is an abnormality in the means itself, the abnormality notification control can be performed satisfactorily.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the CU communication control unit 80 and the P unit communication control unit 81 receive the information sent from the main control unit 323 and the payout control unit 17 and use the information as it is in the P unit or Although it transmits to CU, the received information may be processed (protocol conversion, serial / parallel conversion, etc.), and the processed information may be transmitted.

  (5) Although the authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. 30 to 38 are controls of the main control unit 323 and the communication control unit 80, control of the authentication sequence and business message sequence in FIGS. This may be performed by the payout control unit 17 and the P-unit communication control unit 81 of the pachinko machine 2, or may be performed by the payout control unit 117 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 of the slot machine 2S. It may be performed in other gaming machines (card issuing device, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in.

  The business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 may be performed, for example, between an island computer connected to the hall management computer 1 and a gaming machine computer, and further includes a main control unit and a communication control unit. In the Z counter, the communication control unit is connected to the prize management device, and may be performed between the main control unit and the communication control unit. Furthermore, for example, a communication control unit connected to the storage management device may be provided in the card unit, and the business message sequence shown in FIG. 38 may be executed between the communication control unit and the main control unit of the card unit.

  (6) The BB serial ID authentication sequence shown in FIG. 33 is authentication using two types of SIDs, that is, the SID of the main control unit and the SID of the CU communication control unit, but one type of SID (for example, CU SID). ) May be used to authenticate the main control unit and the CU communication control unit. In this case, authentication that the same SID is stored is performed.

  (7) In the above embodiment, the number of game balls is displayed on the display 312 provided on the CU side, and the number of game balls is displayed on the display 54 on the P platform side. Yes. When the number of game balls is displayed by a display on the CU side, there is an advantage that the number of game balls can be displayed by applying the CU in the present embodiment to P units without a display unit. On the other hand, when the game ball number display unit is provided on the P platform side, the display control may be performed on the CU side. Alternatively, the display control may be performed on the P platform side. When display control is performed on the P platform side, the number of game balls managed by the CU is displayed on the game ball number display section by receiving information on the number of game balls to be displayed from the CU side. It becomes possible to do. In addition, when display control is performed on the P platform side in this way, there is an advantage that it is possible to display the number of game balls having a high decorative (rendering) value. When display control is performed on the P platform side, information on the number of game balls to be displayed is not received from the CU side, but based on the value of the game ball counter stored in the P platform itself, It is good also as what controls display of a number.

  (8) In FIG. 51, the P-side is provided with a 10-second weight for the floating ball processing waiting time. Instead, on the P-side, the number of fired balls−the number of foul balls−the out ball The number-the number of winning balls = 0 is determined, or the number of fired balls-the number of foul balls-the number of balls detected by the out-ball detecting switch 701 is determined to determine that the processing of the floating balls is finished. Also good.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, in the P units that received the prohibition request command, the driving of the hitting ball launch motor 18 is stopped to stop hitting the hitting ball, and the variable display device that is changing is stopped or the start winning memory is stored. In the above description, the variable display device based on the above is not stopped until the change, but instead, the change of the variable display device may be stopped.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is subtracted by a wagon service or the like, as described with reference to FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of game balls stored on the CU side is sufficiently larger than the number of balls requested for subtraction (for example, more than 30 balls), the CU does not wait for a response from the P unit. The game ball may be subtracted by the side alone, and then an operation instruction for a subtraction request may be transmitted to the P units.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, a command is sent from the CU to the P machine and the P machine responds to the response to the CU. Conversely, a command is sent from the P machine to the CU. Then, the communication form in which the CU returns a response to the P units in response thereto may be used.

  Specifically, the command (operation instruction) generated by the payout control units 17 and 117 is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the command (operation instruction) is transmitted to the P unit communication control unit. 81, transmitted from the S-unit communication control unit 82 to the CU. A response (operation response) corresponding to the command (operation instruction) is returned from the CU to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82, and the response (operation response) is returned to the P unit communication control unit 81 and S unit. The communication control unit 82 transmits to the payout control units 17 and 117.

  In this case, the payout control units 17 and 117 execute retransmission of the command shown in FIG. That is, when the payout control units 17 and 117 cannot receive a response from the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication control unit 82 for 1 second after transmitting the command, the command is transmitted to the P-unit communication control unit 81 and the S-unit communication. Retransmits to the control unit 82. Further, the payout control units 17 and 117 also execute the transmission of the communication state request and the communication state confirmation shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (b). That is, the payout control units 17 and 117 transmit an operation instruction to the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82 and then transmit a communication state request, and the P unit communication control unit 81 and the S unit communication control unit 82. The communication state is confirmed based on the communication state response returned from. When it is determined that the confirmation result is abnormal, an operation instruction is transmitted again, a communication state request is transmitted, and a communication state confirmation retry is executed.

  (12) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, communication is performed between the CU and the P platform at regular intervals (for example, 200 ms). Instead, when the necessity of communication occurs, the CU Alternatively, communication may be performed by transmitting data from one of the P units to the other.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, an operation response including a rejection signal that does not comply with a request such as addition rejection ON, subtraction rejection ON, clear rejection ON, etc. is returned from the P platform to the CU. Thus, it is determined that the request is rejected based on the rejection ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the P units returning a rejection ON operation response, an operation response including addition / subtraction ball numbers and game ball data not complying with the request from the CU is returned to the CU. On the side, it is possible to determine whether the returned data (the number of added / subtracted balls, game balls, etc.) is in accordance with the request, and thereby determine whether the request has been rejected. Good.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, when a power interruption at the CU or a communication interruption between the CU and the P base is detected, the ball hitting is stopped on the P base side and the play is stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the game can be continued without stopping hitting on the P platform side. In that case, the P subtraction data and cumulative number of starting and subtracting balls generated along with the game that was continued from the time when the communication interruption occurred until the abnormality was recovered and started up are stored on the P platform side. In addition, at the time of activation, the data and game ball data may be transmitted to the CU to correct the backup value of the data on the CU side.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, when the command from the CU is not transmitted for a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds), the P platform determines that the communication is cut off by the processing of FIG. However, the communication interruption may be determined by the following method.

  A connection detector for detecting whether or not the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 are electrically connected is provided in the pachinko machine 2. Referring to FIG. 6, CU communication control unit 80 and payout control unit 17 are connected by a signal line as described above. In addition to the signal line, a predetermined voltage (for example, 5 V) from card unit 3 is applied. A connection detection signal line to be input to the pachinko machine 2 side is provided. The connection detection signal line and the signal line between the CU communication control unit 80 and the payout control unit 17 are formed of the same cable, and the cable unit is disconnected or the connectors 330 and 20 are detached, and the card unit 3 is also disconnected. Since the voltage of the connection detection signal line becomes 0 V when the power is cut off, the connection detector detects this, and the detection signal is input to the payout control unit 17. The payout control unit 17 determines that the disconnection of the cable, the disconnection of the connectors 330 and 20, and the power supply of the card unit 3 have been disconnected due to the input of the detection signal.

  (16) In the process of FIG. 39, when the P platform receives a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON, the P platform is programmed so that the correction request cannot be rejected by the P platform. However, there is a case where a serious error that cannot be corrected such as a game ball has occurred in the P units even though a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON is received. In consideration of such a severe error state, after transmitting a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON on the CU side, the content of the operation response transmitted from the P unit is checked, and the P unit side It may be determined whether or not the game ball or the like has been corrected correctly, and if it has not been corrected, control for shifting to an error state may be performed.

  That is, when the CU determines that a game machine (for example, P units) cannot add game balls or the like after receiving a communication start request (correction request) including correction ON in FIG. Error control means for performing control to shift to a specified error state.

  As control for shifting to the error state, for example, a severe error notification is performed by the display 312 and a notification that a serious error has occurred is given to the hall management computer 1 to notify the error by the hall management computer 1. It may be possible to promote artificial responses by staff.

(17) On the P platform side, the number of additional balls may be counted as follows.
Counters A and B are provided on the P platform side as counters for counting the number of balls to be added. First, the number of balls to be added is counted by the counter A. When it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter A is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter A is maintained, and thereafter, the number of additional balls is counted by the counter B. If it is the transmission timing of the number of added balls, the count value of the counter B is transmitted to the CU. Thereafter, the value of the counter B is maintained, while the count value of the counter A is cleared to 0. Thereafter, the counter A counts the number of added balls. Thereafter, the above counting by the counters A and B is repeated.

  The above counting method may be used for counting the number of subtraction balls on the P platform side. Alternatively, it may be used for counting the number of winnings at the starting port 1 and the number of winnings at the starting port 2.

  (18) The P platform does not transmit two pieces of information of the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU, but sends one information after adding / subtracting the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls to the CU. Also good. That is, such information also constitutes “update information that can specify the change amount”.

(19) The communication method is not limited to the command-response method described above.
The P units may transmit ball-related information such as game balls to the CU at predetermined time intervals without waiting for a command from the CU. Alternatively, the P platform may transmit the ball related information to the CU every time a predetermined amount of information is obtained, instead of transmitting the ball related information at predetermined time intervals. For example, in the case of an additional ball, it may be configured to transmit the additional ball number to the CU every time one or two or more predetermined number of additional balls are generated.

  (20) In the present embodiment, two counters, an addition ball counter and a subtraction ball count, are provided on the P platform side. However, instead of these two counters, a single addition / subtraction counter may be used that increments according to an increase in game balls (such as winnings) and subtracts due to a decrease in game balls (such as bullet firing). In this case, the value of this one addition / subtraction counter is transmitted from the P units to the CU.

(21) This embodiment includes the following configuration.
After the gaming device transmits a command for instructing subtraction of points to the gaming machine, and before receiving a response to the command, a process for reestablishing a communication connection with the gaming machine In the process of re-establishing the communication connection, it is determined whether or not the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has reached the gaming machine based on the data transmitted from the gaming machine side. The command transmission means for canceling the instruction for subtracting the point by the command when the arrival determination means determines that the command for instructing the subtraction of the point has arrived. In order to cancel the point subtraction instruction by the command for instructing the subtraction of the points. When the command is received, whether the score has already been subtracted based on the command for instructing the subtraction of the score, or if the score is not subtracted due to lack of the score, The score corresponding to the cancellation amount of the subtraction instruction is added to the score stored in the score storage means.

  (22) In the present embodiment, a signal requesting the end of the game is input to the CU by operating the return button 322. However, the CU may be configured to be able to input a signal requesting the end of the game from a management computer or the like.

(23) The CU and the P stand may be connected so as to be communicable wirelessly instead of wired connection.
(24) By providing the function of the payout control unit 17 in the main control board 16, the payout control unit 17 may not be provided in the pachinko machine 2.

  (25) The payout control unit 17 performs control for stopping the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter stored on the pachinko machine 2 side becomes zero. However, the payout control unit 17 may execute the control when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value other than zero. For example, the player can specify and input the predetermined value in advance using a predetermined operation switch of the gaming machine. The payout controller 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 when the game ball counter reaches a predetermined value designated by the player. Thereby, the player can automatically stop the game when the remaining number of game balls reaches the number of balls designated in advance.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, the presentation unit 50 is provided on the pachinko machine 2 side and various displays are performed by the display unit 54. However, in the pachinko machine 20 that does not include the presentation unit 50, There may be. In that case, even if a command including an operation instruction such as ON during card insertion processing, ON during addition display, ON during calculation display, ON during clear display is transmitted to the P base 2, Display control according to the command is not performed, and only the display on the CU side is displayed.

  (27) In the possession ball sharing process shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the stock card stocked in the CU is used for the card B ejected for split transfer (share ball possession) to others. Instead, the card B to be transferred to another person is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309 from the outside of the CU, and the ball for split transfer (shareball sharing) is recorded and discharged to the inserted card B. You may make it do. In that case, on the display screen of the ball sharing processing status shown in FIGS. 92 to 95, between the discharging process of the own card as the first process and the discharging process of the shared card as the second process, A shared card insertion process is added.

  (28) In the holding ball sharing process shown in FIG. 87, the visitor card B is first inserted to start the game. Instead, the player inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 302 of the CU. A game may be started. In that case, the transfer card B used for sharing the ball is taken out from the card stock section in the CU and discharged in association with the shared points, and the player is associated with the number of game balls at the end of the game. The card returned to the card may be taken out from the card stock unit in the CU and discharged. In addition, after the game is started by inserting banknotes, the number of game balls at that time may be associated with the card taken out from the card stock unit when the number of game balls is generated due to the winning. In this case, when the number of game balls fluctuates with the game, the number of game balls associated with the card is similarly varied. Then, when the operation of sharing the ball is performed, the number of game balls associated with the card is changed to the shared points, the card is discharged as a transfer card, and taken out from the card stock section again. You may make it match | combine the remainder which subtracted the share score for the said game ball | bowl from the said number of game balls.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, when the CU resumes the connection sequence, it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed in a state other than waiting (see FIG. 40), and the communication is disconnected by transmitting a communication disconnection request. When it is determined that the connection sequence is resumed after the determination, or when it is determined that the SQN backed up by the CU and the SQN transmitted from the P unit do not match, the reconnection illustrated in FIG. 39 instead of FIG. 29 is performed. Run the connection sequence. However, in addition to them or instead of any of them, a signal (for example, recovery data) indicating that a communication connection is disconnected from the P unit during the game (when not in standby) with the restart of the connection sequence. Etc.) may be transmitted to the CU, and the CU may execute the connection sequence at the time of reconnection in FIG. 39 based on the signal.

  (30) In the game ball split transfer (money ball sharing) process shown in FIGS. 86 to 88, the split transfer is performed on the condition that the current game ball is determined to be more than the predetermined number than the game balls to be split transferred. You may make it accept | permit. In the case of FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, for example, split transfer (shareball sharing) is permitted on the condition that it is determined that the current game ball is 200 balls or more than the split game balls. In the case of FIG. 88, the divided transfer (share ball sharing) on condition that it is determined that the value obtained by subtracting the collateral ball (= 200) from the current game ball is 100 balls or more than the game ball to be divided and transferred. Is acceptable.

  (31) In the process of split transfer (share ball sharing) of game balls shown in FIGS. 86 and 88, the number of game balls in the game is the card B until the card B is discharged after the card A is discharged. If the number of possessed balls to be written and transferred is no longer reached, control is performed so that the sharing of the score is canceled and the card B is not ejected.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, the unit of the number of game balls and the number of possession balls is the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the units of both may be different. For example, the number of game balls “1” may be converted to “10” when converted to the number of balls.

  (33) In FIG. 87, when a return operation at the end of a game is performed, a card (stock card) stocked in the card stock part is taken out and the number of game balls is associated with the stock card and discharged. Instead, you have a game hall clerk bring a new card, insert the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309, match the number of game balls, and eject the card. Also good.

  (34) In the above embodiment, two types of cards, a membership card and a visitor card, are shown, but the type of card is not limited to this, and for example, only one type of visitor card may be used.

  (35) Instead of manually clearing RAM by the RAM clear switch 293 shown in FIG. 8, a clock function may be provided so that a RAM clear signal is automatically output when the game hall business start time comes. As described above, the game history data is cleared by the automatically output RAM clear signal.

  (36) In the embodiment described above, in the recovery process for the number of game history balls such as the number of symbol determinations 1, 2, the start ports 1-3, the big winning ports 1, 2, the winning ports 1-4, etc., Although control to match the data is performed, since these game history data are information managed by the P machines, the game history data is basically based on the game history data held by the P machine regardless of the match or mismatch. The CU side game history data may be controlled to be updated. However, the data of the total number of game balls, the total of added balls, and the total of subtracted balls can be matched with the stored data on the CU side.

  (37) In the embodiment described above, the transition to the test hit mode is performed by inserting a test card into the CU. Instead of or in addition to that, a transition command from the upper server 801 or a game room Control may be performed so as to shift to the test hit mode by a remote control operation by a store clerk. Such a transition to the trial hit mode by the remote control operation can be shifted to the trial hit mode by the remote control while waiting for a customer (even during the probability change). And as a test hit mode, you may provide two types, the 1st test hit mode used as a non-business event in a game hall, and the 2nd test hit mode for confirmation after nail adjustment.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, when there are no more game balls (or points) in the test hit mode, a game ball addition command (or points addition command) is sent from the CU side to the P units (or S units). The game balls can be added by adding the game balls (or adding the number of points), but without sending the game ball addition command (or the number of points added command) from the CU side, You may control so that a game can be continued even if a game ball (or number of points) runs out.

(38) The above-mentioned C-ID is composed of fixed code data that does not change. Instead, the C-ID read from the card changes dynamically according to the reading time. An ID code may be used. When the card is inserted into the CU and the CU reads the C-ID, the CU stores the C-ID together with the reading time, and the player is based on both the reading time and the C-ID data. You may comprise so that can be specified. For example, when the CU reads the C-ID, the current time T is input to the card, and the C-ID is encrypted with the T in the card E _T (C-ID), and the E _T (C-ID) And T are output as a pair. The CU decodes the E _T (C-ID) with T and extracts the C-ID by performing D _T (E _T (C-ID)).

  (39) In the above-described embodiment, the player is specified based on the C-ID, and it is determined whether or not the same player is playing a game. The biometric information reading means for reading the biometric information such as the fingerprint or vein of the player is provided on the CU or P base, and the identity of the player is determined based on the biometric information reading means read by the biometric information reading means. Biometric authentication may be employed.

  (40) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the data stored in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the backup data storage unit when the card is returned. Instead, the current player game history data storage unit is switched to the backup data storage unit and the backup data storage unit is switched to the current player game history data storage unit when the card is returned. You may control as follows. In this case, the storage data of the switched current player game history data storage unit is displayed on the display 54.

  (41) In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 8 and the like, the C-ID match determination is performed on the P platform side, but the match determination may be performed on the CU side. In that case, the C-ID stored in the backup data storage unit of the P stand 2 is transmitted to the CU side, and the C-ID recorded on the inserted card is received on the CU side that received the C-ID. , And the coincidence between the read C-ID and the C-ID transmitted from the P platform is determined. When the CU 3 determines that the C-IDs do not match, it transmits a clear command to the P unit 2. In the P base 2 that has received the clear command, the data stored in the backup data storage unit is deleted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in CU3 that the C-IDs match, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit is returned to the current player game history data storage unit for the P unit 2 Command information for taking over the game history data and adding and updating new game history data is transmitted from the CU 3 to the P unit 2. The command information may be code data such as takeover command information or the like, but the backup game history data for taking over, that is, the game history data stored in the backup data storage unit of the P unit 2 is stored on the CU side. In addition, the backed up game history data may be transmitted to the P unit 2 as takeover command information. In that case, the backup data storage unit in the P units is not necessary.

  (42) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. Although what is performed on the P side is shown, this identity determination may be performed on the P platform side. In other words, a gaming machine having the following configuration may be used.

It is possible to play with points and has a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that launches game media into the game area and adds points using the game value owned by the player. A game machine in which points are added according to the occurrence of
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
A score storage means for storing the score;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means for performing control to transmit the update information capable of specifying the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device;
Player specifying information storage means for storing player specifying information for specifying a player performing a game;
When communication is started by connecting to the gaming device, the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is the same as the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means for determining whether or not a player is identified,
A gaming machine comprising: an identical determination result transmission control unit configured to perform control for transmitting a determination result by the identical determination unit from the communication unit to the gaming device.

  (43) In the above-described embodiment, the C-ID is included in the operation instruction and the operation response for transmission / reception. When a different C-ID is transmitted from the P platform to the CU during the transmission / reception, it may be determined that there is an error, and control is performed so that the addition ball count and the subtraction ball count are not updated on the CU side. . When controlled in this way, there is a risk that the C-ID may be temporarily distorted due to noise during transmission and reception of commands and responses. In this case, for example, if the C-ID included in the operation response received on the CU side is different from the C-ID transmitted as a command, the CU side determines that there is an error and transmits the error. The addition / subtraction update control is not executed based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the motion response. As a result, when a C-ID that is not distorted by noise is transmitted from the P base side in the next command and response transmission / reception, the operation response is determined even though it is determined that the C-ID matches and is normal. The number of game balls (total number of game balls) included in the CU and the total number of game balls stored in the CU are inconsistent. In the above embodiment, in such a case, the CU stores A command for correcting the number of game balls to be transmitted is transmitted to the P units, and the number of game balls stored in the P units is rewritten to the number of stored balls on the CU side. As a result, the number of game balls of P units is rewritten to the previous number of old game balls updated based on the previous response in which the C-ID goes wrong due to noise, and the correct number of game balls is incorrect. There are cases where the number of balls is rewritten.

  In order to eliminate such an inconvenience, even if the C-ID included in the response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, it is not determined by only one response, but several times (for example, twice) It is desirable to control so as to determine that there is an abnormality only when the C-ID in the response subsequently goes wrong with the C-ID on the CU side. The following two methods are conceivable as specific methods for realizing this.

  First, as a first method, when the C-ID included in the first response is different from the C-ID on the CU side, the next command is sent directly to the P units without adding and updating SQN. Send. Then, in the P platform, as described based on FIG. 55, it is determined that the response has not reached the CU, and the previous transmission data is added to the added ball number and the added ball number is added. Control to transmit to the CU as the next response is performed. In the CU, if the C-ID included in the next response matches the C-ID on the CU side, the CU determines that the C-ID is appropriate, and adds the previous transmission data to the added number of balls. Based on the update control of the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to update to the correct number of game balls. On the other hand, if the C-ID included in the next response is also different from the C-ID on the CU side, the C-ID is determined to be abnormal because the C-ID is different twice in succession. Instead of updating the number of game balls based on the number of added balls or the number of subtracted balls included in the response, a predetermined error processing control may be performed thereafter.

  As a second method, the CU side adds and updates separately during C-ID mismatch, and when the correct C-ID is received, the separately added and updated data is used as the total number of game balls. Batch addition update.

The configuration of the modified example described above is summarized as follows.
The gaming device
A score storage means for storing the score;
Game device side identification information storage means for recording predetermined identification information;
Game device side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the game device side identification information storage means to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
A specific means for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in games and the occurrence of winnings,
Information transmitting means for transmitting update information capable of specifying the amount of change to the gaming device;
Gaming machine side identification information storage means for storing identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming apparatus side identification information transmission control means;
A gaming machine side identification information transmission control means for performing control to periodically transmit the identification information stored in the gaming machine side identification information storage means to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Information receiving means for receiving the update information;
A score update means for updating the score stored in the main score storage means based on the update information;
Consistency to determine whether or not the identification information transmitted under the control of the gaming machine side identification information transmission control means and the identification information stored in the gaming apparatus side identification information storage means are matched. A determination means;
The determination result of the alignment determination means includes an abnormality determination means for performing an abnormality determination when it is determined that the alignment is not continuously performed a predetermined number of times,
The point update means includes:
When abnormality determination is performed by the abnormality determination means, the score is updated corresponding to the total amount of change of the score in the gaming machine during the period determined to be inconsistent by the alignment determination means. Don't do it,
When it is determined that the consistency determination unit is normal based on the identification information transmitted before the abnormality determination by the abnormality determination unit is performed, the alignment determination unit determines that there is a mismatch. The points are updated based on the total amount of change of the points in the gaming machine during the period.

  According to such a configuration, even if identification information that is temporarily distorted due to noise or the like is received despite proper identification information being transmitted, it is erroneously determined as abnormal in the gaming device, and updated information is obtained. It is possible to prevent inconvenience caused by not updating the score based.

  (44) In the above-described embodiment, the game history data is re-totaled in the trial hit mode when the operation button icon such as the re-total button displayed on the display 312 is touched. Instead of or in addition, it may be controlled to re-total the game history data in the trial hit mode by detecting the opening of the glass door 6.

  (45) The contents of the above-described embodiment can be applied not only to pachinko gaming machines but also to gaming machines such as slot machines.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine type game machine is a player-owned valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or the like specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium (card). A gaming machine that has a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables the number of stored balls) to be used for gaming, and that launches gaming media into the gaming area ( Pachinko machine 2).

  In other words, with a pachinko machine type game machine, it is possible to play with points, the game medium is launched into the game area, and the game value owned by the player is increased. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that includes a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that uses and adds points, and that points are added according to the occurrence of a prize.

  On the other hand, a slot machine type gaming machine is a player-owned valuable value prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls specified by recording information received on a recording medium (card). Including a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming, and a variable display device that can change the display state. The game can be started by setting, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed, so that one game is completed, and the derived display result is a predetermined specific display result. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S) that can sometimes win a prize.

  In other words, a slot machine type gaming machine is capable of playing with points and a communication unit that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the player's own gaming value. (S-unit communication control unit 82) and a variable display device whose display state can be changed, the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is When one game is completed by the derivation display, a winning can be generated when the derivation-displayed display result becomes a specific display result determined in advance, and points are added according to the occurrence of the winning. This is a gaming machine (slot machine 2S).

  (46) In the above-described embodiment, as described in FIGS. 7 and 146, the number of game balls and points stored by the CU and the number of game balls and points sent from the gaming machine The CU determines whether or not they match, and if they do not match, a correction command is sent to match the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side with the number of game balls and points on the CU side. C-ID matching / mismatching may be further added as a determination criterion. For example, even if the number of game balls or points stored by the CU does not match the number of game balls or points sent from the gaming machine, it will not send a correction command by itself, and from the gaming machine When the CU determines that the transmitted C-ID does not match the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command is transmitted. As a result, when an abnormality such as noise that causes C-ID data to be distorted occurs, a correction command is transmitted to correct the number of game balls and points on the gaming machine side to correct values. Can do.

  Further, when the CU determines that the C-ID transmitted from the gaming machine matches the C-ID stored in the CU, a correction command may be transmitted. In this way, if there is an abnormality that the number of game balls or points on the gaming machine side is out of order when the player is not changing, a correction command is sent to the number of game balls or points on the game machine side. It can be corrected to the correct value.

  (47) In the above embodiment, the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 erases the oldest stored data among the stored data for 10 days in the P game history data storage unit, and the remaining 9 days. One minute of stored data is shifted and stored in the storage area of the old day one by one. As a condition for executing the shift control of this P game history data, it is a time zone before the opening of the game hall. It may be added. That is, the shift control of the P game history data is executed on the condition that the switch operation of the RAM clear switch 293 is performed in a predetermined time zone before the game hall is opened.

  (48) In the above-described embodiment, the CU communication control unit authentication sequence is executed between the main control unit 323 and the CU communication control unit 80. In addition, the LSIs 799 and 999 of the gaming machine are You may perform between the control boards 16 and 116, between the payout control parts 17 and 117, and the P stand communication control parts 81 and 82.

  (49) In the modification described with reference to FIGS. 149 and 150, the clear command transmitted from the hall management computer 1 is input to the CU 3, but instead or in addition to the CU 3, A process of clearing the game history data described above may be performed by providing a clear switch and operating the clear switch. Further, the game history data may be cleared by a remote control operation. Specifically, when the attendant of the game hall performs a clear operation by pointing the remote control at the IR photosensitive unit 320 of the CU3, the IR photosensitive unit 320 receives the operation signal (infrared ray) and clears the game history data. Do.

  (50) In the above embodiment, a slot machine that does not require any physical game medium such as a medal in the game is described as an example of the point-slot type slot machine. When such a slot machine is employed, a game medium is not required, and therefore it is not necessary to provide a game medium transport path or a game medium reservoir in the slot machine. As a result, the structure of the slot machine can be simplified, and the slot machine can be reduced in size or cost.

  However, in place of such a slot machine, a slot machine that adopts a scoring system and updates the scoring in conjunction with moving a game medium such as a medal or game ball in a predetermined direction is adopted. It is also possible to do.

  For example, a circulation path is provided for enclosing a large number of game media in the slot machine and circulating the enclosed game media in a predetermined direction. In addition, you may provide the discharge | emission / input part which can discharge | emit / input game media as needed in the predetermined location of the circulation path.

  When the point addition condition is satisfied, the slot machine adds the number of game media corresponding to the number of points to be added from the plurality of game media in the circulation path to the second from the predetermined first location in the circulation path. While moving to a location, the stored score is added and updated, and a response command for adding the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU adds and updates the stored number of points.

  Further, when the score subtraction condition is satisfied, the slot machine, from among the plurality of game media in the circulation path, the number of game media corresponding to the number of score points to be subtracted from the second location in the circulation path. While moving to one location, the stored score is subtracted and updated, and a response command for subtracting the score is transmitted to the CU. The CU subtracts and updates the stored number of points.

  Even when the subtraction condition is satisfied, the game medium may be moved from the first location to the second location as in the case where the addition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the game medium may be moved only when the addition condition is satisfied, or the game medium may be moved only when the subtraction condition is satisfied.

  Also, the game medium moving between the first location and the second location can be seen through in order for the player to recognize that the points have been updated in response to the movement of the game media. It is desirable to provide the see-through part at a predetermined position on the front side of the slot machine.

  Further, if a plurality of movement paths for moving the game medium are provided between the first place and the second place, the possession to be updated when the addition condition or the subtraction condition is satisfied once. Game media corresponding to the number of points updated when the number of points updated is large (for example, when the number of payouts based on winnings is large, when the number of additions based on a lending command is large, or when the number of bets is a MAX value) Can be moved quickly. As a result, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable operation such that the movement of the game medium continues in spite of the end of the update display of the points.

  Further, if the first place and the second place are arranged so that the upper part and the lower part in the vertical direction are in a relationship, the game medium is naturally moved from the first place to the second place by its own weight. It can be dropped, and the moving mechanism of the game medium can be simplified. In this case, it is assumed that the game medium is allowed to flow from the first location to the first location in both addition and subtraction update of the points. Alternatively, the game medium may be allowed to flow from the first location to the first location only in one of the addition and subtraction update of the score. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide a flow-down path for addition update of the holding point and a flow-down path for update of the subtraction of the holding point separately, and provide a perspective window for addition update visual recognition and a perspective window for subtraction update visual recognition, respectively. Good.

  In particular, when a game ball is used as the game medium, the game medium can be circulated more smoothly than when a medal is used because the game medium is spherical. As the game ball, it is conceivable to adopt a pachinko ball that is normally used in a game store. In this case, for example, if the pachinko ball 5 balls corresponds to the value of one medal of the slot machine (value of the score = 1), when the score is updated, the updated score 5 Double pachinko balls will be moved between the first location and the second location. A pachinko ball visually recognized through a see-through window provided between the first location and the second location is a “show ball” exclusively used to indicate to the player that the points have been updated. Will function as.

  (51) In the above-described embodiment, when the payout control unit 17 detects that the shot ball detection switch 903 is in the on state for a specified time or longer (for example, 2 seconds or longer), the number of game balls that are replenished However, it is determined that an error has occurred that is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 50). However, there are too many game balls and the on-state is not maintained. It is also possible that the detection signal is continuously output. Therefore, the light projecting / receiving portion of the light projecting / receiving method launching ball detection switch 903 may be configured to be slightly shifted to the side from the center line through which the balls of the collection ball passing path 901 pass. When configured in this way, light will be projected at a position slightly shifted from the center line of the game ball that has become a rosary connected shape due to too many encapsulated balls, and the light will be received, As the game ball is fired and moves downward, a detection signal that pulsates from the firing ball detection switch 903 is input to the payout control unit 17, and based on the input of the pulsation signal, the payout control unit 17 Control may be performed so that it is determined that an abnormality in which the number of encapsulated balls is too large has occurred rather than a failure of the fired ball detection switch 903.

  (52) In the embodiment described above, the launch unit 38 uses the motor (the launch motor 18) as a drive source, but instead, a solenoid may be used as the drive source. In this case, the origin position sensor may detect the plunger position when the solenoid is in a non-excited state, and the dispensing control unit 17 may determine the various errors described above based on the detection output of the origin sensor. Good.

  In the above-described embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, the “customer waiting state is 60 seconds abnormally elapsed?” Step in S101 and the “card inserted?” In S102 (or “scoring point = 0?” However, instead of only the step of “Sustained customer waiting state for 60 seconds?” In S101, or “Card is being inserted?” In S102 (or “ It may be only the step of the holding point = 0?)).

  (53) In the embodiment described above, by operating the ball switch 922 provided on the relay substrate 921, the pachinko ball is loaded by driving the conveyance motor 40 when the pachinko machine 2 is installed, or the ball removal motor 195a is driven to remove the encapsulated ball, but instead of or in addition to this, the IR light emitted from the card unit 3 is generated by operating a remote control owned by a game attendant. When the unit 320 receives light, a predetermined command is transmitted from the card unit 3 to the pachinko machine 2, and the payout control unit 17 of the pachinko machine 2 receiving the command drives the transport motor 40 when the pachinko machine 2 is installed. Alternatively, the pachinko balls may be loaded, or the encapsulated balls may be removed by driving the removal motor 195a.

  (54) In the above-described embodiment, the session key (communication key) is generated using the authentication key and the time. Instead, a random number is generated and generated using the random number and the time. May be. When the session key is generated without using the authentication key in this way, even if the session key is detected, the inconvenience of deriving the authentication key from the session key can be prevented.

  In the following, effects obtained from various means included in the present embodiment and combinations of various means are listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine that can be played with points, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) to which points are added according to the occurrence of winnings, and a player's gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, Or a gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that is connected to the gaming machine (connector wiring with connectors 330 and 20) and adds points by using the number of stored balls)
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for gaming machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in the number of points (addition balls, subtraction balls) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings,
Update information (operation response including the number of added balls and the number of subtracted balls) that can identify the amount of change, and information transmitting means (payout control unit 17) for transmitting to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Main possession point storage means for storing points (RAM that stores “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) that updates the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

(1-2) The gaming machine
Sub-point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points,
Sub-points update means (payout control unit 17) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage means according to the amount of change,
The gaming machine performs game control based on the points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means (when the game ball counter reaches 0, the driving of the hitting ball motor 18 is stopped),
The gaming device, when a signal for requesting the end of the game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, holds the points stored in the main holding point storage means as the points at the end of the game. Point determination means (main control unit 323; FIG. 48) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-3) The gaming device
A point display unit (display 312) for displaying the points stored by the main point storage means;
Including instruction information transmission means (CU communication control unit 80) for transmitting information (operation instruction) for instructing transmission of the update information to the gaming machine,
The gaming machine is
Including instruction information receiving means (payout control unit 17) for receiving information for instructing transmission of the update information;
Each time the information transmission means receives information for instructing transmission of the update information, the information transmission means updates the amount of change (current ball related information) from the previous reception to the current reception Information is transmitted (values of the added ball counter and the subtracted ball counter in FIG. 7, FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, in response to an instruction from the gaming device, update information indicating the amount of change with respect to the time when the previous update information was transmitted is transmitted from the gaming machine to the gaming device one by one. . Therefore, the gaming device can manage the latest score by updating the score with the update information transmitted one by one.

(1-4) The information transmission means transmits the score (the value of the game ball counter) stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device (the value of the game ball counter in FIG. 7). , FIG. 46),
The gaming device is:
Including determination means for determining consistency between the points stored in the main holding point storage means and the points stored in the sub-point storage means (FIG. 7; determining whether the number of game balls matches) ,
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

(1-5) The instruction information transmission means has the holding points stored in the main holding point storage means when the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent. Sending correction information (communication start request including game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) to the point to the gaming machine,
The instruction information transmission means transmits the correction information to the gaming machine (transmission of communication start request including game ball correction ON and number of game balls to P units),
The gaming machine corrects the holding points stored in the auxiliary holding point storage means based on the correction information (payout control unit 17; game ball number ON and game ball number ON) Compensation according to

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-6) The gaming machine is a ball game machine (pachinko machine 2),
The information transmitting means sequentially transmits the update information at intervals (FIG. 26; once every 200 ms) shorter than the game ball launch time interval (one shot at 0.6 s).

  According to such a configuration, since the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, the amount of change in the point notified by the update information is made as small as possible. As a result, it is possible to notify the game device of the amount of change in the points in detail.

  (1-7) The gaming machine determines the remaining number of points necessary for continuing the game based on the remaining points stored in the sub-point storage unit (payout control). Part 17, FIG. 47).

  According to such a configuration, when the update information is not transmitted in time for determination, the points stored on the gaming device side and the actual points (the number of game balls stored on the gaming machine side) Even if there is a deviation between the two, a determination based on the actual score can be made.

(1-8) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing game prohibition to the gaming machine (operation instruction in FIGS. 50 to 52 (with prohibition request)),
When the game machine receives the information for instructing the game prohibition, the game prohibiting means (the payout control unit 17 stops the driving of the hitting ball launching motor 18, 50-51 "game prohibition").

  According to such a configuration, the prohibition of gaming by the gaming machine can be controlled on the gaming device side.

(1-9) The instruction information transmitting means transmits information for instructing to set the value of the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to an initial value to the gaming machine (FIG. 48, 82 (operation instruction (with clear request)),
In the gaming machine, the sub-point storage means stores the information based on the fact that the instruction to set the value of the points stored in the sub-point storage means to the initial value is received. 48. FIG. 82 (the payout control unit 17 initializes the value of the game ball counter to 0) that includes a score initializing means for setting the score value to an initial value.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored in the gaming machine can be instructed to be initialized on the gaming device side.

(1-10) Provided with a connection portion (connector 330) for communication with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) that can be played with points, and that is awarded in accordance with the occurrence of a prize, A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A score storage means for storing the score (RAM for storing “the number of game balls”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving update information from the gaming machine that can specify the amount of change in points according to the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information.

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  (1-11) When a signal requesting the end of a game (an operation signal for the return button 322) is input, the score that is determined by the score stored in the score storage means as the score at the end of the game The confirmation means (main control unit 323; FIG. 48) is included.

  According to such a configuration, since the points at the end of the game are determined on the gaming device side, there is no need to provide a point determination function on the gaming machine side, and the cost of the gaming machine is reduced as much as possible. Can be suppressed.

(1-12) When a score updated on the gaming machine side is received from the gaming machine in response to use in the game and the occurrence of a prize, the received score and the score storage means Including determination means for determining consistency with the stored points (FIG. 7; determining match of the number of game balls),
When the determination means determines that there is a mismatch, predetermined mismatch processing (error notification and recovery processing is performed by the display 312 and data correction request Bit2 is “1” (game ball correction ON) A communication start request including data on the number of game balls stored in the CU is transmitted to the P units, and the storage of the number of game balls in the P units is corrected to match the number of game balls of the CU.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to detect an abnormality in which the points stored on the gaming machine side do not match the points stored on the gaming device side. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is possible to deal with the processing when an inconsistency occurs.

  (1-13) The correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the score storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determination means It includes correction information transmission means (transmission of game ball correction ON and the number of game balls) for transmission to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(1-14) The gaming apparatus provides information for instructing transmission of the update information at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval (one shot at 0.6 s) in the gaming machine (FIG. 26; 200 ms). To the gaming machine in turn,
The score update means sequentially updates the score stored in the score storage means based on the update information sequentially received (main control unit 323, FIG. 46).

  According to such a configuration, the update information is transmitted at an interval shorter than the game ball firing time interval, so that the gaming measure has a detailed reflection of the change in the points on the gaming machine side. Point management is possible.

(2-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (FIG. 41; transmitting an operation instruction including a C-ID after inserting the card) CU communication control unit 80, S3) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Player identification information storage means for storing the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means (FIGS. 8 and 147; current player game history data storage section of display effect control section 292) )When,
Based on the fact that the player identification information has been transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the player identification information transmitted and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means The same determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) which performs the same determination process which determines whether the same player is specified by information is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. In the gaming machine, the player specifying information is stored, and then, when the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means is transmitted from the gaming device, the transmitted player Since the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the specific information and the already stored player specifying information, the identity of the previous player and the current player is the same It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

(2-2) In the gaming system of (2-1), the gaming device records the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Medium discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging the card in FIG. 48);
The gaming machine collects game history data for each player specified by the player specifying information transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means (FIGS. 8, 147; A normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291 and a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is configured such that after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means and transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means. On the basis of what has been determined, the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that Y is determined in FIG. 42; S9) and is determined to be the same. It may be configured to include takeover counting means (FIG. 42; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (2-3) In the gaming system of (2-2) above, on the condition that it is determined by the same determination means that they are not the same (FIG. 42; on the condition that N is determined in S9) ) And a game history data erasure unit (FIG. 42; S15) for erasing the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage unit. May be.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data corresponding to the previous player is deleted, so the game history data of the previous player Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the player this time.

(2-4) In the game system according to (2-2) or (2-3), the game history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing.
End data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game;
In response to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game ( 8 and 147; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the game data storage means as game history data of the player who is playing the game (FIG. 8, FIG. 147, FIG. 42; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

(2-5) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-4) above, the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. And
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as the player specifying information (FIG. 41; C− of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the ID).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(2-6) In the game system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-5), the game device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 49) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( 42; including S1, S2, S5),
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without an operation for interrupting the game. Based on this, the same determination process is performed (FIG. 42; N → S3 → S8, S9 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (2-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-1) to (2-6), the gaming machine performs the same control for transmitting the determination result by the same determining means to the gaming device. The determination result transmission control means (FIG. 42; S7, S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, the determination result of the identity of the player can be grasped on the gaming device side.

  (2-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (2-2) to (2-4), the takeover counting means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player is the recording medium receiving unit. New game history data is accumulated and totaled for the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same under the condition that they are accepted (FIGS. 8, 147; only in the case of C-ID of the membership card) It may be configured to store the current player game history data and add the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(2-9) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (FIG. 6; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (FIG. 41; transmitting an operation instruction including a C-ID after inserting the card) CU communication control unit 80, S3) of FIG.
The player specifying information transmission control means performs control to transmit the player specifying information to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player (C-ID to P machines). Control to transmit).

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player who performs the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. Since the player identification information is transmitted to the gaming machine as information for causing the gaming machine to determine the identity of the player, the gaming machine stores the player identification information sent earlier, When the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is transmitted from the gaming apparatus, the same game is determined by the transmitted player identification information and the already stored player identification information. It is possible to perform the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified, and it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same regardless of being different players. Think of it as a player It is possible to prevent the convenience.

(2-10) In the gaming machine according to (2-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as player specifying information (FIG. 41; C-ID of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the data.

  According to such a configuration, since the recording medium identification ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read as the player specifying information, the player inputs the player specifying information. The player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium for playing the game, and the player is forced to input the player specifying information separately from the reception of the recording medium. Can be prevented.

(2-11) In the gaming apparatus according to (2-9) or (2-10), recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 48);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 49) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( 42; including S1, S2, S5),
The player specifying information transmission control means is configured to read the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without performing an operation of causing the game to be in the middle stage. It may be configured to perform control to transmit information to the gaming machine (FIG. 42; S3).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

(2-12) In the gaming device according to any one of (2-9) to (2-11), the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium A recording medium discharging means for discharging (card reader / writer 327 for discharging a card in FIG. 48);
After the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means after the recording medium is discharged and the player specifying information transmission control means transmits the player specifying information to the gaming machine, Identity to receive from the gaming machine an identity determination result between a player who has played a game before discharging the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means and a player who will play a game after discharging the recording medium The determination result receiving means (FIG. 42; CU communication control unit 80 that receives the information transmitted in S15 and S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, in order to receive the determination result by the same determination means from the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp the determination result of the identity of the player on the gaming device side.

  (2-13) In the gaming device according to any one of (9) to (12), the player specifying information reading means is configured such that a member recording medium issued to a member player is stored in the recording medium receiving unit. The player specifying information may be read on condition that it is accepted (the C-ID is recorded only on the member recording medium).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to read the player specifying information and perform the same determination process on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium receiving unit.

(2-14) Still another aspect of the present invention is that a player possesses a valuable value (a prepaid balance, a number of possessed balls, etc.) specified by recorded information received on a recording medium (card). Or a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that makes the number of stored balls) usable for gaming,
Player specifying information storage means for receiving and storing player specifying information (C-ID or the like) specifying a player who performs a game (FIGS. 8, 147; current player game history data of display effect control unit 292) Memory)
Same determination means for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the received player specification information and the player specification information stored in the player specification information storage means (FIG. 42). S8, S9).

  According to such a configuration, player specifying information for specifying a player who performs a game is stored, and then the same player is specified by the received player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information. Since the same determination process is performed to determine whether or not, the identity of the previous player and the current player can be determined, and even though they are different players, they are regarded as the same player. Inconvenience can be prevented.

(2-15) In the gaming machine of the above (2-14), game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player specified by the received player specifying information (FIGS. 8, 147; game history) A normal mode processing unit of the data management unit 291 and a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is determined to be the same on condition that the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that it is determined as Y in S9). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 42; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player is included.

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated for the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the previous player and the current player are the same. Therefore, when a player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, it is determined that the player is the same player, and the game history data before leaving the seat is taken over. Thus, cumulative accumulation of game history data becomes possible, and it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history data is interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though they are the same player.

(2-16) In the gaming machine of the above (2-15), the game history data totaling means
In-game data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing.
End data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game;
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; upon receipt of the card return notification, the storage data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same Is switched to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the game data storage means as the game history data of the player who is playing the game (FIG. 8). 147, FIG. 42; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

  (2-17) In the gaming machine of (2-15) or (2-16) above, stored in the player specifying information storage means on condition that the same determination means determines that they are not the same. It may be configured to include game history data erasure means (FIG. 42; S15) for erasing the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the specified player specifying information.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data corresponding to the previous player is deleted, so the game history data of the previous player Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over and collecting the game history data of the player this time.

  (2-18) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2-14) to (2-17) above, the same determination means suspends the game and resumes the game by the player who played the game before the interruption. When the player identification information is received after the recording medium has been ejected without performing the middle stage operation for disabling the game by other players, the same determination process is performed (FIG. 42). N → S3 → S8, S9) in S1.

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (2-19) In the gaming machine of any one of (2-14) to (2-18) above, the same determination result transmission control means for performing control to transmit the determination result by the same determination means to the gaming device ( FIG. 42; S7, S14) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since the determination result by the same determination means is transmitted to the gaming device, the determination result of the identity of the player can be grasped on the gaming device side.

  (2-20) In any one of the above gaming machines (2-15) to (2-17), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the gaming device. The new game history data is accumulated and totaled for the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on the condition (FIGS. 8, 147; current game only in the case of the C-ID of the membership card). The game history data may be stored in the player game history data and the game history may be aggregated).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(3-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is performed by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; current player game history data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means;
The same determination for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means And the same determination means (FIG. 151; S20) for performing processing,
The gaming device transmits to the gaming machine command information indicating that the same determination means determines that they are identical (FIG. 149, FIG. 150, FIG. 151; transmits a command according to S21). ,
The gaming machine performs predetermined processing (FIGS. 149 and 150; processing for returning the game history data in the backup data storage unit to the current player game history data storage unit) based on the reception of the command information.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is the same as the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified is performed, it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same game despite being different players. Can be prevented from being regarded as a person.

(3-2) In the gaming system according to (3-1), the gaming machine is configured to collect game history data for each player (FIGS. 149 and 150; game history data management unit 291). Current player game history data storage unit of the normal mode processing unit and display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means sets a new game history for the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be the same on condition that the command information has been received (FIG. 151; determined to be Y by S22). It may be configured to include a takeover counting means (FIG. 151; S12) for executing a process of accumulating and totaling data as the predetermined process.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

(3-3) In the gaming system according to (3-1) or (3-2), the gaming device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Even after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, game history data storage means for storing the game history data of the player who has played the game before ejecting the recording medium (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392),
The previous player's game history data stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIGS. 149, 150; current command instead of the same command). The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(3-4) In the gaming system according to (3-2), the gaming device records the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium. Medium discharge means (card reader / writer 327 for discharging the card in FIG. 48);
The game history data totaling means is
In-game data storage means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing the game,
End data storage means (FIGS. 149 and 150; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game,
In response to the discharge of the recording medium by the recording medium discharging means, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game ( FIG. 149, FIG. 150: Upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data in the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the same determination means determines that they are the same. Data storage switching means (FIGS. 149, 150, FIG. 151; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined by the same determination means that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored in the in-game data storage means of the player who is playing the game. In order to switch to a state of storing as game history data, in subsequent games, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is taken over, and new game history data is added and updated to be accumulated and stored. Can do.

(3-5) The gaming apparatus, in response to a return operation of the recording medium, records medium ejecting means for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit (the card for card ejection in FIG. 48). Reader / writer 327),
In the gaming machine, when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 151; a different command has been transmitted). The game history data erasure means (FIG. 151; S15) for erasing the game history data of the player who played the game before the recording medium was discharged on the condition that N is determined in S22) May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, when a different player starts playing after the player who has played a game leaves the game history data of the player who has left the seat is erased, the previous player The game history data of a new player can be newly added up without taking over the game history data.

(3-6) In the game system according to any one of (3-1) to (3-5), the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. And
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as the player specifying information (FIG. 41; C− of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the ID).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(3-7) In the game system according to any one of (3-1) to (3-6), the game device includes:
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 49) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, an interruption control means for performing a process of prohibiting a game by another player until the game is resumed by the player who has played the game before the interruption ( 42; including S1, S2, S5),
The same determination means transmits the player specifying information under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging means without an operation for interrupting the game. Based on what has been done, the same determination process may be performed (FIG. 151; N → S20 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (3-8) In the gaming system according to any one of (3-2) to (3-7), the takeover counting means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player is the recording medium receiving unit. New game history data is accumulated and totaled with respect to the game history data corresponding to the players determined to be the same on the condition that they are accepted (FIGS. 149 and 150; only in the case of the C-ID of the membership card) It may be configured to store the current player game history data and add the game history).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(3-9) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (FIG. 6; CU communication control unit 80) for communicating with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; current player game history data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means;
The same determination means for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means (FIG. 151; S20) )When,
Command information transmission control means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150, FIG. 151; S21) for performing control to transmit command information indicating that the same judgment means has made the same judgment to the gaming machine. .

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means, and the player specifying information is the same as the player specifying information already stored. Since the same determination process for determining whether or not a player is specified is performed, it is possible to determine the identity of the previous player and the current player, and the same game despite being different players. Can be prevented from being regarded as a person.

(3-10) In the gaming machine according to (3-9), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium,
The player specifying information reading means reads the recording medium identifying ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit as player specifying information (FIG. 41; C-ID of the inserted card). The card reader / writer 327 may read the data.

  According to such a configuration, since the recording medium identification ID recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read as the player specifying information, the player inputs the player specifying information. The player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium for playing the game, and the player is forced to input the player specifying information separately from the reception of the recording medium. Can be prevented.

(3-11) In the gaming apparatus according to (3-9) or (3-10), recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 48);
Even after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, game history data storage means for storing the game history data of the player who has played the game before ejecting the recording medium (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; the current player game history data storage unit of the data storage unit 392),
The previous player's game history data stored in the game history data storage means may be transmitted to the gaming machine as the command information (FIGS. 149, 150; current command instead of the same command). The game history a stored in the player game history data storage unit may be transmitted).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(3-12) In the gaming apparatus according to (3-9) to (3-11) above, a recording for discharging the recording medium received by the recording medium reception unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium Medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting the card in FIG. 48);
Game interruption operation accepting means (IR photosensitive unit 320 for accepting interruption operation (remote control operation) in FIG. 49) for accepting an operation to interrupt the game;
When an operation for interrupting a game is accepted by the game interruption operation accepting means, a process of controlling to a suspended state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by the player who had played the game before the interruption. Interruption control means to perform (FIG. 151; S1, S2, S5),
In the same determination unit, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading unit after the recording medium is discharged by the recording medium discharging unit without an operation of interrupting the game. The same determination processing may be performed based on (FIG. 151; N → S20 in S1).

  According to such a configuration, when the player leaves the seat due to small use etc., it is possible to enter an interrupted state in which a game by another player is prohibited until the game is resumed by performing the interrupt operation. . However, since the same determination process is performed when the player returns and starts playing without performing such an interruption operation, the identity of the previous player and the current player is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  (3-13) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (3-9) to (3-12), the player specifying information reading means is configured such that the member recording medium issued to a member player records the recording medium. The player specifying information may be read on the condition that it is received by the medium receiving unit (the C-ID is recorded only on the member recording medium).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to read the player specifying information and perform the same determination process on condition that the recording medium for members is received by the recording medium receiving unit.

(4-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming is provided, and gaming is performed by launching gaming media in the gaming area. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S),
Game history data totaling means for totalizing game history data for each player (FIGS. 149 and 150; normal mode processing unit of game history data management unit 291 and current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) When,
Game history data storage means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; current player game history data storage section and backup data storage section of the game data storage section 392) for storing the game history data aggregated by the game history data aggregation means. Including
The game history data totaling means is based on the condition that command information (same command) indicating that it is the same player has been received from the gaming device (FIG. 151; Y is determined in S22). Inheritance counting means (FIG. 151; S12) for accumulating and totaling new game history data with respect to the game history data stored in the history data storage means is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (4-2) In the gaming machine of (4-1), when the game is resumed after the recording medium is ejected, the command information is not transmitted from the gaming device (FIG. 151; difference Game history data erasure means for erasing the game history data of the player who was playing the game before the recording medium was discharged on condition that the command was transmitted and N was determined in S22) (FIG. 151; S15) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the previous player is transmitted to the gaming machine. The game history data of the current player can be accumulated and totaled with respect to the received game history data, so that the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns again to resume the game. Therefore, it is possible to accumulate the game history data by taking over the game history data before leaving after being determined to be the same player, and the game history data before and after leaving the seat despite being the same player. The inconvenience of being interrupted can be prevented.

(4-3) In the gaming machine of the above (4-1) or (4-2), the gaming history data totaling means includes:
In-game data storage means (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data of the player who is playing the game,
End data storage means (FIGS. 149 and 150; backup data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for backing up the game history data of the player who has finished the game,
In response to ejection of the recording medium from the gaming device, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means is backed up by the end data storage means as game history data of the player who has finished the game. (FIG. 149, FIG. 150; upon receipt of the card return notification, the stored data of the current player game history data storage unit is shifted to the backup data storage unit and stored), and the command information is received from the gaming device. Data storage switching means for switching to a state in which the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is stored as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means (FIGS. 149, 150, 151; S12).

  According to such a configuration, when it is determined that the players are the same, the game history data backed up by the end data storage means is used as the game history data of the player who is playing the game by the in-game data storage means. Since the game state is switched to the state to be stored, the game history data stored in the in-game data storage means can be taken over in subsequent games, and new game history data can be added and updated to be accumulated and stored.

  (4-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (4-1) to (4-3), the takeover counting means accepts a member recording medium issued to a member player to the gaming device. On the condition that the game history data is stored, the game history data of the member stored in the game history data storage means is accumulated and accumulated (FIGS. 149, 150; C- Only in the case of ID, the current player game history data is stored and the game history is totaled).

  According to such a configuration, new game history data is accumulated with respect to the game history data corresponding to the player determined to be identical on the condition that the recording medium for the member is received by the recording medium receiving unit. Therefore, the advantage of taking over the game history data can be limited to the member players, and the player can be promoted to become a member.

(5-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a gaming value (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game value owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using (the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and is connected so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
Gaming machine side communication means (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) for communicating with the gaming device;
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, addition number) for identifying the amount of change in points (number of balls to be added, number of balls to be subtracted) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction number counter)
Sub-point storage means for storing points (game ball counter, point counter),
Sub-point update means (payout control unit 17, payout control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage unit according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for performing control to transmit the update information that can specify the amount of change and the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device. , Send an action response containing the number of game balls),
Player identification information storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; current game of display effect control unit 292) that stores player identification information (C-ID or the like) that can identify a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine. Game history data storage unit),
Player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 29, FIG. 29) for controlling to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. 39, FIG. 67 to FIG. 84; transmitting a recovery response including the C-ID),
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information;
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading the player identification information;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started with the connection to the gaming machine The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified by (FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, FIG. 83; C-ID included in the recovery response) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
When the same determination means determines that the points are the same, the score storage control is performed to store the score transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means as the current score in the main possession point storage means. Storage control means (steps indicated by broken lines in FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player read by the player identification information reading means It is determined whether or not the same player is specified based on the specific information. When it is determined that the same player is the same, the stored points on the game machine side are used as the current points to store the main points Therefore, the player specifying information reading means reads the player specifying information so as to continue the game by the same player as the player before the game apparatus is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started. In the case where the game is determined to be the same by the same determination means, the points of the player who played the game before the start of communication are stored in the main point storage means of the game device after the communication is started and taken over. The player is not disadvantaged. It is possible to continue with the game.

  (5-2) In the gaming system of (5-1), the storage control means communicates until a predetermined time (20 minutes) elapses after communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted. On the condition that the starting point is started, the score storage control may be performed (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have elapsed even if it is determined that the C-IDs are the same). .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted, the transmitted score is stored in the main score storage means as the current score. Since the holding point storage control is not performed, for example, it is possible to prevent waste of performing the holding point storage control even when a time far exceeding the replacement work time for replacing with a new gaming device has elapsed.

(5-3) In the gaming system according to (5-1) or (5-2), the information transmission control means uses the update information and the points stored in the sub-point storage means. Perform control to periodically transmit to the gaming device (FIG. 26; every 200 ms),
The gaming device is:
Determining means for determining the consistency between the periodically transmitted score and the score stored in the main score storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 146; determining the match of the number of game balls and score) When,
When the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent, correction information for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the score stored in the main score storage means is the gaming machine. (Send correction command)
The gaming machine corrects the score stored in the secondary score storage unit based on the transmitted correction information (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to the correction instruction command). The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the correction of the number of points according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(5-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that has points added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize ( A gaming device (card unit 3) that includes a CU communication control unit 80) and adds points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
A player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit updates information that can identify the amount of change in points according to the use of a game and the occurrence of a prize, and the possession that is updated on the gaming machine side according to the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize. Point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine (FIG. 46; an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls is received),
The gaming device further includes:
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started after being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. Identical determination means for determining whether or not to be performed (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with
Storage control means for performing a score storage control for storing the score received by the communication unit as a current score in the score storage means when the same determination means determines that they are the same (see FIG. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not a player is specified, and when it is determined that they are the same, in order to store the score stored at the gaming machine side as the current score in the main score storage means, For example, when a gaming device fails and the failed gaming device is replaced with a new gaming device and connected to a gaming machine to initiate communication, the same player as the player who was playing the game at the time of the failure When the player causes the player specifying information reading means to read the player specifying information so as to continue the game, the same determining means determines that they are the same, and the game is performed at the stage before switching to a new gaming device. The game that performed The lifting points are being taken over stored in serving a master point storage means a new gaming device that has been replaced, it is possible the player to continue the game without detriment.

  (5-5) In the gaming machine of the above (5-4), the storage control means communicates until a predetermined time (20 minutes) elapses after communication between the gaming machine and the gaming machine is interrupted. On the condition that the starting point is started, the above-mentioned point storing control is performed (the backup value is not corrected if 20 minutes or more have passed even if it is determined that the C-IDs are the same). .

  According to such a configuration, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the communication between the gaming machine and the gaming device is interrupted, the transmitted score is stored in the main score storage means as the current score. Since the holding point storage control is not performed, for example, it is possible to prevent waste of performing the holding point storage control even when a time far exceeding the replacement work time for replacing with a new gaming device has elapsed.

(5-6) In the gaming machine according to (5-5), the points that are updated on the gaming machine side in accordance with the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize are periodically transmitted from the gaming machine (FIG. 26; Determination means (FIG. 7, FIG. 146; number of game balls and points) for determining the consistency between the received score and the score stored in the score storage means when received every 200 ms) Match)
Control for transmitting to the gaming machine correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the gaming point storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determining means. Correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(6-1) The present invention includes a communication unit that is capable of playing a game with points and that communicates with a gaming device that adds points using the game value owned by the player, and in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which points are added,
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter) for identifying the amount of change in points according to the use in the game and the occurrence of winnings,
A point storage means (game ball counter) for storing points;
A score update means (payout control units 17 and 117) for updating the score stored in the score storage means according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of additional balls, control for transmitting the update information that can identify the amount of change and the score stored in the score storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device) Send a motion response that includes the number of subtraction balls and the number of game balls)
Player specifying information storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; current player game history data storage unit of display effect control unit 292) for storing player specifying information for specifying a player who performs a game;
Commencement of communication with the gaming device as information for determining the identity of the player who plays the game after the connection between the gaming machine and the gaming device and the player who played the game before the connection In this case, player identification information transmission control means (FIGS. 29, 39, and 67) that controls to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means from the communication unit to the gaming device ~ FIG. 84; Sending a recovery response including C-ID).

  According to such a configuration, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player who plays the game after connecting the gaming machine and the gaming device performs the game before the connection. Since the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means is transmitted from the communication unit to the gaming device as information for determining the identity with the player who has been connected, the game is performed after connection. The identity of the player and the player who played the game before the connection can be determined, and the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players can be prevented.

(6-2) In the gaming machine of (6-1), the information transmission control unit sends the update information and the points stored in the point storage unit from the communication unit to the gaming device. Control to send periodically (every 200ms),
When the communication unit determines that there is inconsistency as a result of determining the consistency between the update result of the score based on the update information by the gaming device and the score stored in the score storage means Receiving correction information transmitted from the gaming device (receiving a correction instruction command),
A score correction means for correcting the score stored in the score storage means based on the received correction information (the payout control unit 117 corrects the score according to the correction instruction command); It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(7-1) In the present invention, a game with a score is possible, and a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) to which a score is added according to the occurrence of a prize, and a game value owned by the player A gaming device (card unit 3) that adds points by using (the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and is connected so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with the connectors 330, 20, 220) A gaming system comprising:
The gaming machine is
Specific means (microcomputer for game machine control, addition ball counter, subtraction ball counter, addition number) for identifying the amount of change in points (number of balls to be added, number of balls to be subtracted) depending on the use of the game and the occurrence of winnings Counter, subtraction number counter)
Sub-point storage means for storing points (game ball counter, point counter),
Sub-point update means (payout control unit 17, payout control unit 117) for updating the points stored in the sub-point storage unit according to the amount of change;
Information transmission control means (FIG. 46; number of added balls, number of subtracted balls) for performing control to transmit the update information that can specify the amount of change and the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the gaming device. , Send an action response containing the number of game balls),
Player identification information storage means (FIGS. 149 and 150; current game of display effect control unit 292) that stores player identification information (C-ID or the like) that can identify a player who is playing a game on the gaming machine. Game history data storage unit),
Player identification information transmission control means (FIG. 29, FIG. 29) for controlling to transmit the player identification information stored in the player identification information storage means to the gaming apparatus at the start of communication with the gaming apparatus. 39, FIG. 67 to FIG. 84; transmitting a recovery response including the C-ID),
The gaming device is:
Main point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
Information receiving means (CU communication control unit 80) for receiving the update information;
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the main score storage unit based on the update information;
A player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The player identification information read by the player identification information reading means and the player identification information transmitted by the control of the player identification information transmission control means when communication is started with the connection to the gaming machine The same determination means for determining whether or not the same player is specified by (FIG. 70 to FIG. 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 76, FIG. 79, FIG. 80, FIG. 83; C-ID included in the recovery response) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with the C-ID of the inserted card;
External output control means (FIGS. 70 to 72, FIG. 75, FIG. 75) that performs control to externally output the holding points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means when the same determination means determines that they are not the same. 76, 79, 80, and 83).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not the player is specified. When it is determined that the players are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, that is, the points stored on the gaming machine side are output to the outside. Therefore, by storing and saving the score output externally in the management device or the like, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the score stored and saved by the player.

  (7-2) In the gaming system of (7-1), when the external output control means determines that they are not the same by the same determination means, transmission is performed under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means. The player identification information that has been sent is also output to the outside (in the steps indicated by the broken lines in FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83, the C-ID is also transmitted). May be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information that has been externally output is also stored and held, thereby comparing the player specifying information of the player with the player specifying information stored and held. It is possible to determine the identity of the player, and it is possible to compensate for the loss after confirming the identity of the player.

(7-3) In the gaming system according to (7-1) or (7-2), the information transmission control means uses the update information and the points stored in the sub-point storage means. Perform control to periodically transmit to the gaming device (FIG. 26; every 200 ms),
The gaming device is:
Determining means for determining the consistency between the periodically transmitted score and the score stored in the main score storage means (FIG. 7, FIG. 146; determining the match of the number of game balls and score) When,
When the determination means determines that the inconsistency is inconsistent, correction information for correcting the score stored in the auxiliary score storage means to the score stored in the main score storage means is the gaming machine. (Send correction command)
The gaming machine corrects the score stored in the secondary score storage unit based on the transmitted correction information (the payout control unit 17 corrects the number of game balls according to the correction instruction command). The payout control unit 117 may be configured to include the correction of the number of points according to the correction instruction command.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(7-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a communication unit that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) that can be played with points and that has points added in accordance with the occurrence of a prize ( A gaming device (card unit 3) that includes a CU communication control unit 80) and adds points using a player's own gaming value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls),
A point storage means for storing points (RAM for storing “number of game balls”, RAM for storing “number of points”);
A player specifying information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player specifying information (C-ID or the like) for specifying a player who plays a game with the gaming machine;
The communication unit updates information that can identify the amount of change in points according to the use of a game and the occurrence of a prize, and the possession that is updated on the gaming machine side according to the use of the game and the occurrence of a prize. Point and the player specifying information stored in the gaming machine are received from the gaming machine (FIG. 46; an operation response including the number of added balls, the number of subtracted balls, the number of game balls is received),
The gaming device further includes:
A score update unit (main control unit 323) for updating the score stored in the score storage unit based on the update information received by the communication unit;
When communication is started after being connected to the gaming machine, the same player is specified by the player specifying information read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information received by the communication unit. Identical determination means for determining whether or not to be performed (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83; C-ID included in the recovery response and C-ID of the inserted card) A main control unit 323) for determining the identity with
When the same determination means determines that the points are the same, a holding point external output means (FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80) outputs the holding points received by the communication unit to the outside. , Steps indicated by broken lines in FIG. 83).

  According to such a configuration, since the point management is performed on the gaming device side, it is not necessary to provide the point management function on the gaming machine side, and accordingly, the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed as much as possible. .

  In particular, gaming machines tend to have a shorter replacement cycle in a game arcade than gaming devices in order to be able to provide more highly-oriented games quickly. For that reason, there is an advantage that the running cost of the game hall where the gaming machine is introduced can be reduced by holding the point management function not on the gaming machine side but on the gaming device side to reduce the cost of the gaming machine. is there.

  In addition, when the gaming device is connected to the gaming machine and communication is started, the player identification information transmitted from the gaming device and the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means are the same. It is determined whether or not the player is specified. When it is determined that the players are not the same, the points transmitted by the control of the information transmission control means, that is, the points stored on the gaming machine side are output to the outside. Therefore, by storing and saving the score output externally in the management device or the like, it is possible to compensate for any loss according to the score stored and saved by the player.

  (7-5) In the gaming apparatus of (7-4), the player specifying information received by the communication unit when the holding point external output means is determined not to be the same by the same determination means Are also configured to perform external output control (in the steps indicated by the broken lines in FIGS. 70 to 72, 75, 76, 79, 80, and 83, the C-ID is also transmitted). Also good.

  According to such a configuration, the player specifying information that has been externally output is also stored and held, thereby comparing the player specifying information of the player with the player specifying information stored and held. It is possible to determine the identity of the player, and it is possible to compensate for the loss after confirming the identity of the player.

(7-6) In the gaming device of (7-4) or (7-5) above, the gaming machine uses the gaming machine and updates points on the gaming machine side in response to the occurrence of a prize from the gaming machine. When receiving periodically (FIG. 26; every 200 ms), determination means for determining the consistency between the received score and the score stored in the score storage means (FIGS. 7, 146; Match the number of game balls and points)
Control for transmitting to the gaming machine correction information for correcting the score stored in the gaming machine to the score stored in the gaming point storage means when it is determined as inconsistent by the determining means. Correction information transmission control means (transmission of a correction instruction command) to be performed may be included.

  According to such a configuration, the points stored on the gaming device side and the gaming machine side due to anomalies in the size of the stored points on the gaming machine side due to cheating or other causes Even if the stored score does not match, the score stored on the gaming machine side can be corrected to the score stored on the gaming device side.

(8-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) owned by the player,
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by the execution of the game on the gaming machine (FIGS. 8 and 147; the P game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292 and the S game) History data storage)
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasing means, clear command transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; game history data for sending a clear notification) for controlling to send a clear command to the gaming device. Management unit 291),
The gaming device is:
A game device-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data;
Clear processing means (clear processing section of the game history data management section 291) for performing clear processing of the history display in accordance with a clear command transmitted under the control of the clear command transmission control means.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(8-2) In the gaming system according to (8-1), the gaming history data storage means includes:
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The data of the current storage area may be erased by deleting the data of the oldest storage area and shifting the data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

(8-3) In the gaming system according to (8-1) or (8-2) above, the gaming machine performs control for transmitting gaming data generated during gaming to the gaming device. Means (game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data),
The gaming device is configured to update and store game history data based on game data transmitted under the control of the game data transmission control unit (the P game in the data storage unit 392). Including a history data storage unit and this S game history data storage unit)
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(8-4) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a player performs a game, and is owned by the player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
A game apparatus-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data generated by executing the game in the gaming machine;
The communication unit receives a clear command when at least a part of the game history data stored in the gaming machine is erased (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; the clear transmitted from the game history data management unit 291). Receive notifications),
The gaming apparatus further includes a clear processing means (a clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) that performs a clear process of the history display in accordance with a clear command received by the communication unit.

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(8-5) In the gaming machine according to (8-4), the communication unit receives game data generated during a game of the gaming machine (game data transmitted from the game history data management unit 291). Receive)
The gaming device includes a game history data update storage unit (a game history data storage unit of the P storage game data storage unit 392 or a game unit S of the data storage unit 392) that updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit. A table game history data storage unit),
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(9-1) The present invention includes a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81, S-unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that enables a player's valuable value to be used in a game. A game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game medium is launched to
Game history data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; the P game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing game history data generated by the execution of the game in the gaming machine;
Game history data display means (display 54) for displaying the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
Game history data erasure means (RAM clear switch 292) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means;
When the game history data is erased by the game history data erasure means, a control is performed to transmit a clear command for clearing a history display to be executed based on the game history data in the gaming device to the gaming device. Clear command transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; game history data management unit 291 that transmits a clear notification).

  According to such a configuration, when at least a part of the game history data is erased on the gaming machine side, a clear command is transmitted to the gaming device, and the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side according to the clear command. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

(9-2) In the gaming machine of (9-1), the game history data storage means
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The old storage area data is erased and the data in each storage area is shifted one by one to the old storage area, thereby deleting the current storage area data).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

  (9-3) In the gaming machine of the above (9-1) or (9-2), game data transmission control means (transmitting game data) for performing control for transmitting game data generated during a game to the gaming device The game history data management unit 291) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, the game history data can be updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and the game displayed on the gaming device The history data can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) that enables gaming on the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) owned by the player,
The gaming machine is
Game history data storage means for storing game history data generated by executing a game on the gaming machine (FIGS. 149 and 150; the P-unit game history data storage unit and the S-unit game of the display effect control unit 292) History data storage)
Game history data display means (display 54, liquid crystal display 510) for displaying game history data stored in the game history data storage means,
The gaming device is:
A game device-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data;
When the information (clear command) for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means is received, the history display is cleared (the data storage unit 391). The game history data stored in the base game history data storage unit) and information (clear command) for deleting at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means Clear processing means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 391) for performing control to transmit to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, the history display clear process is performed on the gaming device side in accordance with the information to erase at least a part of the game history data, and the game history data stored in the game history data storage means Since control for transmitting at least part of the information to the gaming machine is performed, at least part of the game history data can be erased on the gaming machine side, and the gaming machine side and the gaming device side can It is possible to prevent wrinkles in the history display.

  (10-2) In the gaming system according to (10-1), the gaming device stores information indicating that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased. It may be configured to include receiving means (FIGS. 6 and 145; external communication unit 324 receiving from the hall management computer 1) for receiving from the management apparatus installed in the hall.

  According to such a configuration, information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means can be simultaneously distributed from a management device to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the work of erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means.

(10-3) In the gaming system according to (10-1) or (10-2), the gaming machine erases at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means. Including history data erasing means (clear processing unit of game history data management unit 291),
The game history data storage means includes
Today's history data storage unit for storing today's game history data (today's storage area within the storage area for 10 days),
Including a past history data storage unit that stores game history data before the previous day (a storage area other than today within a storage area for 10 days),
The game history data erasure means shifts and stores the stored data in the today's data storage unit to the past history data storage unit and deletes the stored data in the today's history data storage unit (1 in the storage area for 10 days). The data of the current storage area may be erased by deleting the data of the oldest storage area and shifting the data of each storage area to the old storage area one by one).

  According to such a configuration, on the gaming machine side, today's game history data stored in the today's history data storage unit is shifted and stored in the past history data storage unit that stores the game history data before the previous day. At the same time, since the stored data in the history data storage unit of today is erased, the game history data of today can be stored and held as past game history data before the previous day on the gaming machine side, and the past game history data can be stored. It can also be used effectively.

(10-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (10-1) to (10-3), the gaming machine performs control for transmitting game data generated during the game to the gaming device. Including data transmission control means (game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data),
The gaming device is configured to update and store game history data based on game data transmitted under the control of the game data transmission control unit (the P game in the data storage unit 392). Including a history data storage unit and this S game history data storage unit)
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(10-5) Another aspect of the present invention includes a communication unit (CU communication control unit 80) that communicates with a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a gaming value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a number of balls),
A game apparatus-side game history data display means (display 312) for executing history display based on game history data generated by executing the game in the gaming machine;
When receiving information to erase at least a part of the game history data stored in the gaming machine, the history display is cleared and the game history stored in the game history data storage means Clear processing means (clear processing unit of the game history data management unit 291) is further provided for performing control to transmit information indicating that at least a part of the data is to be erased to the gaming machine.

  According to such a configuration, when the information indicating that at least a part of the game history data is to be deleted is received on the gaming machine side, the history display is cleared and stored in the game history data storage means. Since information indicating that at least a part of the game history data is deleted is transmitted to the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the history display from being flawed on the gaming machine side and the gaming device side.

  (10-6) In the gaming machine according to (10-5), the management device in which information indicating that at least a part of the gaming history data stored in the gaming history data storage means is erased is installed in the gaming hall The receiving means (FIGS. 6, 145; external communication unit 324 receiving from the hall management computer 1) may be included.

  According to such a configuration, information for erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means can be simultaneously distributed from a management device to a plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the work of erasing at least a part of the game history data stored in the game history data storage means.

(10-7) In the gaming machine of (10-5) or (10-6), the communication unit receives game data generated during a game of the gaming machine (transmits from the game history data management unit 291) Received game data)
The gaming device includes a game history data update storage unit (a game history data storage unit of the P storage game data storage unit 392 or a game unit S of the data storage unit 392) that updates and stores game history data based on the game data received by the communication unit. A table game history data storage unit),
The gaming device side game history data display means displays the game history data based on the game history data stored in the game history data update storage means (this P game history data storage unit or this S game game). The game history data may be displayed based on the game history data stored in the history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, the game history data is updated and stored on the gaming device side based on the game data generated during the game transmitted from the gaming machine, and based on the stored game history data. Since the game history data is displayed by the game device side game history data display means, the game history data displayed on the game device can be updated and stored separately from the gaming machine.

(11-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S, card unit 3, card issuing device, Z counter, clearing device, hall management device, prize exchange device, etc.) installed in the game hall Because
A first control unit (main control unit 323 or main control board 16, 116) and a second control unit (CU communication control unit 80 or payout control unit 17, 117) connected to be communicable with each other;
The first control means includes first identification information for identifying the first control means (SID of the main control unit or SID of the main control board) and the second control means that is an authentication partner. Second identification information for identifying (SID of CU communication control unit or SID of payout control unit) is stored (FIG. 9; EEPROM 808),
The second control means stores the second identification information and the first identification information (FIG. 9; ROM 809, EEPROM 813),
The first control means and the second control means perform authentication processing for mutual authentication (authentication sequences of FIGS. 33 and 34),
The authentication process includes
A challenge code (challenge code A in FIG. 34) is generated using the second identification information (SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809 in FIG. 9) stored in the second control means. To the first control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication response 1), and the first control means stores the second identification information (CU communication control stored in the EEPROM 808). SID), a response code (response code A in FIG. 34) is generated from the received challenge code and returned to the second control means (CU communication control unit serial ID authentication request 2), In the second control means, the response received using the stored second identification information (the SID of the CU communication control unit stored in the ROM 809). The first challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of code and (in CU communication control unit 80 determines the appropriateness of the response code received with the SID of the CU communication control unit),
Using the first identification information stored in the first control means (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 808 in FIG. 9), a challenge code is generated and transmitted to the second control means. (The challenge code of FIG. 33), the second control means receives the received first identification information (SID of the main control unit stored in the EEPROM 813 of FIG. 9). A response code (response code in FIG. 33) is generated from the challenge code and returned to the first control means (BB serial ID authentication response 2). The first control means stores the first code stored in the first control means. Second challenge response authentication process for determining the suitability of the received response code using the identification information (the main control unit 323 receives the received response The appropriateness of over de including by determining) and using the SID of the main control unit.

  According to such a configuration, the first control means and the second control means transmit the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and use the identification information stored in the other control means. Because the challenge-response authentication is performed, in which a response code is generated from the received challenge code and sent back to one control means, the challenge code and response code sent and received between both control means are leaked. Even so, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the control means due to leakage of the identification information as much as possible.

  (11-2) In the gaming machine of the above (11-1), the gaming machine may be configured as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2) in which a gaming medium is played by launching a gaming medium.

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine in which a game is played by launching a game medium in the game area, the first control means and the second control means store the pair identification information used for mutual authentication. A challenge code is transmitted from one control means to the other control means, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means, and returned to the one control means. Because challenge-response authentication is performed, it is difficult to specify the stored identification information even if a challenge code or response code transmitted / received between both control means is leaked, Unauthorized acts on the control means due to the leakage of identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  (11-3) In the gaming machine according to (11-1), the gaming machine includes a variable display device capable of changing a display state, and a game can be started by setting a bet amount for one game. In addition, when one display is completed by displaying and displaying the display result of the variable display device, and the display result that is derived and displayed becomes a predetermined display result, a gaming machine that can generate a prize (Slot machine 2S) may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the variable display device whose display state can be changed is provided, and the game can be started by setting the number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device is derived and displayed. In the gaming machine in which a winning can be generated when one game is finished and the derived display result becomes a predetermined display result, the first control means and the second control means Stores the identification information of the pair used for mutual authentication, and transmits the challenge code from one control means to the other control means and receives the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means Since a response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed. Even responsible sales person or response code is leaked, it is difficult to identify the identification information stored, can be prevented as much as possible fraud to the control unit due to leakage of the identification information.

(11-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (11-1) to (11-3), the first control unit and the second control unit are a pair used for mutual authentication. Stores authentication information (EEPROM 808, 813 stores an authentication key consisting of a common key)
The authentication process further includes:
The first control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the second control means (the main control unit uses the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 808). The encrypted random number B obtained by encrypting the random number B is generated and transmitted to the CU communication control unit as the device authentication request 2 together with the MAC), and the second control unit uses the authentication information for the result data. A first authentication process that performs arithmetic processing and checks consistency with the result data (the CU communication control unit determines consistency with the MAC as a plaintext random number B that is a composite of the received random number B); ,
The second control means executes arithmetic processing using the authentication information and transmits the result data of the arithmetic processing to the first control means (the authentication key stored in the EEPROM 813 by the CU communication control unit) Is used to generate an encrypted random number A obtained by encrypting the random number A and transmit it together with the MAC as a device authentication response 1 to the main control unit), and the first control means uses the authentication information for the result data. A second authentication process that performs arithmetic processing and checks the consistency with the result data (in the main communication control unit, the consistency with the MAC is determined as a plaintext random number A combined with the received random number A); May be included.

  According to such a configuration, authentication processing using the pair authentication information used for mutual authentication stored in the first control means and the second control means is also executed. Mutual authentication becomes possible and security is improved. Moreover, since this authentication process also transmits / receives the result data obtained by executing the calculation process using the stored authentication information, even if the transmitted / received result data leaks out, the authentication information It is difficult to specify and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the control means due to information leakage as much as possible.

  (11-5) In the gaming machine described in (11-4) above, the first control unit and the second control unit are appropriate as a result of the first authentication process and the second authentication process. After obtaining a certain authentication, it may be configured to perform cryptographic communication with each other using the authentication information (a process for performing communication using the session key in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm that the authentication information is correct by obtaining authentication that the results of the first authentication process and the second authentication process using the authentication information stored in each other are appropriate. After that, in order to perform encryption communication with each other using the authentication information, it is possible to perform appropriate encryption communication with correct authentication information.

(12-1) A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player is connected to the gaming machine so as to be communicable (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), and a recording medium (card ) And using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, a game that enables a game on the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3),
The gaming device is:
A test mode detection means (a card reader / writer 327 for detecting an inserted test card) for detecting a transition to a test mode for confirming the operation of the gaming machine;
Test mode notification means for notifying the gaming machine that the test mode detection means has detected the transition to the test mode (game history data management unit 391 for transmitting a test hit mode notification);
The gaming machine is
Normal game data update means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; display effect control unit) for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game not notified by the test mode notification means. 292 P game history data storage unit and S game history data storage unit)
Based on the notification from the test mode notification means, the gaming machine enters a state in which the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means (FIGS. 8, 147; Depending on the function, the game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit but is stored in the trial game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game-in-game data for updating game history data generated when a player plays a game during a normal game that has not been notified by the test mode notification means for confirming the operation of the gaming machine. Since the updating means is provided in the gaming machine, it is possible to aggregate the game history data during the normal game in the gaming machine.

  In addition, based on the fact that the gaming machine has been notified by the test mode notification means, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so it is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only game history data during a normal game can be tabulated.

(12-2) In the gaming system described in (12-1) above, the gaming machine controls data transmission in the test mode for performing control to transmit the gaming history data in the testing mode to the gaming device. (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; game history data management unit 291 for transmitting game data in the trial hit mode)
The gaming device displays the game history data in the test mode transmitted under the control of the data transmission control means in the test mode (totaled by the action of the trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391) The game history data in the trial hit mode may be displayed on the display 312).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (12-3) In the gaming system according to (12-1) or (12-2) above, the gaming machine includes game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game, In addition, it may be configured to include data storage means during test mode (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; test hit game history data storage section of the display effect control section 292) for storing game history data during the test mode. .

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (12-4) In the gaming system according to (12-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode is configured to display a predetermined operation (an icon of a recount button displayed on the display 312) during the test mode. Based on the fact that the touch operation has been performed, the stored game history data is once cleared, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (the test hit mode based on the reception of the recounting notification) The processing unit may be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (12-5) In the gaming system according to (12-3) or (12-4), the gaming machine displays the game history data during the test mode stored in the data storage means during the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means during the test mode for performing control (a test hit mode processing unit for controlling the display devices 54 and 510 to display game history data in the test hit mode).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed on the gaming machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming machine. It becomes.

(12-6) In the gaming system according to any one of (12-1) to (12-5) above, the gaming machine can play a game by using a score, and the score is updated with the game. Includes point update means (game ball counter, point counter)
The score update means updates the score so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (addition of game balls (or score points based on reception of a game ball addition command (or score score addition command)) May be configured to perform (addition)).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

(12-7) In the gaming system according to any one of (12-1) to (12-6) above, the gaming machine can play a game by using points,
The gaming device may provide a command (a game ball addition command or a score addition command) to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. ) Is transmitted to the ball update command transmission control means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; trial hit mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 391).

  According to such a configuration, when the score becomes a predetermined value during the test mode, a command for setting the score to exceed the predetermined value is transmitted to the gaming machine. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus having a function of outputting a command for counting game history data even after the score has reached a predetermined value.

(13-1) The present invention accepts a recording medium (card) and stores a player's valuable value (a prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium. It is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P unit communication control unit 81, S unit communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming. And
Normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the gaming machine (FIG. 8). ; P display game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
Based on the notification of the test mode received from the gaming device, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data updating means (FIGS. 8 and 147; The game history data is not stored in the P game history data storage unit or the S game history data storage unit, but is stored in the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, normal game data update means for updating game history data generated by a player playing a game during a normal game that has not received a test mode notification for confirming the operation of the gaming machine. Therefore, the game history data during the normal game can be collected in the gaming machine.

  In addition, based on the fact that the gaming machine has received the notification of the test mode, the game history data is not updated by the normal game data update means, so that the normal game is distinguished from the game history data in the test mode. Only the game history data inside can be tabulated.

  (13-2) In the gaming machine described in the above (13-1), a test mode data transmission control unit (FIGS. 8 and 147) that controls to transmit the game history data in the test mode to the gaming device. A game history data management unit 291) for transmitting game data in the trial hit mode may be included.

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed by the gaming device, various adjustment operations can be performed while viewing the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming device. Work efficiency is improved.

  (13-3) In the gaming machine according to (13-1) or (13-2), the test mode is separate from the game history data generated when a player plays a game during the normal game. It may be configured to include test mode data storage means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147; trial hit game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292) for storing the game history data therein.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine includes the test mode data storage means for storing the game history data in the test mode separately from the game history data in the normal game, the game in the normal game It is possible to store the game history data in the test mode separately from the history data.

  (13-4) In the gaming machine described in (13-3) above, the data storage means during the test mode is configured to perform a predetermined operation during the test mode (touch a recount button icon displayed on the display 312). The stored game history data is once cleared based on the operation being performed, and then the storage of the game history data in the test mode is resumed (test hit mode processing based on reception of the recount notification) May be configured to clear the memory of the trial hit game history data storage unit).

  According to such a configuration, based on a predetermined operation being performed during the test mode, the game history data stored in the data storage means during the test mode is once cleared and then a new game history during the test mode. In order to resume the data storage, for example, after performing various adjustment operations based on the game history data in the test mode, the game history data in the test mode is again added again in order to add up the adjusted operation data. As described above, it is possible to start counting the game history in the test mode from the beginning.

  (13-5) In the gaming machine according to (13-4), the gaming machine is in a test mode in which control is performed to display gaming history data in the test mode stored in the data storage means during the test mode. It may be configured to include data display control means (a test hit mode processing unit that performs control to display game history data in the test hit mode on the display units 54 and 510).

  According to such a configuration, since game history data in the test mode is displayed on the gaming machine, it is possible to perform various adjustment operations by looking at the game history data in the test mode displayed on the gaming machine. It becomes.

(13-6) In any of the above gaming machines (13-1) to (13-5), a point update means for updating a point used for a game with a game (game ball counter, Point counter)
The score update means updates the score so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less during the test mode (addition of game balls (or score points based on reception of a game ball addition command (or score score addition command)) May be configured to perform (addition)).

  According to such a configuration, during the test mode, since the score does not become a predetermined value or less, it is possible to continue to collect the game history in the test mode regardless of the score.

  (13-7) In the gaming machine according to (13-6), the score update means sets a score to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Based on the fact that a command (game ball addition command or score points addition command) for exceeding the value is received from the gaming device, the score is updated so that the score does not become a predetermined value or less (or game ball addition command (or The game ball may be added (or the number of points is added) based on the reception of the number of points addition command).

  According to such a configuration, it is based on having received from the gaming device a command for setting the score exceeding the predetermined value to the gaming machine when the score reaches a predetermined value during the test mode. Because it is updated so that the score does not fall below the predetermined value, the game has a function of outputting a command for counting the game history data even after the score becomes the predetermined value in the test mode. An apparatus can be provided.

(14-1) The present invention is an enclosed game machine (pachinko machine 2) that performs a game using a game medium (pachinko ball) enclosed therein,
A circulation path (out ball flow path 702, collection ball passage path 901, ball collection path 189) for collecting game media used in the game and circulating it again to a position where it can be used for the game;
A transport mechanism (transport unit 45) for transporting the game medium in the circulation path to a position where it can be used for games;
An extraction mechanism (ball removal unit 39) for performing an operation of extracting the game medium in the circulation path from the inside based on the operation detection for extracting the game medium;
A ready detection means (a cue switch (upward switch)) detects that a game medium supplied from the outside into the circulation path is transported by the transport mechanism and is ready for a game using the game medium. 41a, S36)
When the operation is detected when the preparation completion detection unit is in the detection state, control is performed to operate the extraction mechanism, while the operation is detected when the preparation completion detection unit is in the non-detection state. In this case, control means for controlling the operation of the transport mechanism until it is detected by the preparation completion detection means that the preparation completion state has been detected (the ball conveyance process at the time of ball removal in FIG. 109 and the ball removal process at FIG. 110) ).

  According to such a configuration, at the stage where the enclosed game machine is installed in the amusement hall, since the game medium is not supplied into the circulation path, the ready detection means does not detect the ready detection state. In such a case, when an operation for supplying game media from the outside into the circulation path and extracting the game media is detected, the ready status detection means is set to the ready status. The transport mechanism is operated until the game medium is detected, and the game medium is transported by the transport mechanism. On the other hand, when the ready detection means is already in the detection state, the game mechanism is operated by detecting the operation for removing the game medium. The medium can be removed. That is, the game medium extraction operation and the preparatory operation at the time of installation of the enclosed game machine can be performed by the same operation, and the operation by the game shop clerk is simplified and the work efficiency is improved.

  (14-2) In the enclosed game machine according to (14-1), the control means is configured to detect the preparation completion detection means by the preparation completion detection means even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the transport mechanism (transport section 45) is operated. When it is not detected that the ready state is reached, control is performed to stop the operation of the transport mechanism (S32 to S40).

  According to such a configuration, the conveyance mechanism continues to operate in an abnormal state in which it is not detected by the preparation completion detection means that the preparation completion state is detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the conveyance mechanism has operated. Can be prevented.

(14-3) In the enclosed game machine according to (14-1) or (14-2), a prescribed number of the circulation paths (out ball flow down path 702, recovery ball passage path 901, ball recovery path 189). A number detection means (launching ball detection switch 903) that is provided in a stop path portion where the game medium enclosed beyond the limit is in a stopped state and detects the game medium collected in the circulation path after being used in the game;
It further includes an excess determination means (S103) for determining that the excess of the enclosed game medium is detected when the number detection means is in a continuous detection state in which a game medium is detected continuously for a specified time or more.

  According to such a configuration, when the number detection means enters a continuous detection state in which a game medium is continuously detected for a specified time or more, it can be determined that the encapsulated game medium is exceeded, and the enclosed game medium is exceeded. An abnormality that becomes a state can be determined.

(14-4) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of (14-1) to (14-3), a launching means for launching a game medium in a position usable for a game and using the game medium ( Launcher 38),
A firing number counting means (climbing switch (upper) 41a, payout control unit 17) for counting the number of game media fired by the launching means,
Each time the game medium is fired by the launching means (launching unit 38), the game medium moves from the detection position of the preparation completion detecting means (climbing switch (upper) 41a, S36) to a position where it can be used for the game (FIG. 2). ),
The firing number counting means counts the number of firings based on the detection output of the preparation completion detecting means (FIG. 106; when the ball raising switch (upper) 41a changes from on to off, the payout unit 17 counts the number of fired balls. +1).

  According to such a configuration, the detection output of the preparation completion detection means is also used for counting the number of game media fired by the launching means, thereby achieving a reduction in the number of parts by combining the functions of the preparation completion detection means. be able to.

(15-1) The present invention provides an enclosed game machine that allows a game to be played using a game medium (pachinko ball) enclosed therein, provided that a recording medium (card) is received. (Pachinko machine 2)
A launch operation unit (hit ball operation handle 25) for performing an operation of launching a game medium to a game area (game area 27);
A drive source (shooting motor 18) for driving a shooting member (ball striking hammer 920) for shooting game media based on the operation of the shooting operation unit;
Origin detection means (fire motor origin sensor 37) for detecting the origin position of the drive operation of the drive source;
Error determination means (S71, S72) for determining an error based on detection of a change in detection state by the origin detection means when the recording medium is not received is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the origin position of the drive source that drives the launching member for launching the game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit is detected by the origin detection means, and the recording medium is received. Abnormality that the drive source that drives the firing member operates even though the recording medium is not received because it is determined as an error based on the detection of the change in the detection state by the origin detection means when there is not Sometimes it is possible to deal with it.

(15-2) In the enclosed game machine of the above (15-1), a circulation path (out ball down path 702) for collecting the game media used in the game and circulating it again to a position where it can be used for the game. , Recovery ball passage route 901, ball recovery route 189),
A number detection means (launching ball detection switch 903) used for counting the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used in the game,
The error determination means is characterized in that an error determination is made when the number detection means is detected even when the recording medium is not received (S102, S103).

  According to such a configuration, when the recording medium is not accepted, it is possible to determine an error as an abnormality in which the number of game media collected after being used in the game and collected in the circulation path is detected. It is possible to deal with such abnormalities.

(15-3) The enclosed game machine according to (15-1) or (15-2) further includes a communication unit (P-unit communication control unit 81) that communicates with a gaming device that receives the recording medium,
The error determination means determines whether or not the recording medium is received based on a signal from the gaming device received by the communication unit (FIG. 41; a command including an operation instruction of ON while holding a card). It is determined based on reception).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the recording medium is received based on the fact that the communication unit has received a signal from the gaming device that receives the recording medium.

(15-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, it is possible to play a game using a game medium (pachinko ball) enclosed therein, provided that there is a valuable value (number of game balls). Enclosed game machine (Pachinko machine 2)
A launch operation unit (hit ball operation handle 25) for performing an operation of launching a game medium to a game area (game area 27);
A drive source (shooting motor 18) for driving a shooting member (ball striking hammer 920) for shooting game media based on the operation of the shooting operation unit;
Origin detection means (fire motor origin sensor 37) for detecting the origin position of the drive operation of the drive source;
Error determination means (S71A, S72) for determining an error based on detection of a change in the detection state by the origin detection means when there is no value is provided.

  According to such a configuration, when the origin position of the drive source that drives the launching member for firing the game medium based on the operation of the launch operation unit is detected by the origin detection means, there is no value Since it is determined as an error based on detection of a change in the detection state by the origin detection means, it is possible to cope with an abnormality in which the drive source that drives the firing member operates despite its lack of value. It becomes.

(15-5) In the enclosed game machine of the above (15-4), a circulation path (out ball flow down path 702) for collecting the game media used for the game and circulating it again to a position where it can be used for the game. , Recovery ball passage route 901, ball recovery route 189),
A number detection means (launching ball detection switch 903) used for counting the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used in the game,
The error determination means is characterized in that an error determination is also made when detection by the number detection means is performed when there is no value (S102A, S103).

  According to such a configuration, when there is no value, an abnormal state in which detection by the number detecting means used for counting the number of game media collected in the circulation path after being used in the game is performed. Sometimes an error can be determined, and it is possible to deal with such an abnormal state.

(15-6) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of (15-1) to (15-5) above, a position at which the game medium enclosed in the game machine can be recovered after being used for games and used again for games. A circulation mechanism (conveying unit 45) that circulates to
Circulation stop means (S93, S106) for stopping the circulation mechanism when the error determination means determines an error is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, since the circulation mechanism is stopped when the error determination means determines that an error has occurred, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of circulating the game medium enclosed therein regardless of the occurrence of an error. Can do.

(15-7) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of (15-1) to (15-6), the valuable value is subtracted according to the use of the game medium for the game, and the prize is generated. Valuable value updating means to be added (payout control unit 17, FIG. 46);
Update stop means (S94, S107) for stopping the update function of the valuable value update means when the error determination means determines an error is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, since the updating function of the valuable value updating unit is stopped when the error determining unit determines that an error has occurred, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the points are updated despite being in an error state. can do.

  (15-8) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of (15-1) to (15-7), the error determination means has a predetermined maximum allowable time interval at which the detection state by the origin detection means is switched. When it is longer than the time or shorter than the predetermined maximum allowable time, an error is determined (S76 to S83).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine that an abnormality is an error in which the drive speed of the drive source that drives the launching member for launching the game medium is too slow or too fast.

  (15-9) In the enclosed game machine according to any one of (15-1) to (15-8), the error determination unit is operable even if the origin detection unit elapses for a predetermined time during driving of the drive source. An error determination is performed even when a detection signal is not output (S76, S76, S81, S82, S90).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform error determination when the drive source for driving the launching member for firing the game medium is being driven, but the drive source is not driven. .

(16-1) The present invention is a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player,
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
When an operation for shifting to the non-operation mode is performed when the player is in an operation mode in which a player can play a game, game state data associated with game control by the game control means in the operation mode is stored. Game state storage means for saving (FIG. 131; variables related to the payout rate such as a probability function and a variable time shortening function are temporarily saved in a save area);
When an operation for canceling the non-operation mode is performed, the game control by the game control unit is performed by returning to the game state in the operation mode based on the game state data stored in the game state storage unit. And a game state return means (FIG. 132; a variable related to a payout rate such as a variable time shortening function temporarily saved in the save area is returned).

  According to such a configuration, when shifting from the operation mode to the non-operation mode, the game state data associated with the game control by the game control means in the operation mode is stored in the gaming machine, and an operation for canceling the non-operation mode is performed. When it is performed, the game control can be resumed by returning to the game state in the operation mode based on the stored game state data, so when returning from the non-operation mode to the operation mode. It is possible to prevent an increase in communication processing load caused by having game state data transmitted from another device.

(16-2) In the gaming machine of (16-1), a display unit (display unit 54, liquid crystal display unit 510) that displays predetermined information;
Display control means (display control board 53, presentation control board 90; trial hit mode processing section in FIGS. 8 and 147) for displaying on the display section the game history during which the game was played in the non-operation mode. And “display in trial mode”),
The display control means clears the display of the game history on the display unit when receiving an instruction to cancel the non-operation mode (FIG. 132; game history data such as the number of game balls, the number of jackpots, the number of symbol rotations, etc.) To clear).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the gaming history during the game in the non-operating mode on the display unit provided in the gaming machine, but receive a command to cancel the non-operating mode. Since the display of the game history on the display unit is cleared at this time, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the game history in the operation mode continues to be displayed even though the non-operation mode is canceled.

(16-3) In the gaming machine of the above (16-1) or (16-2), a gaming area (gaming area 27) in which a gaming medium is launched;
Non-operating mode canceling means for canceling the non-operating mode (FIG. 132; game) on condition that the presence / absence of winning of the launched game medium is confirmed when the operation for canceling the non-operating mode is performed. Is completed, the card unit is notified of completion of mode switching preparation by “operation response”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the non-operation mode is canceled although the presence / absence of winning of the game medium that has been launched has not been determined.

(16-4) In any of the gaming machines of (16-1) to (16-3), a variable display device (variable display device) capable of changing a display state;
Specific game state control means for controlling to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display device becomes a predetermined specific display mode (main control board 16 for controlling the big hit, generating a prize) Main control board 116),
When receiving a command to shift to the non-operation mode during variable display of the variable display device or during the specific gaming state, the variable display device is not variably displayed and is not in the specific gaming state Non-operating mode transition control means for controlling the transition to the non-operating mode after entering the state (FIG. 131; after confirming that the symbol is not changing and is not hitting, the operation mode of the main control board is switched to the payout control unit. Sending the completion of preparation).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the variable display device is shifted to the non-operating mode in spite of the variable display or the specific gaming state.

(17-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming device is:
Player identification information reading means (such as a card reader / writer 327) for reading player identification information (C-ID or the like) for identifying a player who performs a game;
Player identification information transmission control means for performing control for transmitting the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means to the gaming machine (FIG. 39; transmitting an operation instruction including a C-ID after card insertion) CU communication control unit 80, S3) of FIG.
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing control for displaying the player's personal game history in accordance with the command of the communication means,
The communication means receives the player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means, and transmits the received player identification information to the display control means (FIG. 133; card insertion request). (Card ID)),
The display control means includes
The player identification information storage means for storing the transmitted player identification information (the current player game history data storage unit in FIGS. 8, 147 and 149, the display effect control board in FIG. Save "),
Based on the fact that the player identification information has been transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control means, the player identification information transmitted and the player identification stored in the player identification information storage means And the same determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) for performing the same determination process for determining whether or not the same player is specified by the information.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. The player identification information is stored on the gaming machine side, and when the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is transmitted from the gaming device, the transmitted game The same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information, so that the previous player and the current player are the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of totaling game history data as data of a player who is different from the player who is actually playing the game.

(17-2) In the gaming system according to (17-1), the gaming device includes:
A recording medium receiving unit (card insertion / extraction port 309) for receiving the recording medium;
A recording medium ejecting means (card reader / writer 327 for ejecting a card in FIG. 48) for ejecting the recording medium received by the recording medium accepting unit in response to a return operation of the recording medium;
The display control means is a game history data totaling means (FIG. 8, FIG. 147, FIG. 149; game history data management unit 291) for totaling game history data for each player specified by the transmitted player specifying information. A normal mode processing unit, a current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is configured such that after the recording medium is ejected by the recording medium ejecting means, the player specifying information is read by the player specifying information reading means and transmitted under the control of the player specifying information transmission control means. On the basis of what has been determined, the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that Y is determined in FIG. 42; S9) and is determined to be the same. Successive tabulation means for accumulating and tabulating new game history data with respect to game history data corresponding to the player (S12 in FIG. 42, [when card ID matches] by display control control board in FIG. 133) Future game results Is combined with personal game history data)
Player identification stored in the player identification information storage means on condition that the same determination means determines that they are not the same (FIG. 42; provided that it is determined N in S9). Game history data erasure means for erasing the game history data corresponding to the player specified by the information (S15 of FIG. 42, clearing personal game history data [when card ID does not match] by display effect control board of FIG. 133) It is characterized by including.

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player. In addition, when the previous player and the current player are not the same, the game history data corresponding to the previous player is erased, so that the previous player's game history data is compared with the previous player's game history data. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of taking over the game history data and totaling it.

  (17-3) In the gaming system according to (17-1) or (17-2), the communication unit stores player identification information transmitted under the control of the player identification information transmission control unit. ("Card ID acquisition / storage" by the payout control unit in FIG. 133), the player's personal game history is stored separately from the display control means in association with the player specifying information (by the payout control unit in FIG. 133). [When the card IDs match] The future game results are summed up with personal game history data.

  According to such a configuration, since the communication means stores the player's personal game history separately from the display control means in association with the player identification information, the player identification is also performed on the communication means side. The personal game history associated with the information can be used effectively.

(17-4) In the gaming system according to any one of (17-1) to (17-3), the player specifying information is an ID (C-ID) for recording medium identification recorded on the recording medium. ) And
The player specifying information reading means reads, as the player specifying information, an ID for identifying a recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit that receives the recording medium (FIG. 41; inserted). The card reader / writer 327 reads the C-ID of the card).

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(17-5) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player possesses a valuable value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a player's value specified by recording information recorded on the recording medium). A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine) provided with a communication unit (P communication control unit 81, S communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device (card unit 3) that can be used for gaming. 2S),
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing control to display the player's personal game history according to the command of the communication means,
The communication means transmits player specifying information for specifying a player who performs a game transmitted from the gaming device to the display control means (FIG. 133; card insertion request (card ID)),
The display control means includes
Player identification information storage means for receiving and storing the transmitted player identification information (the “card” by the current player game history data storage section of FIGS. 8, 147 and 149, the display effect control board of FIG. 133) ID acquisition / storage "),
Based on the transmission of the player specifying information, the same player is specified by the transmitted player specifying information and the player specifying information stored in the player specifying information storage means. The same determination means (FIG. 42; S8, S9) which performs the same determination process which determines whether it is whether or not is included.

  According to such a configuration, when the player specifying information for specifying the player performing the game is read by the player specifying information reading means and the player specifying information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming machine. The player identification information is stored on the gaming machine side, and when the player identification information read by the player identification information reading means is transmitted from the gaming device, the transmitted game The same determination process is performed to determine whether or not the same player is specified by the player specifying information and the already stored player specifying information, so that the previous player and the current player are the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of being regarded as the same player even though they are different players.

  In addition, since the player determination information storage means for storing the player specification information and the same determination means for performing the same determination processing are provided in the display control means of the gaming machine, the communication means side has the same determination processing function. Since it is not necessary to provide a common communication means between the gaming machine having the display control means and the gaming machine not having the display control means, it is possible to mass-produce a small variety of communication means.

(17-6) In the gaming machine of the above (17-5), the display control unit is a game history data totaling unit that totals game history data for each player specified by the transmitted player specifying information ( 8, 147, 149; normal mode processing unit of the game history data management unit 291, current player game history data storage unit of the display effect control unit 292),
The game history data totaling means is a player determined to be the same on condition that the same determination means determines that they are the same (provided that Y is determined in S9 in FIG. 42). In addition, the game history data corresponding to the game history data is accumulated and summed up and summed up and summed up (S12 in FIG. 42, [when the card ID matches] by the display effect control board in FIG. 133) Including personal game history data).

  According to such a configuration, when the previous player and the current player are the same, the game history data of the current player with respect to the game history data aggregated as the game history data of the previous player When the player who has played a game once leaves the seat and returns to play again, the game history data before leaving the seat is determined to be the same player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game history data from being interrupted before and after leaving the seat even though the player is the same player.

  (17-7) In the gaming machine of the above (17-5) or (17-6), the communication means stores the transmitted player identification information (“card ID acquisition by the payout control unit in FIG. 133). (Save)), storing the player's personal game history separately from the display control means in association with the player specifying information (when the card ID matches by the payout control unit in FIG. 133), It is characterized by being combined with personal game history data.

  According to such a configuration, since the communication means stores the player's personal game history separately from the display control means in association with the player identification information, the player identification is also performed on the communication means side. The personal game history associated with the information can be used effectively.

  (17-8) In any one of the above gaming machines (17-5) to (17-7), the player specifying information is a recording medium identification ID (C-ID) recorded on the recording medium. It is characterized by being.

  According to such a configuration, since the ID for identifying the recording medium recorded on the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving unit is read by the player specifying information reading means as the player specifying information, the player can play the game In inputting the player specifying information, the player specifying information can be input by performing an operation of allowing the gaming device to receive the recording medium so as to play the game. The player specifying information input operation is performed separately from the receiving of the recording medium. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience of forcing the player.

(18-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Using the player's valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) specified by the recorded information received on the recording medium (card) and playing the game on the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to enable,
The gaming machine is
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with instructions of the communication means,
The gaming apparatus transmits update value information specifying an update value of the valuable value and update factor information indicating the update factor of the valuable value to the communication means (the number of addition request balls and the number of subtraction request balls in FIG. 121). And CU status)
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the transmitted update value information (“update the number of game balls to 175” in FIG. 43, “update the number of game balls to 125” in FIG. 44, FIG. 45). "Update the number of game balls to 700"), the updated value and the transmitted update factor information are transmitted to the display control means (game ball total number information of FIG. 125 and CU of FIG. 126). Status and send)
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in a manner in which the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines whether prepaid lending or replay lending in FIG. The screen display of FIG. 137 is performed in a distinguishable manner).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the update factor, and the player feels uncomfortable. Inconvenience can be prevented.

  (18-2) In the gaming system according to (18-1), the display control means executes an effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated in a manner corresponding to the transmitted update factor information (FIG. In the screen display of 137, the possessed ball is gradually updated and displayed).

  According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(18-3) In the gaming system of the above (18-1) or (18-2), the gaming machine can be played with points, and points are added in accordance with the occurrence of winnings (see FIG. 46; Add 3 balls to 1010 game balls)
The valuable value is the score (number of game balls),
The update factor information is information indicating whether to use the balance as a player-owned game value or to use the acquired value acquired by the player as a game value owned by the player (FIG. 126; A prepaid lending display for Bit 8 and a replay lending display for Bit 9 included in the CU state).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the balance is used or the acquired value acquired by the game is used as the update factor by the update factor information.

(18-4) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player possesses a valuable value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a player's value specified by recording information recorded on the recording medium). A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P communication control unit 81, S communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that can be used for gaming. ,
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with commands from the communication means,
The communication means updates the valuable value based on the update value information specifying the update value of the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device (“update the number of game balls to 175” in FIG. 43, FIG. 44). “Update the number of game balls to 125”, “Update the number of game balls to 700” in FIG. 45), update value of the updated valuable value and the valuable value transmitted from the gaming device to the display control means And update factor information indicating (the game ball total number information of FIG. 125 and the CU state of FIG. 126 are transmitted),
The display control means updates and displays the valuable value transmitted in a manner in which the update factor can be recognized based on the transmitted update factor information (determines whether prepaid lending or replay lending in FIG. The screen display of FIG. 137 is performed in a distinguishable manner).

  According to such a configuration, since the update display of the valuable value is performed in such a manner that the update factor can be recognized based on the update factor information, the player can recognize the update factor, and the player feels uncomfortable. Inconvenience can be prevented.

  (18-5) In the gaming machine of the above (18-4), the display control means executes an effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated in a mode corresponding to the transmitted update factor information (FIG. 137). In this screen display, the possessed ball is gradually updated.

  According to such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the valuable value is updated by the effect display in which the valuable value is gradually updated.

(18-6) In the gaming machine of the above (18-4) or (18-5), the gaming machine can be played with points, and the points are added according to the occurrence of winning (FIG. 46). ; Add 3 balls to 1010 game balls)
The value is the score,
The update factor information is information indicating whether to use the balance as a player-owned game value or to use the acquired value acquired by the player as a game value owned by the player (FIG. 126; A prepaid lending display for Bit 8 and a replay lending display for Bit 9 included in the CU state).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the balance is used or the acquired value acquired by the game is used as the update factor by the update factor information.

(19-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of stored balls) possessed by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium to enable a game on the gaming machine A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3),
The gaming machine is
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with instructions of the communication means,
The communication means receives information on the gaming state from the game control means and transmits the received information to the display control means (game machine information received from the main control board in FIG. 125 (B) and FIG. 126). Is transmitted to the display effect control board 53), information relating to the valuable value owned by the player is received from the gaming device and transmitted to the display control means (game ball acquisition number information and back of FIG. 125 (B)). Ball addition information and game ball number-of-games information).

  According to such a configuration, the display control means for performing display control in accordance with the command of the communication means for communicating with the gaming device is provided in the gaming machine, and the game state information from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. Is received by the communication means, and the information is transmitted to the display control means, while the communication means itself displays the information about the value of the player's possession from the gaming device to be received by the communication means and transmitted to the display control means. Compared with performing control, the burden of display control processing of the communication means can be reduced.

(19-2) In the gaming system according to (19-1), the gaming machine can play a game with points (a game can be consumed by consuming game balls),
The communication means updates the score according to the game use of the score (FIG. 46; subtracts the number of balls used for the game = 13 from the number of game balls = 1010), and from the game control means The score is updated based on the information related to winning and the information related to updating the score from the gaming device (FIG. 46; the number of balls to be added corresponding to the winning = 3 is added to the number of games = 1010; 43 and 44, the number of game balls is added based on 125, and the number of game balls is subtracted based on the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 in FIG. 45).

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the burden of the display control processing of the communication control means, the communication means based on the information related to winning from the game control means and the information related to updating the score from the gaming device. However, in order to update the score, it is possible to control the update of the score without difficulty.

(19-3) In the gaming system of the above (19-1) or (19-2), the gaming device stores and manages the valuable value (FIGS. 7, 146; CU side is gaming) Remember and manage the number of balls),
The communication means transmits information related to the gaming state received from the game control means to the gaming device (sends ball-related information received from the main control board of FIG. 123 to the card unit).

  According to such a configuration, the burden of display control processing of the communication control means can be reduced, and the process of transmitting the information related to the valuable value received from the game control means by the communication control means can be performed without difficulty. It becomes possible.

(19-4) In the gaming system according to any one of the above (19-1) to (19-3), the gaming device stores and manages points as a gaming value owned by the player (see FIG. 7, FIG. 146; CU side memorizes and manages the number of game balls),
The communication means transmits update information of the points based on information related to winning from the game control means to the gaming device (game ball earning number information as the number of winning balls received from the main control board of FIG. 123). To the card unit),
The gaming device updates the score based on the received score update information (FIG. 46; game balls count = 1010 + 3−3 based on motion response including the added ball count = 3 and the subtracted ball count = 13). 13 = 1000).

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the load of the display control processing of the communication control means, the communication control means sends the update information of the points based on the information related to winning from the game control means to the gaming device The game device can be performed without difficulty, and the gaming device can update the score based on the transmitted score update information.

(19-5) According to another aspect of the present invention, a player possesses a valuable value (a prepaid balance, a number of balls, or a player's valuable value specified by recording information recorded on the recording medium). A gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) provided with a communication unit (P communication control unit 81, S communication control unit 82) that communicates with a gaming device that can be used for gaming. ,
Game control means (main control boards 16, 116) for controlling the progress of the game;
Communication means (payout control units 17, 117) for communicating with the gaming apparatus;
Display control means (display effect control board 53, effect control board 90) for performing display control in accordance with instructions of the communication means,
The communication means receives information on the gaming state from the game control means and transmits the received information to the display control means (game machine information received from the main control board in FIG. 125 (B) and FIG. 126). Is transmitted to the display effect control board 53), information relating to the valuable value owned by the player is received from the gaming device and transmitted to the display control means (game ball acquisition number information and back of FIG. 125 (B)). Ball addition information and game ball number-of-games information).

  According to such a configuration, the display control means for performing display control in accordance with the command of the communication means for communicating with the gaming device is provided in the gaming machine, and the game state information from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. Is received by the communication means, and the information is transmitted to the display control means, while the communication means itself displays the information about the value of the player's possession from the gaming device to be received by the communication means and transmitted to the display control means. Compared with performing control, the burden of display control processing of the communication means can be reduced.

(19-6) In the gaming machine of the above (19-5), the gaming machine can play a game with points (a game can be consumed by consuming game balls),
The communication means updates the score according to the game use of the score (FIG. 46; subtracts the number of balls used for the game = 13 from the number of game balls = 1010), and from the game control means The score is updated based on the information related to winning and the information related to updating the score from the gaming device (FIG. 46; the number of balls to be added corresponding to the winning = 3 is added to the number of games = 1010; 43 and 44, the number of game balls is added based on 125, and the number of game balls is subtracted based on the number of balls required for subtraction = 300 in FIG. 45).

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the burden of the display control processing of the communication control means, the communication means based on the information related to winning from the game control means and the information related to updating the score from the gaming device. However, in order to update the score, it is possible to control the update of the score without difficulty.

  (19-7) In the gaming machine of the above (19-5) or (19-6), the communication means stores and manages information relating to the gaming state received from the game control means (see FIG. 7, FIG. 146; the CU side stores and manages the number of game balls) and transmits it to the game device (the ball-related information received from the main control board of FIG. 123 is transmitted to the card unit). And

  According to such a configuration, the burden of display control processing of the communication control means can be reduced, and the process of transmitting the information related to the valuable value received from the game control means by the communication control means can be performed without difficulty. It becomes possible.

  (19-8) In the gaming machines of the above (19-5) to (19-7), the communication means updates the score update information based on information related to winning from the game control means. The game value is transmitted to the gaming device that stores and manages the value as a game value (game ball earned number information received from the main control board of FIG. 123 is transmitted to the card unit). To do.

  According to such a configuration, after reducing the load of the display control processing of the communication control means, the communication control means sends the update information of the points based on the information related to winning from the game control means to the gaming device The game device can be performed without difficulty, and the gaming device can update the score based on the transmitted score update information.

(20-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S) in which a game is played by a player so as to be communicable with the gaming machine (connecting wiring with connectors 330, 20, 220), Receiving a recording medium (card) and using the valuable value (prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of balls) owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium, A gaming system comprising a gaming device (card unit 3) to be enabled and a gaming management device (higher server 801 or hall management computer 1) connected to be able to communicate with the gaming device,
The game management device includes:
Settings for performing control to transmit settings (setting information including a threshold value of security related information) used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate to the gaming device Transmission control means (S707),
The gaming machine transmits game information generated in the operating state (information such as game ball acquisition number information and game ball firing number information for calculating the base) to the gaming device (response in FIG. 18),
The gaming device is:
A setting storage unit (S755, security-related information storage unit in CU3) that stores settings transmitted by the control of the setting transmission control unit;
Appropriateness determination means (S801 to S810) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device stores the setting transmitted from the gaming management device, and determines whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate. Therefore, the game management device is less burdened than the game management device determines by itself whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate.

(20-2) In the gaming system of (20-1), the gaming management device includes:
An input setting storage means (security related information storage section in the upper server 801) for receiving and storing a setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate; ,
Setting determination means for determining whether or not the setting stored in the setting storage means is appropriate by collating the setting stored in the setting storage means with the setting stored in the input setting storage means (S706),
Setting update processing means (S707 to S713) for performing processing for updating the setting determined to be inappropriate to an appropriate setting when the setting determination means determines that the setting is inappropriate.

  According to such a configuration, it is determined whether or not the setting stored in the setting storage unit of the gaming device is appropriate by comparing with the setting stored in the input setting setting storage unit of the gaming management device. When it is determined that the setting is determined to be inappropriate, a process for updating the setting determined to be inappropriate is performed to an appropriate setting. Can be avoided.

  (20-3) In the gaming system according to (20-1) or (20-2), when the gaming device is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determining unit (Y in S810), It further includes error transmission means (S812) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error corresponding to the gaming information determined to be inappropriate to the gaming management device.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming management device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

(20-4) Another aspect of the present invention is communicable with a game management device (card unit 3) and a game machine (pachinko machine 2, slot machine 2S), and accepts a recording medium (card) to perform the recording. A gaming device (card unit 3) that enables a game in the gaming machine using a valuable value (prepaid balance, number of possessed balls, or number of accumulated balls) possessed by the player specified by recorded information recorded on the medium. ) And
A setting receiving means (external communication unit 324, S754) for receiving, from the gaming management device, a setting used to determine whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in an operating state;
A setting storage unit (S755, security-related information storage unit in CU3) that stores the setting received by the setting reception unit;
Suitability determination means (S801 to S810) for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device stores the setting transmitted from the gaming management device, and determines whether or not the numerical value of the gaming information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate. Therefore, the game management device is less burdened than the game management device determines by itself whether or not the numerical value of the game information is appropriate.

  (20-5) In the gaming device of (20-4) above, when it is determined that it is inappropriate by the suitability determining means (Y in S810), it corresponds to the game information determined to be inappropriate. An error transmitting means (S812) for transmitting error specifying information for specifying the type of error to the game management apparatus is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, when the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is determined to be inappropriate, the error specification that specifies the type of error corresponding to the game information determined to be inappropriate Since information is transmitted from the gaming device to the gaming management device, the gaming management device can grasp the type of error that has occurred.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  2 Pachinko machine, 2S slot machine, 3 card unit, 4 wooden frame, 5 front frame, 6 glass door, 10 glass door opening solenoid, 11 front frame opening solenoid, 12 glass door closing detector, 13 front frame closing detector, 16,116 Main control board, 17,117 payout control unit, 18 hitting motor, 20 connection unit, 26 game board, 309 card insertion / discharge port, 312 display, 319 replay button, 321 rental button, 322 return button 323 control unit, 324 external communication unit, 325 gaming machine communication unit, 327 card reader / writer, 330 connection unit, 701 out ball detection switch, 33 foul ball detection switch, 50 effect unit, 54 display.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine in which a game is played by a player, and a communication value connected to the gaming machine, receiving the recording medium, and using the valuable value owned by the player specified by the recording information recorded on the recording medium A gaming system comprising a gaming device that enables gaming on a gaming machine and a gaming management device that is communicably connected to the gaming device,
The game management device includes:
Setting transmission control means for performing control to transmit the setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation is appropriate, to the gaming device;
The gaming machine transmits gaming information generated in an operating state to the gaming device,
The gaming device is:
Setting storage means for storing the settings transmitted by the control of the setting transmission control means;
A game system comprising: suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means. It is possible to communicate with a game management device and a gaming machine, and accept a recording medium and enable a game on the gaming machine using a valuable value owned by the player specified by the recorded information recorded on the recording medium. A gaming device that performs
A setting receiving means for receiving, from the gaming management device, a setting used for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information generated when the gaming machine is in operation;
Setting storage means for storing the setting received by the setting receiving means;
A gaming apparatus comprising: suitability determination means for determining whether or not the numerical value of the game information transmitted from the gaming machine is appropriate based on the setting stored by the setting storage means.

Images